Maharashtra Board Class 11 Political Science Important Questions Chapter 4 Constitutional Government

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Class 11 Political Science Important Questions Chapter 4 Constitutional Government Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Political Science Important Questions Chapter 4 Constitutional Government

1A. Choose the correct alternative and complete the following statements.

Question 1.
Constitution of the ____________ was made by the Constitutional Convention. (USA, UK, India, France)
Answer:
USA

Question 2.
The Magna Carta has it’s origin in ____________ (USA, England, France, Cuba)
Answer:
England

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Political Science Important Questions Chapter 4 Constitutional Government

Question 3.
Till, recently the doctrine of absolute Parliamentary Sovereignty existed in ____________ (USA, Mexico, Argentina, UK)
Answer:
UK

Question 4.
____________ is an example of a ‘Holding Together’ federation. (USA, India, UK, Portugal)
Answer:
UK

Question 5.
____________ is an example of a ‘Coming Together’ federation. (USA, India, UK, Portugal)
Answer:
USA

Question 6.
Protection of rights is entrusted to the ____________ (Legislature, Executive, Civil Services, Judiciary)
Answer:
Judiciary

Question 7.
A ____________ system functions on ‘Separation of Powers’ theory. (dictatorship, parliamentary, presidential, federation)
Answer:
Presidential

1B. Identify the incorrect pair in every set, correct it and rewrite.

Question 1.
(a) England – Republic
(b) USA – Federation
(c) Portugal – Unitary System
Answer:
(a) England – Constitutional Monarchy

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Political Science Important Questions Chapter 4 Constitutional Government

Question 2.
(a) Union List – Defence
(b) State List – Atomic Energy
(c) Concurrent List – Education
Answer:
(b) Union list – Atomic energy or State list – Public health and sanitation

Question 3.
(a) Senate – USA
(b) Rajya Sabha – India
(c) House of Lords – Brazil
Answer:
(c) Houses of Lords – England

1C. State the appropriate concept for the given statement.

Question 1.
The idea that there should be limitations on powers of the government.
Answer:
Constitutionalism

Question 2.
First ten amendments to the American constitution.
Answer:
Bill of Rights

Question 3.
Type of government in which Head of State assumes his/her position on a hereditary basis.
Answer:
Monarchy

Question 4.
Process of bringing out changes in some provisions of the constitution.
Answer:
Amendment

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Political Science Important Questions Chapter 4 Constitutional Government

Question 5.
The manner in which those who hold power are expected to behave.
Answer:
Constitutional Morality

Question 6.
Executive in a parliamentary system in whose name all powers are exercised.
Answer:
Nominal Executive

1D. Answer in one sentence.

Question 1.
What is the modern view of constitutionalism?
Answer:
The modern view of constitutionalism is the idea of restricting the powers of the government as a whole.

Question 2.
Explain the doctrine of Parliamentary Sovereignty.
Answer:
The doctrine of Parliamentary Sovereignty means that the Parliament which represents the citizens has the power to make laws with no restrictions on it’s jurisdiction.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Political Science Important Questions Chapter 4 Constitutional Government

Question 3.
What was the ruling in the Kesavananda Bharati case?
Answer:
The ruling in the Kesavananda Bharati case was that ‘the basic structure of the constitution could not be altered by any amendments carried out by the legislature.

Question 4.
What is Constitutional Morality?
Constitutional Morality refers to the values which are the foundation of the constitution and the manner in which those in political power are expected to behave.

Question 5.
In a Parliamentary system who constitutes the real executive?
Answer:
The Prime Minister and the Council of Ministers i.e., the Ministry constitute the real executive in a Parliamentary System.

Question 6.
Name the two kinds of executive in a parliamentary system of government.
Answer:
The two kinds of executive in a parliamentary system of Government are nominal executive and real executive.

Question 7.
Name the two houses of legislature in the following:

  1. Indian
  2. England
  3. USA

Answer:

  1. India – Lok Sabha, Rajya Sabha
  2. England – House of Commons, House of Lords
  3. USA – Senate, House of Representatives

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Political Science Important Questions Chapter 4 Constitutional Government

Question 8.
What is the ‘veto power’ of US President The US President has the right to reject a law passed by the legislature. This is the ‘veto power’.

Question 9.
What is the unitary system of Government?
Answer:
Countries with small territory usually have a single government at the centre which is called unitary government.

Question 10.
What is the significance of the Seventh Schedule?
Answer:
The Seventh Schedule consists of the Union, State and the Concurrent lists on the basis of which government powers are distributed in India.

1E. Find the odd word out in the given set.

Question 1.
USA, UK, India, Australia.
Answer:
UK (not a federation)

Question 2.
USA, Brazil, Argentina, Japan.
Answer:
Japan (not a presidential system)

Question 3.
USA, Canada, Australia, India.
Answer:
India (not a ‘coming together’ federation)

2A. State whether the following statements are true or false with reasons.

Question 1.
Indian Constitution is enacted.
Answer:
This statement is True.

  • The Indian Constitution was framed by the Constituent Assembly of India which functioned from December 1946 till November 1949.
  • It is a product of detailed discussions, debates and deliberations. The constitution came into force on 26th January 1950.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Political Science Important Questions Chapter 4 Constitutional Government

Question 2.
Today the doctrine of Parliamentary Sovereignty no longer exists in it’s absolute form in the United Kingdom.
Answer:
This statement is True.

  • According to the doctrine of Parliamentary Sovereignty, the Parliament has the authority to make any law and the only control mechanism is a vigilant public opinion.
  • Today, the United Kingdom is a member of various international organizations and signatory to many international agreements which guarantee individual rights and restrict parliamentary powers.

Question 3.
In a parliamentary system, the Head of State is powerful.
Answer:
This statement is False.

  • A parliamentary system makes a distinction between the Head of State and Head of government. The Head of State is the nominal executive. While the Prime Minister and his/her council are the head of government.
  • All decisions and administration is conducted in the name of the nominal executive (President) by the real executive (Prime Minister and his/her Council of Ministers.)

2B. Complete the concept maps.

Question 1.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Political Science Important Questions Chapter 4 Constitutional Government 2B Q1
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Political Science Important Questions Chapter 4 Constitutional Government 2B Q1.1

Question 2.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Political Science Important Questions Chapter 4 Constitutional Government 2B Q2
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Political Science Important Questions Chapter 4 Constitutional Government 2B Q2.1

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Political Science Important Questions Chapter 4 Constitutional Government

Question 3.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Political Science Important Questions Chapter 4 Constitutional Government 2B Q3
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Political Science Important Questions Chapter 4 Constitutional Government 2B Q3.1

3. Express your opinion of the following.

Question 1.
The Presidential System may lead to a deadlock in government functioning.
Answer:
The President is both Head of State and Head of government. He/she is directly elected by the people for a fixed tenure for e.g., US President is elected for a 4 year tenure. There is only one executive. The legislature (Congress in the USA) is also directly elected by the citizens.

There exists a separation of legislative and executive powers as well as a system of ‘checks and balances’ for e.g., Legislature can impeach the President, while the President can exercise the ‘Veto Power’ to reject any law passed by the Legislature.

Thus, there can be an impasse in government functioning for e.g., since President Trump assumed office- there have been many cases of a standoff between the office of the President and the US Congress, especially the Democrats. In 2019, the Congress voted to overturn President Trump’s emergency declaration to build a border wall with Mexico. In turn, the President ‘vetoed’ this vote.

4. Answer the following questions.

Question 1.
Explain the nature of Indian Federation.
Answer:
In India, at the time of independence, there were Princely States and areas under British administration. The States were created after independence on the basis of language i.e., linguistic reorganisation of States. The Union Government created the States. The journey of Indian Federalism has been mixed. After independence, the States had been granted additional powers. However, later economic and technological changes had led to the enhancement of the powers of the Central government.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Political Science Important Questions Chapter 4 Constitutional Government

The Indian Federation differs greatly from the US federation. India has been described as ‘quasi-federation’ or a ‘federation with an unitary spirit’ as the division of powers favors the central government for e.g., it has full control over the Union list and Residuary subjects and it’s laws have precedence over state legislations even in case of the subjects in Concurrent list.

Question 2.
Explain the components of a Constitution.
Answer:
The constitution is the highest law of the country. It reflects the objectives of the state and the rights and aspiration of its citizens. It establishes the rule of law and sets limits on government authority. A constitution is a living document that indicates the way in which a country is governed. The primary function of the constitution is to lay out the basic structure of the government according to which the people are to be governed.

A constitution has three distinct but interrelated components.

  • Set of Rules – A constitution is a set of rules that describes the structure, powers and functions of the three organs of government to ensure that each organ functions without its jurisdiction. It lays down the limitations on what the government can do or cannot do.
  • Set of Rights – A constitution lists the rights of the citizens, means for protection of this rights and the duties of citizens. It also lists the means of protecting the rights e.g., in India, the judiciary is entrusted with protecting the rights. The rights guaranteed by the constitution are not unlimited i.e. they are subject to reasonable limitations.
  • Set of Objectives and Values – A constitution enumerates the values and objectives that it seeks to fulfill. For e.g., Indian Constitution seeks to ensure the values of justice, liberty and equality.

Question 3.
Explain Parliamentary system.
Answer:
The two main types of democratic governments are Parliamentary System (as seen in the United Kingdom, India, Canada, Australia, Japan, etc.) and Presidential System (which exists in the United State of America, Argentina, Mexico, Brazil, etc.). This distinction is mainly based on the nature of Legislature-Executive relationship.

Parliamentary System – It makes a distinction between Head of State (President of India) and Head of Government (Prime Minister and his Council of Ministers).

The main features of the parliamentary system are:

  • There is a fusion of legislature and executives powers. The executive i.e., the ministry is drawn from the legislature and is subordinate to it. Ministers are also members of Parliament.
  • There are two executives i.e., nominal (President of India or Monarch in England) and real (ministry). All powers are exercised by the real executive although it is conducted in the name of the nominal executive.
  • It is a responsible government- The Prime Minister and the Council of Ministers stay in power only as long as they have the required majority in the Parliament. In case, the Ministry loses majority support, the Prime Minister along with his Council of Ministers has to resign.
  • It may exist either as Republics or as Constitutional Monarchies depending on the nature of the nominal executive. In a Republic, the nominal executive is elected while in a Monarchy, he/she assumes position on the basis of heredity.
  • Most Parliamentary systems have a Bicameral Parliament for e.g., in England, Parliament consists of House of Commons (lower house-directly elected)] and House of Lords (Upper house hereditary basis)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Political Science Important Questions Chapter 4 Constitutional Government

Question 4.
Explain Presidential system.
Answer:
The main features of Presidential system are:

  • The President who is directly elected by the citizens for a fixed tenure is both, Head of State and Head of Government.
  • Thus, there is only one executive.
  • The Legislature is also directly elected. Members of the executive are not permitted to belong to the legislature.
  • There exists a separation of legislative and executive powers as well as a system of checks and balances for e.g.
  • The legislature can impeach the President while the President, can exercise the ‘Veto Power’ to reject any law passed by the
  • Legislature.
  • The President can continue in office irrespective of whether or not he/she enjoys majority support in the Legislature.

Question 5.
What are the two processes of forming a Federation?
Answer:
Federation may be performed by two processes-

  • Small political units ‘come together to establish a single, large political unit for e.g., thirteen colonies came together to fight for independence from British rule and the US federation came into being. This is called centripetal process.
  • States are created by the union government for e.g., in India, States were reorganized on the basis of language and other regional aspirations. This is the centrifugal process.

Question 6.
Explain Unitary System of Government.
Answer:
Countries that are small in size prefer to have a single, central, government. This is called the Unitary System. It is seen in Cuba, France, Bolivia, Israel, Portugal, Sri Lanka, etc, Some hitherto unitary systems change to a quasi-unitary form, through establishment of provinces and distribution of political power to somewhat autonomous units, for e.g., UK has an unitary system. However, it’s regions i.e. Scotland, Wales, Northern Ireland have their own assemblies with some degree of autonomy. These are known as ‘Holding Together’ federations.

Question 7.
Write about the Seventh Schedule of Indian Constitution.
Answer:
The Seventh Schedule of the constitution contains three lists i.e., the Union List, the State List and the Concurrent List. Each list contains subjects over which the Central Government, The State Governments (as far as their respective states are concerned), or both the governments can take decisions and make laws respectively. In cases where both the Central and State governments have made laws about subjects falling in the Concurrent List, then the decision of the former prevails. Furthermore, the State Governments can also ask the Central Government to make laws on subjects included in the State List, if such a need arises.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Political Science Important Questions Chapter 4 Constitutional Government

Question 8.
Explain Basic Structure Doctrine.
Answer:
The Supreme Court of India, in the celebrated Keshavananda Bharati (1973) laid down the restrictions on the power of the Government to amend the Constitution. It ruled that the Constitution of India possessed a basic structure which could not be altered in any manner, and that other than this there were no restrictions on the power of parliament to amend the Constitution. This is known as Basic Structure Doctrine.

5. Answer the following in detail with reference to the given points.

Question 1.
Explain Federation.
(i) What is a federation?
(ii) Features of a federation.
(iii) Processes of forming a federation.
(iv) Quasi-federal nature of Indian Federation.
Answer:
(i) A federation refers to a political structure in which there are two sets of governments i.e. one for the whole country and governments in each of the federal units (called Provinces or States). There is a distribution of powers between the Federal government (also known as Union or Central Government) and the State Governments. Federal governments are preferred in countries having large size and heterogeneous population.

(ii) The main features of a federation are

  • Dual set of governments i.e., Union government and State governments.
  • Division of power between the two sets of governments for e.g., in India, jurisdiction is distributed between the Union (Centre) and States on the basis of Union, State and Concurrent list (as stated in Seventh Schedule of the Constitution)
  • A written constitution to enable a clear distribution of government powers.
  • Independent judiciary to resolve center-state or state-state disputes.

(iii) Federation may be performed by two processes

  • Small political units ‘come together to establish a single unit for e. g., thirteen colonies came together to fight for independence from British rule and the US federation came into being. This is called centripetal process.
  • States are created by the union government for e.g., in India, states were reorganized on the basis of language and other regional aspirations. This is the centrifugal process.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Political Science Important Questions Chapter 4 Constitutional Government

(iv) India has been described as ‘quasi-federation’ or a ‘federation with an unitary spirit’ as the division of powers favors the central government for e.g. it has full control over the Union list as well as over residuary subjects. It’s laws have precedence even in case of the subjects in Concurrent list.

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Commerce Book Keeping & Accountancy Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Commerce BK Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange

Objective Questions

A. Select the correct option and rewrite the sentence:

Question 1.
A bill of exchange is called a _____________ by one who is entitled to receive the amount due on it.
(a) Bills Payable
(b) Draft
(c) Bills Receivable
(d) Promissory Note
Answer:
(c) Bills Receivable

Question 2.
The person who draws a bill of exchange is called _____________
(a) Payee
(b) Drawee
(c) Endorsee
(d) Drawer
Answer:
(d) Drawer

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange

Question 3.
A bill of exchange is required to be _____________ by drawee.
(a) drafted
(b) discounted
(c) accepted
(d) endorsed
Answer:
(c) accepted

Question 4.
A person who accepts the bill is called _____________
(a) Drawer
(b) Acceptor
(c) Payee
(d) Creditor
Answer:
(b) Acceptor

Question 5.
The person to whom the amount of the bill is made payable is called _____________
OR
_____________ is a person to whom the amount on a bill is payable.
(a) Endorsee
(b) Drawer
(c) Drawee
(d) Payee
Answer:
(d) Payee

Question 6.
When the acceptor accepts the bill with certain conditions, the acceptance is called _____________ Acceptance.
(a) Qualified
(b) General
(c) Clean
(d) Special
Answer:
(a) Qualified

Question 7.
The drawee becomes an _____________ on acceptance of a bill.
(a) acceptor
(b) owner
(c) endorser
(d) drawer
Answer:
(a) acceptor

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange

Question 8.
Borrowing money from a bank on the security of a bill of exchange is called _____________
(a) Honouring
(b) Endorsing
(c) Discounting
(d) Retiring
Answer:
(c) Discounting

Question 9.
A bill of exchange is/can be discounted with the _____________
(a) bank
(b) payee
(c) money lenders
(d) government
Answer:
(a) bank

Question 10.
Transferring a bill of exchange before maturity to a third party is called _____________ of a bill of exchange.
(a) honouring
(b) endorsement
(c) retirement
(d) discounting
Answer:
(b) endorsement

Question 11.
The person who endorses the bill of exchange is known as _____________
(a) Drawer
(b) Endorsee
(c) Endorser
(d) Drawee
Answer:
(c) Endorser

Question 12.
A person to whom a bill of exchange is endorsed is called _____________
(a) Endorsee
(b) Drawer
(c) Endorser
(d) Payee
Answer:
(a) Endorsee

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange

Question 13.
If a bill falls due on 15th August, payment on it must be made on _____________
(a) 14th August
(b) 16th August
(c) 13th August
(d) 17th August
Answer:
(a) 14th August

Question 14.
A bill drawn on 12th June, 2020 at two months would be payable on _____________
(a) 12th August 2020
(b) 14th August 2020
(c) 15th August 2020
(d) 16th August 2020
Answer:
(b) 14th August 2020

Question 15.
If a bill is drawn on 3rd July, 2020 for 40 days, its payment must be made on _____________
(a) 14th August 2020
(b) 15th August 2020
(c) 13th August 2020
(d) 16th August 2020
Answer:
(a) 14th August 2020

Question 16.
A bill is drawn on 23rd September, 2019 at 4 months would be payable on _____________
(a) 24th January 2020
(b) 25th January 2020
(c) 26th January 2020
(d) 25th January 2019
Answer:
(b) 25th January 2020

Question 17.
A bill is drawn on 23rd October 2016 payable after 3 months, the due date of the bill will be _____________
(a) 25th January 2017
(b) 26th January 2017
(c) 24th January 2017
(d) 25th January 2016
Answer:
(a) 25th January 2017

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange

Question 18.
_____________ means payment of the bill before due date.
(a) Discounting of Bill
(b) Retirement of Bill
(c) Renewal of Bill
(d) Endorsement of Bill
Answer:
(b) Retirement of Bill

Question 19.
A bill of one month duration is accepted on 12th July, 2020, its due date will be _____________
(a) 12th August 2020
(b) 16th August 2020
(c) 14th August 2020
(d) 15th August 2020
Answer:
(c) 14th August 2020

Question 20.
When a bill Is dishonoured, the _____________ is held responsible for the noting charges.
(a) holder
(b) drawee
(c) drawer
(d) endorser
Answer:
(b) drawee

Question 21.
Fees charged by the Notary Public for noting facts or reasons of dishonour of bill are called _____________
(a) Discount
(b) Rebate
(c) Noting Charges
(d) Commission
Answer:
(c) Noting Charges

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange

Question 22.
Noting charges are paid when a bill is _____________
(a) honoured
(b) dishonoured
(c) renewed
(d) retired
Answer:
(b) dishonoured

Question 23.
_____________ is done in respect of dishonour of foreign bill of exchange.
(a) Discounting
(b) Endorsement
(c) Noting
(d) Protesting
Answer:
(d) Protesting

B. Give one word/phrase/term which can substitute each of the following statements:

Question 1.
A bill of exchange is drawn and accepted for a value received.
Answer:
Trade bill

Question 2.
A person who draws a bill of exchange.
Answer:
Drawer

Question 3.
A person on whom a bill of exchange is drawn.
Answer:
Drawee

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange

Question 4.
Payment in accordance with the apparent tenor of the bill.
Answer:
Honour

Question 5.
Non-payment in accordance with the apparent tenor of the bill.
Answer:
Dishonour

Question 6.
Acceptance without making any change in the terms of a bill.
Answer:
General acceptance

Question 7.
Acceptance with some changes as regards the terms of a bill.
Answer:
Qualified acceptance

Question 8.
A bill of which payment is to be made after the fixed period.
Answer:
After date bill

Question 9.
The bill is drawn in one country and payable in other countries.
Answer:
Foreign bill

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange

Question 10.
Encashment of the bill before the due date.
Answer:
Discounting

Question 11.
Transfer of title of the bill from the debtor to the creditor.
Answer:
Endorsement

Question 12.
Payment of the bill before the due date.
Answer:
Retirement of bill

Question 13.
A document consists of a written order signed by the maker, directing a certain person to pay a certain sum of money on-demand or on a certain future date.
Answer:
Bill of Exchange

Question 14.
A person who accepts the bill.
Answer:
Drawee or Acceptor

Question 15.
The period for which a bill is drawn.
Answer:
Term/Tenure of a bill of exchange

Question 16.
A bill of exchange that does not contain the period for its payment.
Answer:
Demand bill/Bill at sight

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange

Question 17.
The date on which period of the bill gets expired.
Answer:
Nominal due date

Question 18.
The date on which the payment of the bill is to be made.
Answer:
Due date or Date of maturity

Question 19.
Drawee’s signature on the face of the bill to show his consent to pay the amount of the bill.
Answer:
Acceptance of a bill of exchange

Question 20.
A bill of exchange before its acceptance.
Answer:
Draft

Question 21.
A bill is drawn, accepted, and made payable within the territory of one and the same country.
Answer:
Inland bill of exchange

Question 22.
Selling a bill to the bank before its due date for an amount slightly less than its face value.
Answer:
Discounting of a bill of exchange

Question 23.
Act of signing the bill on its back by its holder to transfer its title to a third Person.
Answer:
Endorsement of a bill of exchange

Question 24.
Discount is given by holder to acceptor on the retirement of the bill of exchange.
Answer:
Rebate

Question 25.
Non-payment of the bill on the due date.
Answer:
Dishonour of a bill of exchange

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange

Question 26.
Recording the facts of dishonour of a bill of exchange by a Notary Public.
Answer:
Noting

Question 27.
The request by the acceptor of the bill to the drawer for issuing a new bill after canceling the old bill.
Answer:
Renewal of the bill of exchange

Question 28.
The account to which the bill is sent for collection is debited.
Answer:
Bill sent for Collection Account

Question 29.
Payment of a bill on the due date.
Answer:
Honouring of a bill of exchange

Question 30.
Drafting a new bill in cancellation of the old bill at the request of drawee.
Answer:
Renewal of the bill of exchange

Question 31.
Certificate is given by Notary Public for the fact of dishonour of the bill.
Answer:
Certificate of protest

Question 32.
The account is to be debited in case of dishonour of bill in the books of the drawer.
Answer:
Drawee’s Account

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange

Question 33.
A foreign bill accompanied by shipping documents.
Answer:
Documentary bill

C. State True or False with reasons:

Question 1.
Bills payable are a liability.
Answer:
This statement is True.
Bill is always drawn on the debtor by the creditor. The debtor i.e. drawee has to pay the money on a future date. For the drawee or acceptor of the bill, payment of the number of Bills payable is certain and therefore, for drawee, Bills payable is a liability.

Question 2.
Drawee has no right to discount the bill with the bank.
Answer:
This statement is True.
Drawee means acceptor of a bill and for him, it is bills payable. Once he accept it, sign it, and returned it to the drawer he don’t have any bill with him to discount it with the bank. He is not the owner of the bill and hence, he has no right to discount the bill with the bank.

Question 3.
A bill of exchange needs acceptance.
Answer:
This statement is True.
A bill of exchange is drawn by the creditor on the debtor. It is signed by drawer as well as by drawee. The drawee has to give his assent to the terms and conditions of the bill by putting his signature on it. A bill without acceptance is called a draft. It becomes a valid document only when the drawee accepts it.

Question 4.
A bill can’t be deposited into the bank for collection.
Answer:
This statement is False.
When a drawer or holder of the bill needs money on the due date, he has to deposit the bill into the bank for collection purposes. So that bank can collect the amount in time. This means a bill can be deposited into the bank for collection.

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange

Question 5.
Noting charges are payable to the Notary Public in honour of a bill.
Answer:
This statement is False.
Noting charges are payable to the Notary Public at the time of registration of a dishonoured bill, not at the time of honour of a bill.

Question 6.
A bill of exchange is a negotiable instrument.
Answer:
This statement is True.
Being a negotiable instrument, a bill of exchange is a written acknowledgment of debts and also a promise to pay the debt according to the terms of the bill and can be transferred from one person to another.

Question 7.
A bill of exchange is signed by the person on whom it is drawn.
Answer:
This statement is True.
A bill of exchange is signed by the person who draws or makes it, and the person on whom it is drawn accepts it.

Question 8.
Acceptance with some change as regards the terms of a bill is called general acceptance.
Answer:
This statement is False.
General acceptance means acceptance of a draft without any change or conditions regards the terms of a bill.

Question 9.
Drawee is a person who holds the title of the bill in due course.
Answer:
This statement is False.
A drawer is a person who holds the title of the bill in due course as drawee accepts it and returns it to the drawer.

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange

Question 10.
A payee is an official person appointed by the Central government for noting of dishonour of the bill.
Answer:
This statement is False.
A notary public is an official person appointed by the Central government for noting of dishonour of the bill and making it legal.

D. Complete the sentences:

Question 1.
A person to whom or as per his order, amount of bill is payable is a _____________
Answer:
Payee

Question 2.
The inland bill is drawn and payable in the _____________ country.
Answer:
same

Question 3.
Discounting means encashment of the bill before its _____________
Answer:
due date

Question 4.
_____________ can transfer the ownership of the bill.
Answer:
Drawer

Question 5.
Noting charges are payable to the Notary public on _____________ of a bill.
Answer:
dishonour

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange

Question 6.
A bill of exchange is a _____________
Answer:
negotiable instrument

Question 7.
If a discounted bill is honoured, the _____________ does not record this transaction.
Answer:
drawer

Question 8.
Days of grace are not allowed in the case of a _____________
Answer:
demand bill

Question 9.
Noting charges should be borne by _____________
Answer:
drawee

E. Answer in one sentence:

Question 1.
State the types of Bills of Exchange.
Answer:
The bills of exchange may be classified as

  1. Inland bills of exchange
  2. Foreign bills of exchange.

Question 2.
What is the Inland bill of exchange?
Answer:
A bill of exchange that is drafted, accepted, and made payable between the parties from one and the same country is called an Inland bill of exchange.

Question 3.
What is a Foreign bill of exchange?
Answer:
A bill of exchange that is drafted and accepted in one country and made payable in another country is called a Foreign bill of exchange.

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange

Question 4.
Which are the parties to a bill of exchange?
Answer:
There are three parties to a bill of exchange, viz.,

  1. Drawer
  2. Drawee
  3. Payee

Question 5.
Who is the Drawer?
Answer:
The Drawer of a bill is the person who draws or makes the bill.

Question 6.
Who is the Drawee?
Answer:
The Drawee of a bill is the person on whom the bill is drawn.

Question 7.
What is a Draft?
Answer:
A bill of exchange is called a Draft before its acceptance.

Question 8.
What is an Acceptance of the Bill of Exchange?
Answer:
The act of signing the bill of exchange by the drawee with a date to show his consent to pay the amount of the bill is called an Acceptance of the Bill of Exchange.

Question 9.
What do you mean by Clean or General Acceptance?
Answer:
A Clean or General Acceptance is an acceptance where the drawee does not make any change in the terms of the bill before accepting it.

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange

Question 10.
What is Qualified Acceptance?
Answer:
If the drawee of a bill of exchange accepts it on condition that the time or amount of the bill is changed or adds some other conditions to the bill, his acceptance is called a Qualified Acceptance.

Question 11.
What is the term of the bill of exchange?
Answer:
The period for which the bill of exchange is drawn and accepted is called the term of the bill of exchange.

Question 12.
What is the Nominal Due Date?
Answer:
The date on which the term i.e. the period of a bill of exchange gets expired is called Nominal Due Date.

Question 13.
What is the Due Date of a Bill?
Answer:
The Due Date of a Bill of Exchange is the date on which it is falling due for payment by the drawee.

Question 14.
What is Endorsing of a Bill?
Answer:
Endorsing of a Bill is the holder’s signing on its back with the intention of transferring its title or ownership to another person.

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange

Question 15.
Who is an Endorser?
Answer:
The drawer or the holder of a bill of the exchange who transfers or endorses the same in favour of a third party is called Endorser.

Question 16.
Who is an Endorsee?
Answer:
An Endorsee is a person to whom or in whose favour a bill is endorsed or transferred.

Question 17.
What is Retirement of a Bill?
Answer:
A bill of exchange is said to be retired if its acceptor makes payment of it before its due date, usually after deducting some discount or rebate.

Question 18.
When is a bill said to be honoured?
Answer:
A bill of exchange is said to be honoured or met when the acceptor or drawee makes payment on its due date.

Question 19.
When is the bill said to be dishonoured?
Answer:
A bill of exchange is said to be dishonoured if its acceptor or drawee fails to make payment on its due date.

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange

Question 20.
Which account is credited in the books of the drawer when the discounted bill is dishonoured?
Answer:
Cash/Bank A/c is credited in the books of the drawer when the discounted bill is dishonoured.

Question 21.
Who is a Notary Public?
Answer:
An officer appointed by the Government to certify dishonour of bills of exchange is called Notary Public.

Question 22.
Who bears the noting charges on dishonour of a bill?
Answer:
An acceptor or drawee bears the noting charges on dishonour of a bill of exchange.

Question 23.
Who pays the noting charges?
Answer:
The holder of the bill of exchange pays the noting charges.

Question 24.
What do you mean by Renewal of a Bill?
Answer:
Renewal of a Bill of Exchange means cancellation of the original bill and drafting a new bill in exchange for that by a drawer at the request of drawee.

F. Do you agree or disagree with the following statements:

Question 1.
A bill of which payment to be made after the fixed period is after date bill.
Answer:
Agree

Question 2.
Drawee can transfer the ownership of the bill.
Answer:
Disagree

Question 3.
Endorsee is a person in whose favour the bill is transferred.
Answer:
Agree

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange

Question 4.
The drawer and payee of a bill of exchange may be one and the same person.
Answer:
Agree

Question 5.
A bill of exchange can be endorsed only once.
Answer:
Disagree

Question 6.
Days of grace are allowed in the case of demand bills.
Answer:
Disagree

Question 7.
The noting of dishonoured bills is compulsory.
Answer:
Disagree

Question 8.
The endorser is a creditor to the endorsee.
Answer:
Disagree

Question 9.
Bills payable are a liability.
Answer:
Agree

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange

Question 10.
A bill of exchange is a negotiable instrument.
Answer:
Agree

Solved Problems

Question 1.
On 1st April 2019 Parth draws a bill for ₹ 50,000 on Zalak for 4 months period. The bill is accepted and returned to Parth. On the same date, Parth discounted the bill with his bank @ 12% p.a.
Before the due date Zalak finds herself unable to meet the bill, hence requested Parth to renew the bill for a further period of 2 months. Parth agreed and he took the bill back from the bank and received new acceptance for ₹ 52,000 including interest. This new bill is duly honoured by Zalak on the due date.
Write Journal of Parth and Zalak for the above bill transactions.
Solution:
In the books of Parth
Journal Entries
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange Q1

In the books of Zalak
Journal Entries
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange Q1.1

Question 2.
Prahran owes Keyur ₹ 75,000. Keyur draws a bill for ₹ 60,000 on Prihaan for 4 months period and received the cheque for the balance. The bill is duly accepted and returned by Prahran. On the same date, Keyur endorsed Prihaan’s acceptance to Monil.
On the due date, Monil informed Keyur that Prihaan dishonored his acceptance and ₹ 1,905 paid as noting charges. Keyur then drew a new bill for 3 months on Prihaan for the amount due including noting charges and interest of ₹ 2,400. On the due date, the bill was duly honoured by Prihaan.
Write Journal Entries in the books of Keyur and prepare Keyur’s account in the books of Prihaan.
Solution:
In the books of Keyur
Journal Entries
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange Q2
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange Q2.1

Working Notes:
1. Amount paid by cheque = Total amount due from Prihaan – the amount of Bill accepted
= 75,000 – 60,000
= ₹ 15,000

2. Amount for which new bill is drawn = Amount of bill dishonoured + Noting charges + Interest
= 60,000 + 1,905 + 2,400
= ₹ 64,305

Note: For easy understanding, the students are advised to draft the journal entries in the journal of Prihaan first. So that they will be able to understand ledger entries of Keyur’s A/c opened in the ledger of Prihaan.

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange

Question 3.
On 1st June, 2020 Bela draws a bill for ₹ 1,00,000 on Premila for 4 months period. The bill is duly accepted and returned to Bela. One month after the date, Bela discounted the bill with bank @ 18% p.a.
On the due date, Premila dishonoured her acceptance. Bank paid noting charges ₹ 2,250. Premila requested Bela to renew the bill for a further period of 2 months. Bela agreed and took the bill back from the bank and received new acceptance for 40% amount of the bill with the full amount of noting charges and a cheque for 60% balance plus interest @ 12% p.a.
Before the due date, Premila was declared as insolvent and 30% of the amount due could be recovered from her private estate.
Write Journal of Bela and Premila for the above bill transactions.
Solution:
In the books of Bela
Journal Entries
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange Q3

In the books of Premila
Journal Entries
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange Q3.1

Working Notes:
1. Discount charged by the bank on discounting 1st bill = 1,00,000 × \(\frac{3}{12} \times \frac{18}{100}\) (Period of bill is 4 months, but it is discounted 1 month later) = ₹ 4,500

2. Amount paid by Premila to Bela in Part payment = 60% of Bill amount
= 60% of 1,00,000
= ₹ 60,000

3. Balance amount still due from Premila to Bela = 40% of Bill amount
= 40% of 1,00,000
= ₹ 40,000

4. Interest is to be calculated on total amount due from Premila = Balance due + Unpaid amount noting charges
= 40,000 + 2,250
= ₹ 42,250
Interest due = Balance amount × Unexpired period × Rate of interest
= 42,250 × \(\frac{2}{12} \times \frac{12}{100}\)
= ₹ 845

5. Amount paid by Premila to Bela = 60,000 + 845 = ₹ 60,845.

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 7 Bills of Exchange

6. Amount for which new bill is drafted and accepted = ₹ 42,250.

7. Amount recovered by Bela from the property of Premila = 30% of total amount due
= \(\frac{30}{100}\) × 42,250
= ₹ 12,675

8. Bad debts incurred by Bela = Total Amount due – Amount recovered
= 42,250 – 12,675
= ₹ 29,575

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 1.
Define the term energy.
Answer:
The energy of a system is defined as its capacity to perform the work. A system with higher energy can perform more work.

Question 2.
What are different forms of energy ?
Answer:
The energy of a system has many different forms as follows :

  • Kinetic energy which arises due to motion, like rotational, vibrational and translational.
  • Potential energy which arises due to position and state of a matter. If depends upon the temperature of the system.
  • Heat energy (or thermal energy) which is transferred from the hotter body to the colder body.
  • Radiant energy which is associated with electro-magnetic or light radiation.
  • Electrical energy produced in the galvanic cells.
  • Chemical energy stored in chemical substances.

All these various forms of energy can be converted from one form to another without any loss.

Question 3.
Explain the concept of interconversion of different forms of energy.
Answer:
There are various forms of energy like kinetic energy, potential energy, heat or thermal energy, radiant energy, electrical energy and chemical energy.

All these forms of energy are interconvertible. For example, a body at very high level possesses higher potential energy. When it falls down, potential energy is converted into kinetic energy. Falling of water from high level is used to drive turbines converting potential energy into kinetic energy which is further converted into electrical energy.

In galvanic cells, chemical energy is converted into electrical energy.
In electrolytic cells, chemical energy is converted into electrical energy. But during interconversion, the energy can neither be created nor destroyed, and there is a conservation of energy.

Question 4.
What is thermodynamics ? What are its drawbacks?
Answer:
Thermodynamics : It is concerned with the energy changes in physical and chemical changes.

Drawbacks :

  • It does not give information on the rates of physical or chemical changes.
  • It does not explain mechanisms involved in physical and chemical processes.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 5.
Define and explain :
(1) System (2) Surroundings (3) Boundary.
Answer:
(1) System : The portion of the universe under thermo-dynamic consideration to study thermodynamic properties is called a system.
Explanation :

  • As such any portion of the universe under thermodynamic consideration is a system. The thermodynamic consideration involves the study of thermodynamic parameters like pressure, volume, temperature, energy, etc.
  • The system may be very small or very large.
  • The system is confined by a real or an imaginary boundary.

(2) Surroundings : The remaining portion of the universe other than under thermodynamics study i.e„ the system is called the surroundings.
Explanation :

  • Surroundings represent a large stock of mass and energy and can be exchanged with the system when allowed.
  • For a liquid in an open vessel, the surrounding atmosphere around it represents the surroundings.

(3) Boundary : The wall or interface separating the system from its surrounding is called a boundary.
Explanation :

  • This boundary may be either real or imaginary.
  • Through this boundary, exchange of heat and matter between the system and surroundings can take place, e.g. when a liquid is placed in a beaker the walls of beaker represent real boundaries while open portion of the beaker is imaginary boundary.
  • Everything outside the boundary represents surroundings.

Question 6.
What are the types of systems ?
Answer:
Following are the types of systems :

  1. Open system
  2. Closed system
  3. Isolated system
  4. Homogeneous system
  5. Heterogeneous system.

Question 7.
Define and explain the following :
(1) Open system
(2) Closed system
(3) Isolated system.
Answer:
(1) Open system :it is defined as a system which can exchange both matter and energy with its surroundings, e.g. a beaker containing water. The water continuously absorbs energy from the surroundings and forms vapour which diffuse in the surroundings. So that this system exchanges energy and matter (or mass), with the surroundings.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 1
Fig. 4.1 : Open system

(2) Closed system : it is defined as a system which can exchange only energy but not the matter with its surroundings, e.g. A closed vessel containing hot water so that only heat is lost to the surroundings and not the matter.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 2
Fig. 4.2 : Closed system

(3) Isolated system : it is defined as a system which can neither exchange energy nor matter with its surroundings, e.g. hot water filled in a thermally insulated closed vessel like thermos flask.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 3
In actual practice, perfectly isolated system is not possible.
Universe represents an isolated system.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 8.
‘Universe is an isolated system’. Explain.
Answer:
Universe represents an isolated system due to the following reasons :

  • The total mass and energy of the universe remain constant.
  • The universe has no boundary.
  • The universe has no surroundings.

Question 9.
Define and explain :
(1) Homogeneous system
(2) Heterogeneous system.
Answer:
(1) Homogeneous system : A system consisting of only one uniform phase is called a homogeneous system.
Explanation :
(1) The properties of homogeneous system are uniform throughout the phase or system.
(2) The homogeneous systems are :

  • Solutions of miscible liquids (water and alcohol) or soluble solids in liquids, (NaCl in water), etc.
  • Mixture of gases. H2 and N2, NH3 and H2, etc.

(2) Heterogeneous system : A system consisting of two or more phases separated by interfacial boundaries is called a heterogeneous system.
Explanation : These systems are :

  • Mixture of two or more immiscible liquids. E.g. Water and benzene.
  • Solid in equilibrium with liquid.
    E.g. Ice ⇌ water.
  • Liquid in equilibrium with vapour.
    E.g. Water ⇌ vapour.

Question 10.
Explain : (A) Extensive property (B) Intensive property of a system.
OR
What is the difference between extensive and intensive properties?
Answer:
The properties of a system are classified as (A) Extensive property and (B) Intesive property.
(A) Extensive property : It is defined as a property of a system whose magnitude depends on the amount of matter present in the system.
Explanation :

  • More the quantity (or amount) of the matter of the system, more is the magnitude of extensive property, e.g., mass, volume, heat, energy, enthalpy, etc.
  • The extensive properties are additive.

(B) Intensive property : It is defined as a property of a system whose magnitude is independent of the amount of matter present in the system.
Explanation :

  • Intensive property is characteristic of the system, e.g., refractive index, density, viscosity, temperature, pressure, boiling point, melting point, freezing point of a pure liquid, surface tension, etc.
  • The intensive properties are not additive.

Question 11.
Select extensive and intensive properties in the following :
Moles, molar heat capacity, entropy, heat capacity.
Answer:
Extensive property : Moles, entropy, heat capacity.
Intensive property : Molar heat capacity.

Question 12.
What is a state function ? Give examples.
Answer:
State function : The property which depends on the state of the system and independent of the path followed by the system to attain the final state is called a state function.
For example, pressure, volume, temperature, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 13.
Classify the following properties as intensive or extensive :
(i) Temperature (ii) Density (iii) Enthalpy (iv) Mass (v) Energy (vi) Refractive index (vii) Pressure (viii) Viscosity (ix) Volume (x) Weight.
Answer:
(1) Intensive properties : Temperature, Density, Refractive index. Pressure, Viscosity.
(2) Extensive properties : Enthalpy, Mass, Energy, Volume, Weight.

Question 14.
What are path functions?
Answer:
Path functions : The properties which depend on the path of the process are called path functions. For example, work (W) and heat (Q).

Question 15.
Define thermodynamic equilibrium. Mention different types of thermodynamic equilibria.
Answer:
Thermodynamic equilibrium : A system is said to have attained a state of thermodynamic equilibrium if there is no change in any thermodynamic functions or state functions like energy, pressure, volume, etc. with time.

For a system to be in thermodynamic equilibrium, it has to attain following three types of equilibrium :

  • Thermal equilibrium
  • Chemical equilibrium
  • Mechanical equilibrium

Question 16.
Distinguish between :
(1) Open system and Closed system :
Open system:

  1. An open system can exchange both matter and energy with the surroundings.
  2. In this, the total amount of matter does not remain constant.
  3. Example : Hot water kept in an open beaker.

Closed system:

  1. A closed system can exchange only energy, but not matter with the surroundings.
  2. In this, the total amount of matter remains constant.
  3. Example : Hot water kept in a closed glass flask.

(2) Closed system and Isolated system :
Closed system:

  1. A closed system can exchange only energy, but not matter with the surroundings.
  2. In this, the total amount of energy does not remain constant.
  3. Example : Hot water kept in a sealed glass flask.

Isolated system:

  1. An isolated system can exchange neither matter nor energy with the surroundings.
  2. In this, the total amount of energy remains constant.
  3. Example : Hot water kept in a thermos flask.

(3) Open system and Isolated system :
Open system:

  1. An open system can exchange matter with the surroundings.
  2. It can exchange energy with the surroundings.
  3. In this, the total amount of energy does not remain constant.
  4. Example : Hot water kept in an open beaker.

Isolated system

  1. An isolated system cannot exchange matter with the surroundings.
  2. It cannot exchange energy with the surroundings.
  3. In this, the total amount of energy remains constant.
  4. Example : Hot water kept in a thermos flask.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 17.
What is a thermodynamic process ? What are different types of processes ?
Answer:
(i) Thermodynamic process : It is defined as a transition by which a state of a system changes from initial equilibrium state to final equilibrium state.

The process is carried out by changing the state functions or thermodynamic variables like pressure, volume and temperature. During the process one or more properties of the system change.

(ii) Types of processes :

  • Isothermal process
  • Isobaric process
  • Isochoric process
  • Adiabatic process
  • Reversible process
  • Irreversible (spontaneous) process.

Question 18.
Define and explain different types of processes.
Answer:
There are following types of processes :
(1) Isothermal process : It is defined as a process in which the temperature of the system remains constant throughout the change of a state of the system.
In this, ΔT = 0.

Features :

  • In this process, the temperature at initial state, final state and throughout the process remains constant.
  • In this process, system exchanges heat energy with its surroundings to maintain constant temperature. E.g., in case of exothermic process liberated heat is given to the surroundings and in case of endothermic process heat is absorbed from the surroundings so that temperature of the system remains constant and ΔT = 0.
  • Isothermal process is carried out with a closed system.
  • Internal energy (U) of the system remains constant, hence, Δ U = 0.
  • In this process, pressure and volume of a gaseous system change.

(2) Isobaric process : It is defined as a process which is carried out at constant pressure. Hence, Δ P = 0.
Features :

  • In this process, the volume (of gaseous system) changes against a constant pressure.
  • Since the external atmospheric pressure remains always constant, all the processes carried out in open vessels, or in the laboratory are isobaric processes.
  • In this volume and temperature change.
  • Internal energy of a system changes, hence, ΔU ≠ 0.

(3) Isochoric process : It is defined as a process which is carried out at constant volume of the system.
Features :

  • In this process, temperature and pressure of the system change but volume remains constant.
  • Since ΔV = 0, no mechanical work is performed.
  • In this internal energy (U) of the system changes. The example of this process in cooking takes place in a pressure cooker.

(4) Adiabatic process : It is defined as a process in which there is no exchange of heat energy between the system and its surroundings. Hence, Q = 0.
Features :

  • An adiabatic process is carried out in an isolated system.
  • In this process, temperature and internal energy of a system change, ΔT ≠ 0, Δ U ≠ 0.
  • During expansion, temperature and energy decrease and during compression, temperature and energy increase.
  • If the process is exothermic, the temperature rises and if the process is endothermic the temperature decreases in the adiabatic process.

(5) Reversible process : A process carried out in such a manner that at every stage, the driving force is only infinitesimally greater than the opposing force and it can be reversed by an infinitesimal increase in force and the system exists in equilibrium with its surroundings throughout, is called a reversible process.
Features :

  • This is a hypothetical process.
  • Driving force is infinitesimally greater than the opposing force throughout the change.
  • The process can be reversed at any point by making infinitesimal changes in the conditions.
  • The process takes place infinitesimally slowly involving infinite number of steps.
  • At the end of every step of the process, the system attains mechanical equilibrium, hence, throughout the process, the system exists in temperature-pressure equilibrium with its surroundings.
  • In this process, maximum work is obtained.
  • Temperature remains constant throughout the isothermal reversible process.

(6) Irreversible process : it is defined as the unidirectional process which proceeds in a definite direction and cannot be reversed at any stage and in which driving force and opposing force differ in a large magnitude. It is also called a spontaneous process.
Features :

  • It takes place without the aid of external agency.
  • All irreversible processes are spontaneous.
  • All natural processes are irreversible processes.
  • Equilibrium is attained at the end of process.
  • They are real processes and are not hypothetical.

Examples :

  • Flow of heat from a matter at higher temperature to a matter at lower temperature.
  • Flow of a gas from higher to lower pressure.
  • Flow of water from higher level to lower level.
  • Flow of a solvent into a solution through a semipermeable membrane due to osmosis.
  • Flow of electricity from higher potential terminal to lower potential terminal.

Question 19.
Distinguish between :
(1) Isothermal process and Adiabatic process.
(2) Reversible and irreversible processes.
Answer:
Isothermal process:

  1. In an isothermal process, the temperature of the system remains constant. ΔT = 0
  2. In this process, the system exchanges heat with the surroundings. Q ≠ 0 (Closed system)
  3. The total internal energy of the system remains constant.
  4. In this process, the system is not thermally isolated.
  5. In this process, Q = -W as ΔU = 0.
  6. ΔH = 0.

Adiabatic process:

  1. In an adiabatic process, the temperature of the system changes. ΔT ≠ 0
  2. In this process, the system does not exchange heat with the surroundings. Q = 0 (Isolated system)
  3. The total internal energy of the system changes. ΔU ≠ 0
  4. In this process, the system is thermally isolated.
  5. In this process, W = ΔU.
  6. ΔH ≠ 0.

(2) Reversible and irreversible processes.
Reversible process:

  1. The process whose direction can be reversed at any stage by an infinitesimal increase in the opposing force is called a reversible process.
  2. Such a process is not spontaneous and takes place infinitesimally slowly and takes infinite time for completion.
  3. In this process, the thermodynamic equilibrium is always maintained between the system and the surroundings at every step.
  4. The opposing force is infinitesimally less than the driving force.
  5. It is an ideal or hypothetical process.
  6. Maximum work can be derived from such a process.

Irreversible process:

  1. The process whose direction cannot be reversed by an infinitesimal increase in the opposing force is called an irreversible process.
  2. Such a process is spontaneous and takes finite time for completion.
  3. The thermodynamic equilibrium is attained only at the end of the process.
  4. The opposing force is significantly less than the driving force.
  5. It is a practical or real and spontaneous process.
  6. Work derived from such a process is always less than the maximum work.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 20.
Show that pressure times volume (PV) is equal to work.
Answer:
The work is defined as the energy by which a body is displaced through a distance d by applying a force f.
∴ W = f × d
If area is A = d2 and volume V = d3 then,
PV = \(\frac{f}{A}\) × d3 = \(\frac{f}{d^{2}}\) × d3 = f × d = W
∴ The term PV represents the pressure-volume work.

Question 21.
Explain the process of (A) expansion and (B) compression with suitable examples.
Answer:
(A ) Expansion : Consider an ideal cylinder fitted with a piston and filled with H2O2(l).
2H2O2(l) → 2H2O(l) + O2(l)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 4
Fig. 4.5 : Decomposition of H2O2
The oxygen gas produced pushes the piston upwards lifting the mass. Thus, the system performs the work on the surroundings and loses energy by expansion. In this work is done by the system.

(B) Compression : Consider an ideal cylinder fitted with a piston and containing gaseous NH3(g) and HCl(g).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 5
Fig. 4.6 : Reaction between NH3(g) and HCl(g)
NH3(g) + HCl(g) → NH4Cl(s)
As the reaction proceeds, due to consumption of gases, the volume decreases and there is work due to compression. In this work is done on the system by surroundings and the system gains energy.

Question 22.
What are the sign conventions for Q and W in (A) expansion, (B) compression?
Answer:
(A) For expansion, work is done by the system hence,
Q = -ve and W = -ve
(B) For compression, work is done on the system hence,
Q = -ve and W = +ve
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 6
Fig. 4.7 : Sign conventions

Question 23.
Explain sign convention of work during expansion and compression.
OR
Explain +W and -W.
Answer:
(A) Expansion of a gas :
(1) When a gas expands against a constant pressure, Pex changing the volume from initial volume V1 to final volume V2,
Change in volume, Δ V = V2 – V1
The mechanical work = W = -Pex × Δ V
= -Pex (V2 – V1)

(2) During expansion V2 > V1. The work is said to be performed by the system on the surroundings. This results in the decrease in the (work) energy of the system. Hence the work is negative, i.e. W is -ve.

(B) Compression of a gas : During compression, V2 < V1. The work is said to be performed on the system by the surroundings. This results in the increase in the (work) energy of the system. Hence the work is positive, i.e. W is + ve.

Question 24.
What are different units of energy and work ?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 7

Question 25.
What are the characteristics of maximum work?
Answer:
(1) The process is carried out at constant temperature.
(2) During the complete process, driving force is infinitesimally greater than opposing force.
(3) Throughout the process, the system exists in equilibrium with its surroundings.
(4) The work obtained is maximum. This is given by,
Wmax = -2.303 nRT log10 \(\frac{V_{2}}{V_{1}}\)
OR
Wmax = -2.303 nRT log10 \(\frac{P_{1}}{P_{2}}\)
where n, P, V and T represent number of moles, pressure, volume and temperature respectively.
(5) ΔU = 0, ΔH = 0.
(6) The heat absorbed in reversible manner
Qrev, is completely converted into work.
Qrev = -Wmax.
Hence work obtained is maximum.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Solved Examples 4.3

Question 26.
Solve the following :

(1) 2.5 moles of an ideal gas are expanded isothermally from 12 dm3 to 25 dm3 against a pressure of 3.0 bar. Calculate the work obtained.
Solution :
Given : n = 2.5 mol; V1 = 12 dm3;
V2 = 25 dm3
Pext = 3.0 bar; W = ?
W = -Pext × (V2 – V1)
= – 3 × (25 – 12)
= -39 dm3 bar
∵ V1 dm3 = 100 J
∴ W = -39 × 100 = -3900 J = -3.9kJ
Ans. W= -3.9 kJ

(2) When 2.2 moles of an ideal gas are expanded from 3.5 dm3 to 12 dm3 against a constant pressure, the work obtained is 3910 J. Estimate the external pressure.
Solution :
Given : n = 2.2 mol; V1 = 3.5 dm3; V2 = 12 dm3
W= -3910 J = \(\frac{-3910}{100}\)dm3 bar
W = -Pex (V2 – V1)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 8
= 4.6 bar
Ans. Pex = 4.6 bar

(3) Three moles of an ideal gas are expanded isothermally from a volume of 300 cm3 to 2.5 dm3 at 300 K against a pressure of 1.9 bar. Calculate the work done in L atm and joules.
Solution :
Given : Number of moles of a gas = n = 3 mol
Initial volume = V1 = 300 cm3
= 0.3 dm3
Final volume = V2 = 2.5 dm3
External pressure = Pex =1.9 bar
Temperature = T = 300 K
∵ W = -Pex (V2 – V1)
= -1.9 (2.5 – 0.3)
= -4.18 dm3 bar
Now, 1 dm3 bar = 100 J
∴ W = -4.18 × 100
= -4180 J
Ans. Work of expansion = W = -4180 J

(4) Calculate the constant external pressure needed to compress an ideal gas from 25 dm3 to 15 dm3. The amount of work done in the compression process is 3500 joules.
Solution :
As the compression of the gas takes place against a constant pressure, the work done is given by
W = -Pex(V2 – V1)
W = Work done by the gas against the external pressure = 3500 J
∴ W = \(\frac{3500}{100}\) = 35 dm3 bar
P = Constant external pressure = ?
V2 = Final volume = 15 dm3
V1 = Initial volume = 25 dm3
∴ 35= -P × (15 – 25)
∴ 35 = 10 × P
∴ P = \(\frac{35}{10}\) = 3.5 bar
Ans. External pressure = 3.5 bar

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(5) Three moles of an ideal gas are compressed isothermally and reversibly to a volume of 2 dm3. The work done is 2.983 kJ at 22°C. Calculate the initial volume of the gas.
Solution :
Given : Number of moles of a gas = n = 3 mol
Final volume = V2 = 2 dm3
Initial volume = V1 = ?
For compression,
Wmax = +2.983 kJ = 2983 J
Temperature = T = (273 + 22) K = 295 K
Wmax= -2.303 nRT log10\(\frac{V_{2}}{V_{1}}\)
∴ \(\frac{2983}{2.303 \times 3 \times 8.314 \times 295}\)
= -[log102 – log10V1]
0.1760 = -log102 + log10 V1
= -0.3010 + log10V1
∴ log10 V1 = 0.1760 + 0.3010 = 0.4770
∴ V1 = Antilog 0.4770
= 3.0 dm3
Ans. Initial volume of the gas = 3.0 dm3

(6) A chemical reaction takes place in a container of cross sectional area 100 cm2. As a result of the reaction, a piston is pushed out through 10 cm against an external pressure of 1.0 bar. Calculate the work done by the system.
Solution :
Given : Cross sectional area = A = 100 cm2
Displacement of a piston = 1 = 10 cm
External pressure = P = 1.0 bar
Work = W = ?
Volume change = A × l
∴ ΔV = 100 × 10
= 1000 cm3
= 1 dm3
Work = W = -P × ΔV
= -1 × 1
= -1 dm3 bar
= – 1 × 100 J
= -100 J
Ans. Work = W = -100 J

(7) 5 moles of helium expand isothermally and reversibly from a pressure 4 atm to 0.4 at 300 K. Calculate the work done, change in internal energy and heat absorbed during the expansion. (R = 8.314 J k-1 mol-1)
Solution :
Given : n = 5 mol
P1 = 4 atm
P2 = 0.4 atm
T = 300 K
Wmax = ?, ΔU = ?, Q = ?
Wmax = -2.303 nRT log10 (\(\frac{P_{1}}{P_{2}}\))
= -2.303 × 5 × 8.314 × 300 log10 \(\frac{4}{0.4}\)
= -2.303 × 5 × 8.314 × 300 × 1
= -28720 J
= -28.72 kJ
For an isothermal process, ΔU = 0
By first law, ΔU = Q + Wmax
∴ Q = -Wmax
= – (-28.72) = 28.72 kJ
Ans. Wmax = – 28.72 kJ; ΔU = 0;
Q = 28.72 kJ

(8) 2.8 × 10-2 kg of nitrogen is expanded isothermally and reversibly at 300 K from 15.15 × 105 Pa when the work done is found to be -17.33 kJ. Find the final pressure.
Solution :
Given : Mass of nitrogen = m = 2.8 × 10-2 kg
Temperature = T = 300 K
Work obtained in expansion = Wmax = -17.33 kJ
= – 17330 J
Initial pressure = P1 = 15.15 × 105 Pa
= 1.515 × 106 Pa
Molar mass of nitrogen (N2) = MN2
= 28 × 10-3 kg mol-1
Final pressure = P2 = ?
Number of moles of N2 = n = \(\frac{m}{M_{\mathrm{N}_{2}}}\)
= \(\frac{2.8 \times 10^{-2}}{28 \times 10^{-3}}=1 \mathrm{~mol}\)
Wmax = -2.303 × nRT log10 \(\frac{P_{1}}{P_{2}}\)
17330 = 2.303 × 1 × 8.314 × 300 × \(\log _{10} \frac{1.515 \times 10^{6}}{P_{2}}\)
∴ \(\frac{17330}{2.303 \times 1 \times 8.314 \times 300}\)
= [log10 1.515 × 106 – log10P2]
3.017 = 6.1804 – log10P2
∴ log10P2 = 6.1804 – 3.017 = 3.1634
∴ P2 = Antilog 3.1634
= 1456.8 Pa
Ans. Final pressure = 1456.8 Pa

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(9) Carbon monoxide expands isothermally and reversibly at 300 K doing 4.754 kJ of work. If the initial volume changes from 10 dm3 to 20 dm3, calculate the number of moles of carbon monoxide. (R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1)
Solution :
Wmax = -2.303 nRT log10 \(\frac{V_{2}}{V_{1}}\)
Wmax = Maximum work done = -4.754 kJ
= -4754 J, n = Number of moles = ?,
= 8.314 JK-1 mol-1
T = 300 K, V1 = Initial volume of carbon monoxide = 10 dm3
V2 = Final volume of carbon monoxide = 20 dm3
∴ -4754 = 22.303 × n × 8.314 × 300 log10 \(\frac {20}{10}\)
∴ -4754 = – 2.303 × n × 8.314 × 300 × log102
∴ – 4754 = – 2.303 × n × 8.314 × 300 × 0.3010
∴ n = \(\frac{-4754}{-2.303 \times 8.314 \times 300 \times 0.3010}\)
= 2.75 mol
Ans. Number of mol = 2.75 mol

(10) Given that the work done in isothermal and reversible expansion is 6.4 kJ when 2 moles of an ideal gas expanded to double its volume. Calculate the temperature at which expansion takes place.
Solution :
Given : Work = Wmax = -6.4 kJ (For expansion)
= – 6400 J
Number of moles = 2
If 1 = x L
V2 = 2 L
Temperature = T = ?
For isothermal reversible expansion,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 9

(11) 300 mmol of perfect gas occupies 13 dm3 at 320 K. Calculate the work done in joules when the gas expands :
(a) Isothermally against a constant external pressure of 0.20 bar,
(b) Isothermal and reversible process,
(c) Into vacuum until the volume of gas is increased by 3 dm3. (R = 8.314 J mol-1K-1)
Solution :
Given : Number of moles of a gas = n
= 300 mmol = 0.3 mol
Initial volume = V1 = 13 dm3
Increase in volume = ΔV = 3 dm3
Pressure = Pex = 0.2 atm
Temperature = 320 K

(a) Expansion against constant pressure is an irreversible process.
∴ W = -Pex × ΔV
= -0.2 × 3
= -0.6 dm3 bar
= -0.6 × 100 J
= -60 J

(b) For isothermal reversible process,
Wmax = 2.303 nRT log10 \(\frac{V_{2}}{V_{1}}\)
Now, V2 = V1 + ΔV = 13 + 3 = 16 dm3
Wmax = – 2.303 × 0.3 × 8.314 × 320 log10 \(\frac {16}{13}\)
= -165.4 J

(c) In vacuum, Pex = 0
∴ W = -Pex × ΔV
= -0 × 3
= 0
Ans. (a) W= -60.78 J
(b) Wmax = -165.4 J
(c) W = 0.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 27.
Define and explain the term internal energy.
Answer:
Internal energy : It is defined as the total energy constituting potential energy and kinetic energy of the molecules present in the system.
Explanation :

  • The internal energy of a system is a state function and thermodynamic function. It is denoted by U.
  • Its value depends on the state of a system.
  • The change in internal energy (Δ U) depends only on the initial state and the final state of the system.
    Δ U = U2 – U1
  • It is an extensive property of the system.
  • It has same unit as heat and work.
  • Total internal energy U of the system is,
    Total energy = Potential energy + Kinetic energy

Question 28.
Explain the formulation of first law of thermodynamics.
OR
Deduce mathematical equation for the first law of thermodynamics. Justify its expression.
Answer:
(1) The first law of thermodynamics is based on the principle of conservation of energy.
(2) If Q is the heat absorbed by the system and if W is the work done by surroundings on the system then the internal energy of the system will increase by Δ U.
(3) From the conservation of energy we can write,
Increase in internal energy of the system = Quantity of heat absorbed by the system + Work done on the system
∴ ΔU = Q + W
(4) For an infinitesimal change,
dU = dQ + dW

Question 29.
Deduce the mathematical expression of first law of thermodynamics for the following processes :
(1) Isothermal process
(2) Isobaric process
(3) Isochoric process
(4) Adiabatic process.
Answer:
(1) Isothermal process :This is a process which is carried out at constant temperature. Since internal energy, U of the system depends on temperature there is no change in the internal energy U of the system. Hence ΔU = 0.
By first law of thermodynamics,
ΔU = Q +W
∴ 0 = Q + W
∴ Q = -W or W = -Q.

  • Hence in expansion, the heat absorbed by the system is entirely converted into work on the surroundings.
  • In compression, the work done on the system is converted into heat which is transferred to the surroundings by the system, keeping temperature constant.

(2) Isobaric process : In this, throughout the process pressure remains constant. Hence the system performs the work of expansion due to volume change ΔV.
W= -Pext × ΔV
Let QP be the heat absorbed by the system at constant pressure.
By first law of thermodynamics,
ΔU = QP + W.
∴ ΔU = QP – PexΔV
or QP = ΔU + PexΔV
In this process, the heat absorbed QP is used to increase the internal energy (ΔU) of the system.

(3) Isochoric process : In this process the volume of the system remains constant. Hence ΔV = 0. Therefore, the system does not perform mechanical work.
∴ W = -PΔV = -P × (0) = 0
Let QV be the heat absorbed at constant volume.
By first law of thermodynamics,
ΔU = Q + W
∴ ΔU = QV.

(4) Adiabatic process : In this process, the system does not exchange heat, Q with its surroundings.
∴ Q = 0.
Since by first law of thermodynamics,
ΔU = Q + W
∴ ΔU = Wad.
Hence,
(i) the increase in internal energy ΔU is due to the work done on the system by surroundings. This results in increase in energy and temperature of the system.
(ii) if the work is done by the system on surroundings, like expansion, then there is a decrease in internal energy (-ΔU) and temperature of the system decreases.

Question 30.
What are the IUPAC sign conventions of Q, U and W?
Answer:
In thermodynamics, the sign conventions are adopted according to IUPAC convention, based on acquisition of energy.
(i) Heat absorbed = +Q
Heat evolved = -Q
(ii) Internal energy change :
Increase in energy = + Δ U
Decrease in energy = – Δ U
(iii) Work done by the system = – W
Work done on the system = + W

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 31.
Define and explain the term enthalpy.
OR
What is meant by enthalpy of a system ?
Answer:
Enthalpy (H) : It is defined as the total energy of a system consisting of internal energy (U) and pressure – volume (P × V) type of energy, i.e. enthalpy represents the sum of internal energy U and product PV energy. It is denoted by H and is represented as
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 10

Explanation :

  • Enthalpy represents total heat content of the system.
  • Enthalpy is a thermodynamic state function.
  • Enthalpy is an extensive property.
  • The absorption of heat by a system increases its enthalpy. Hence enthalpy is called heat content of the system.

Question 32.
Derive the expression, ΔH = ΔU + PΔV.
Answer:
Enthalpy (H) of a system is defined as
H = U + PV
where U is internal energy
P is pressure and V is volume.
Consider a process in which a state of a system changes from an initial state A to a final state B. Let H1, U1, P1, V1 and H2, U2, P2, V2 be the state functions of the system in initial and final states.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 11
Then,
H1 = U1 + P2V2 and H2 = U2 + P2V2
The enthalpy change ΔH is given by,
ΔH = H2 – H1
= (U2 + P2V2) – (U1 + P1V1)
= (U2 – U1) + (P2V2 – P1V1)
= ΔU + ΔPV
where ΔU = U2 – U1
At constant pressure, P1 = P2 = P
∴ P2V2 – P1V1 = PV2 – PV1
= P(V2 – V1)
= P × ΔV
Hence, ΔH = ΔU + PΔV
This is a relation for enthalpy change.

Question 33.
Show that the heat absorbed at constant pressure is equal to the change in enthalpy of the system.
OR
Why is enthalpy called heat content of the system?
Answer:
By the first law of thermodynamics,
ΔU = Q + W
where ΔU is the change in internal energy
Q is heat supplied to the system
W is the work obtained.
∴ Q = ΔU – W
If QP is the heat absorbed at constant pressure by the system, so that the volume changes by Δ V against constant pressure P then,
W = -PΔV
∴ QP = ΔU – (-PΔV)
∴ QP = ΔU + PΔV ……… (1)
If ΔH is the enthalpy change for the system, then
ΔH = ΔU + PΔV ……….. (2)
By comparing above equations, (1) and (2), we can write, QP = ΔH
Hence heat absorbed at constant pressure is equal to the enthalpy change for the system.
Since by increase in enthalpy heat content of the system increases, enthalpy is also called as the heat content of the system.

Question 34.
What are the conditions under which ΔH = ΔU?
Answer:

  1. For any thermodynamic process or a chemical reaction at constant volume, Δ V = 0.
  2. Since ΔH = ΔU + PΔV, at constant volume ΔH = ΔU.
  3. In the reactions, involving only solids and liquids, Δ V is negligibly small, hence ΔH = ΔH.
  4. In a chemical reaction, in which number of moles of gaseous reactants and gaseous products are equal, then change in number of moles, Δ n = n2 – n1 = 0. Since ΔH = ΔU + ΔnRT, as Δn = 0, ΔH = ΔU.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Solved Examples 4.6 – 4.8

Question 35.
Solve the following :

(1) Calculate the change in internal energy when a gas is expanded by supplying 1500 J of heat energy. Work done in expansion is 850 J.
Solution :
Given : Q = 1500 J
W = -850 J (For expansion work is negative)
ΔU = ?
By first law of thermodynamics,
ΔU = Q + W
= 1500 + (- 850)
= 650 J
Ans. Change in internal energy = Δ U = 650 J

(2) A system absorbs 520 J of heat and performs work of 210 J. Calculate the change in internal energy.
Solution :
Given : Since the heat is absorbed by the system, the work is of expansion.
Q = 520 J
W= -210 J
ΔV = ?
ΔU = Q + W
= 520 + (- 210)
= 310 J
Ans. Internal energy change = Δ U = 310 J

(3) A gas expands from 6 litres to 20 dm3 at constant pressure 2.5 atmosphere. If the system is supplied with 5000 J of heat, calculate W and ΔU.
Solution :
Given : V1 = 6 dm3
V2 = 20 dm3
P = 2.5 atm
Q = 5000 J
W = ?; ΔU = ?
For expansion,
W = -Pex(V2 – V1)
= -2.5 (20 – 6)
= – 35
= – 35 × 100 J
= – 3500 J
ΔU = Q + W
= 5000 + (-3500)
= -1500 J
Ans. W= -3500 J; ΔU = – 1500 J

(4) An ideal gas expands against a constant pressure of 2.026 × 105 Pa from 5 dm3 to 15 dm3. If the change in the internal energy is 418 J, calculate the change in enthalpy.
Solution :
As the expansion takes place at a constant pressure, the change in enthalpy is given by
ΔH = ΔU + P(V2 – V1)
ΔH = Change in enthalpy = ?
ΔU = Change in internal energy = 418 J
P = Constant pressure = 2.026 × 105 Pa
V2 = 15 dm3 = 15 × 10-3 m3
V1 = 5 dm3 = 5 × 10-3 m3
∴ ΔH = 418 + 2.026 × 105 × (15 × 10-3 – 5 × 10-3)
= 418 + 2026
∴ ΔH = 2.444 × 103 J = 2.444 kJ
Ans. Change in enthalpy = 2.444 × 103 J
= 2.444 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(5) In a reaction, 2.5 kJ of heat is released from the system and 5.5 kJ of work is done on the system. Find ΔU.
Solution :
Given : Q = -2.5 kJ (since heat is released)
W= + 5.5 kJ (since the work will be of compression)
ΔU = ?
ΔU = Q + W
= -2.5 + 5.5
= +3 kJ
Internal energy of the system will increase by 3 kJ.
Ans. Δ U = 3 kJ

(6) A chemical reaction is carried out by supplying 8 kJ of heat. The system performs the work of 2.7 kJ. Calculate ΔH and ΔU.
Solution :
Given : Q = + 8 kJ (since heat is absorbed by the system)
W = -2.7 kJ (It will be a work of expansion)
ΔH = ?, ΔU = ?
ΔU = Q + W = 8 + (-2.7) = 5.3 kJ
Internal energy of the system will increase by 5.3 kJ.
Due to expansion, Δ V > 0,
∴ PΔV = +2.7 kJ
ΔH = ΔU + PΔV = 5.3 + 2.7 = 8 kJ
Enthalpy of the system will increase by 8 kJ
Ans. ΔU = 5.3 kJ, ΔH = 8 kJ

(7) A sample of gas absorbs 4000 kJ of heat, (a) if volume remains constant. What is ΔU? (b) Suppose that in addition to absorption of heat by the sample, the surroundings does 2000 kJ of work on the sample. What is Δ U ? (c) Suppose that as the original sample absorbs heat, it expands against atmospheric pressure and does 600 kJ of work on its surroundings. What is ΔU ?
Solution :
Given : Q = + 4000 kJ (since heat is absorbed)
(a) Since volume remains constant, Δ V = 0.
W = -Pex (V2 – V1)
= -PexΔV = -Pex(0) = 0
∴ ΔU = Q + W = 4000 + 0 = 4000 kJ

(b) Q = + 4000 kJ
W = + 2000 kJ (Work done on the system)
ΔU = Q + W = 4000 + 2000 = 6000 kJ

(c) W = -600 kJ (Work of expansion)
ΔU = Q + W
ΔU = 4000 + (-600) = 3400 kJ
Ans. (a) Δ U = 4000 kJ
(b) Δ U = 6000 kJ
(c) Δ U = 3400 kJ

(8) Calculate the internal energy change at 298 K for the following reaction :
\(\frac{1}{2} \mathbf{N}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\frac{3}{2} \mathbf{H}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \rightarrow \mathbf{N H}_{3(\mathrm{~g})}\)
The enthalpy change at constant pressure is -46.0 kJ mol-1. (R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1)
Solution :
Given : \(\frac{1}{2} \mathbf{N}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\frac{3}{2} \mathbf{H}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \rightarrow \mathbf{N H}_{3(\mathrm{~g})}\)
ΔH= -46.0 kJ mol-1
ΔH = Heat of formation of NH3 at constant pressure
= -46.0 kJ mol-1 = -4600 J mol-1
Δ U = Change in internal energy = ?
Δn = (Number of moles of ammonia) – (Number of moles of hydrogen + Number of moles of nitrogen)
= [1 – (\(\frac {1}{2}\) + \(\frac {3}{2}\))]= -1 mol
R= 8.314 JK-1 mol-1
T = Temperature in kelvin = 298 K
ΔH = Δ U + ΔnRT
∴ -46000 = ΔU + (-1 × 8.314 × 298)
∴ -46000 = ΔU – 2477.0
∴ ΔU = -46000 + 2477.0
= -43523 J
= -43.523 kJ
Ans. Change in internal energy = -43.523 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(9) 5 moles of helium expand isothermally and reversibly from a pressure 40 × 10-5 Nm-2 to 4 × 10-5 Nm-2 at 300 K. Calculate the work done, change in internal energy and heat absorbed during the expansion. (R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1)
Solution :
As the expansion takes place isothermally and reversibly, the work done is given by
Wmax = -2.203 nRT log\(\frac{P_{1}}{P_{2}}\)
Wmax = Maximum work done
n = Number of moles of helium = 5 moles
R = Gas constant = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1
T = 300 K
P1 = Initial pressure = 40 × 10-5 Nm-2
P2 = Final pressure = 4 × 10-5 Nm-2
∴ Wmax = -2.303 × 5 × 8.314 × 300 × log \(\frac {40}{4}\)
= – 2.303 × 5 × 8.314 × 300 × log 10
= -2.303 × 5 × 8.314 × 300 × 1
= – 28720J
As the expansion takes place isothermally, i.e., at the same temperature, there is no change in the internal energy of the system.
Q = ΔU + W
∴ Q = – W= + 28720 J as ΔU = 0
Ans. Work done = -28720 J, Heat absorbed = 28720 J, Change in internal energy = 0

(10) Calculate the work done in each of the following reactions. State whether work is done on or by the system.
(a) The oxidation of one mole of SO2 at 50°C.
2SO2(g) + O2(g) → 2SO3(g)
(b) Decomposition of 2 moles of NH4NO3 at 100°C
NH4NO3(s) → N2O(g) + 2H2O(g)
Solution :
(a) Given reaction :
2SO2(g) + O2(g) → 2SO3(g)
For 1 mole of SO2,
SO2(g) + \(\frac {1}{2}\)O2(g) → SO2(g)
∴ Δn = (n2)gaseous products – (n1)gaseous reactants
= 1 – (1 + \(\frac {1}{2}\))
= -0.5 mol
Since there is decrease in number of moles of gases, there will be compression, hence, the work will be done on the system by the surroundings.
Work is given by,
∴ W = – ΔnRT
= – (- 0.5) × 8.314 × (273 + 50)
= + 1342.7 J

(b) Given reaction :
NH4NO3(s) → N2O(g) + 2H2O(g)
For 2 moles of NH4NO3,
2NH4NO3(s) → 2N2O(g) + 4H2O(g)
∴ Change in number of moles,
Δn = (n2)gaseous products – (n1)gaseous reactants
= (2 + 4) – 0
= 6 mol
Since there is an increase in number of moles of gases, work of expansion is done by the system on the surroundings.
∴ W = -ΔnRT
= – 6 × 8.314 × (273+ 100)
= – 18606 J
= – 18.606 kJ
Ans. (a) W = 1342.7 J (b) W= -18.606 kJ

(11) The amount of heat evolved for the combustion of ethane is -900kJ mol-1 at 300K and 1 atm.
C2H6(g) + \(\frac {7}{2}\)O2(g) → 2CO2(g) + 3H2O(l)
Calculate W, ΔH and ΔU for the combustion of 12 × 10-3 kg ethane.
Solution :
Given : ΔH = -900 kJ mol-1
Temperature = T = 300 K
Pressure = P = 1 atm
Mass of ethane = m = 12 × 10-3 kg
Molar mass of ethane (C2H6) = 30 × 10-3 kg mol-1
ΔH = ? Δ U = ? for given ethane.
Number of moles of C2H6 = n = \(\frac{m \mathrm{~kg}}{M \mathrm{~kg} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}\)
= \(\frac{12 \times 10^{-3}}{30 \times 10^{-3}}\)
= 0.4 mol
For the given reaction,
C2H6(g) + \(\frac {7}{2}\)O2(g) → 2CO2(g) + 3H2O(l)
Δn = (n2)gaseous products – (n1)gaseous reactants
= 2 – (1 + \(\frac {7}{2}\)) = -2.5 mol
For 1 mol of C2H6, Δn = -2.5 mol
∴ For 0.4 mol of C2H6, Δn = -2.5 × 0.4
= -1 mol
Since there is a decrease in number of moles, the work is of compression on the system.
W = -ΔnRT
= – (-1) × 8.314 × 300
= + 2494 J
= + 2.494 kJ
For 1 mol of C2H6 ΔH = -900 kJ
∴ For 0.4 mol of C2H6, ΔH= – 900 × 0.4
= – 360 kJ
ΔH = ΔU + ΔnRT
ΔU = ΔH – ΔnRT
= -360 – (-1) × 8.314 × 300× 10-3
= – 360 + 2.494
= – 357.506 kJ
Ans. W = + 2.494 kJ, ΔH = -360 kJ;
ΔU= – 357.506 kJ

(12) The latent heat of evaporation of water is 80 kJ mol-1. If 100 g water are evaporated at 100 °C and 1 atm, calculate W, ΔH, ΔU and Q.
Solution :
Given : Latent heat of evaporation = ΔH
= 80 kJ mol-1 of water
Temperature = T = 273 + 100 = 373 K
Pressure = P = 1 atm
Mass of water = m = 100 g
Molar mass of water = 18 g mol-1
W = ?, ΔH = 1, U = ?, Q = ?
Number of moles of water = \(\frac{m}{M}=\frac{100}{18}\) = 5.556 mol
H2O(l) → H2O(g)
5.556 mol 5.556 mol
Change in number of moles = Δn = 5.556 – 0
= 5.556 mol
For evaporation of 1 mol H2O, ΔH = 80 kJ
For 5.556 mol H2O, ΔH= 80 × 5.556 = 444.5 kJ
In this reaction, the work will be of expansion.
W= -ΔnRT
= -5.556 × 8.314 × 373
= – 17230 J
= -17.23 kJ
Now,
ΔH = ΔU + ΔnRT
ΔU = ΔH – ΔnRT
= 444.5 – 5.556 × 8.314 × 373 × 10-3
= 444.5 – 17.23
= 427.27 kJ
In this, Q = QP = ΔH = 444.5 kJ
Ans. W= -17.23 kJ; ΔH = 444.5 kJ
ΔU= 427.21 kJ, Q = 444.5 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(13) Oxidation of propane is represented as
C3H8(g) + 5O2(g) → 3CO2(g) + 4H2O(g), ΔH0 = -2043 kJ
How much pressure volume work is done and what is the value of AU at constant pressure of 1 bar when the volume change is + 22.4 dm3.
Solution :
Given :
ΔH0 = – 2043 kJ
Change in volume = ΔV = +22.4 L
ΔU = ?
C3H8(g) + 5O2(g) → 3CO2(g) + 4H2O(g)
Δn = (n2)gaseous products – (n1)gaseous reactants
= (3 + 4) – (1 + 5)
= 1 mol
Since there is an increase in number of moles, the work will be of expansion.
W = -P × ΔV dm3 bar
= – 1 × 22.4
= – 1 × 22.4 × 100 J
= – 2240 J
= -2.240
ΔH = ΔU + PΔV
ΔU = ΔH – PΔV
= – 2043 – (2.24)
= – 2040.7 kJ
Ans. W = -2.27 kJ, ΔU = -2040.7 kJ

(14) How much heat is evolved when 12 g of CO reacts with NO2 ? The reaction is :
4CO(g) + 2NO2(g) → 4CO2(g) + N2(g),
ΔrH0 = -1200 kJ
Solution :
Given : 4CO(g) + 2NO2(g) → 4CO2(g) + N2(g)
Molar mass of CO = 28 g mol-1
ΔrH0 = – 1200 kJ;
Molar mass of CO = 28 g mol-1
mco = 12 g, ΔH = ?
From the reaction,
∵ For 4 × 28 g CO, ΔH0 = – 1200 kJ
∵ For 12g CO ΔH0 = \(\frac{(-1200) \times 12}{4 \times 28}\)
= -128.6 kJ
Ans. Heat evolved = 128.6 kJ

Question 36.
What is phase transformation?
Answer:
Phase transformation (or transition) :

  • The transition of one phase (physical state) of a matter to another phase at constant temperature and pressure without change in chemical composition is called phase transformation.
  • During phase transformation, both the phases exist at equilibrium.
    Solids ⇌ Liquid; Liquid ⇌ Vapour.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 37.
Mention different types of phase transitions.
Answer:
The following are the types of phase changes :
(1) Fusion : This involves the change of a matter from solid state to liquid state. In this heat is absorbed, hence it is endothermic (ΔH > 0).
H2O(s) → H2O(l)
(2) Vaporisation or evaporation : This involves the change of a matter from liquid state to gaseous state. In this heat is absorbed, hence it is endothermic (ΔH > 0).
H2O(l) → H2O(g)
(3) Sublimation : This involves the change of matter from solid state directly into gaseous state. In this heat is absorbed, hence it is endothermic (ΔH > 0).
Camphor(s) → Camphor(g)

Question 38.
Define and explain enthalpy of freezing.
Answer:
Enthalpy of freezing (ΔfreezH) : The enthalpy change that accompanies the solidification of one mole of a liquid into solid at constant temperature and pressure is called enthalpy of freezing.
For example,
\(\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{l})} \stackrel{1 \mathrm{~atm}, 273 \mathrm{~K}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{s})}\)
ΔfreezH = -6.01 kJ mol-1
This equation describes that when one mole of water freezes (solidifies) at 0 °C (273 K) and 1 atmosphere, 6.01 kJ of heat will be released to the surroundings.

Question 39.
Define and explain the following :
(A) Enthalpy of vaporisation.
(B) Enthalpy of sublimation.
Answer:
(A) Enthalpy of vaporisation (ΔvapH) : The enthalpy change that accompanies the vaporisation of one mole of a liquid at constant temperature and pressure is called heat of vaporisation or evaporation. For example,
\(\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{l})} \stackrel{1 \mathrm{~atm}, 373 \mathrm{~K}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{g})}\)
ΔvapH = +40.7 kJ mol-1
This equation describes that when one mole of water is evaporated at 100 °C (373 K) and 1 atmosphere, 40.7 kJ of heat will be absorbed.

(B) Enthalpy of sublimation (ΔsubH) : The enthalpy change or the amount of heat absorbed that accompanies the sublimation of one mole of a solid directly into its vapour at constant temperature and pressure is called enthalpy of sublimation.
For example,
\(\mathrm{CO}_{2(\mathrm{~s})} \stackrel{1 \mathrm{~atm}, 195 \mathrm{~K}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{CO}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\)
ΔsubH = 25.2 kJ mol-1
This equation describes that when 1 mole of dry solid carbon dioxide, CO2(s) sublimes forming gaseous CO2(g), 25.2 kJ of heat will be absorbed.

Question 40.
Explain process of sublimation and enthalpy of sublimation ?
OR
How is enthalpy of sublimation related to enthalpy of fusion and enthalpy of vaporisation ?
Answer:
(1) The sublimation involves the conversion of a solid into vapour at constant temperature and pressure. For example,
H2O(s) → H2O(g), ΔsubH = 51.08 kJ mol-1 at 0°C.
(2) This conversion takes place in two steps, first melting of solid into liquid and second vaporisation of the liquid.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 12
Hence we can write,
ΔsubH = ΔfusH + ΔvapH

Question 41.
Arrange the following in order of increasing enthalpy :
H2O(s), H2O(g), H2O(l)
Answer:
The increasing order of enthalpy of the given substance will be,
HH2O(g), < HH2O(l), < HH2O(s)
This is because the conversion of H2O(s) to H2O(l) and further to H2O(g) involves absorption of heat.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 42.
Define and explain :
(A) Enthalpy of atomisation
(B) Enthalpy of ionisation.
Answer:
(A) Enthalpy of atomisation (ΔatoH) : The enthalpy change or amount of heat absorbed accompanying the dissociation of the molecules in one mole of a gaseous substance into free gaseous atoms at constant temperature and pressure is called enthalpy of atomisation.
For example,
Cl2(g) → 2Cl(g), ΔatoH = 242 kJ mol-1
CH4(g) → C(g) + 4H(g), ΔatoH = 1660 kJ mol-1.

(B) Enthalpy of ionisation (ΔionH) : The enthalpy change or amount of heat absorbed accompanying the removal of one electron from each atom or ion in one mole of gaseous atoms or ions is called enthalpy of ionisation.
For example,
Na(g) → Na+(g) + e ΔionH = 494 kJ mol-1
This equation describes that when one mole of gaseous sodium atoms, Na(g) are ionised forming gaseous ions, Na+(g), the energy required is 494 kJ.

Question 43.
Define and explain electron gain enthalpy.
Answer:
Electron gain enthalpy (ΔegH) : It is defined as the enthalpy change, when mole of gaseous atoms of an element accept electrons to form gaseous ion.
E.g. Cl(g) + e → Cl(g) ΔegH = – 349 kJ mol-1.
It is the reverse of ionisation process.

Question 44.
Define enthalpy of solution.
Answer:
Enthalpy of solution : It is defined as the enthalpy change in a process when one mole of a substance is dissolved in specified amount of a solvent.
NaCl(s) + aq ⇌ NaCl(aq) ΔsolnH = 4 kJ mol-1

Question 45.
Define enthalpy of solution at infinite dilution.
Answer:
Enthalpy of solution (ΔsolnH) : It is defined as the enthalpy change when one mole of a substance is dissolved in a large excess of a solvent, so that further dilution will not change the enthalpy at constant temperature and pressure.
For example,
HCl(g) + aq → HCl(aq) ΔsolnH
= -75.14 kJ mol-1

Question 46.
Explain the enthalpy of solution of an ionic compound.
Answer:
An ionic compound dissolves in a polar solvent like water in two steps as follows :
Step-I : The ions are separated from the molecule involving crystal lattice enthalpy ΔLH.
\(\mathrm{MX}_{(\mathrm{s})} \rightarrow \mathrm{M}_{(\mathrm{g})}^{+}+\mathrm{X}_{(\mathrm{g})}^{-} \quad \Delta_{\mathrm{L}} H\)
ΔLH is always positive.

Step-II : The gaseous ions are hydrated with water molecules involving hydration energy, ΔhydH.
\(\mathbf{M}_{(\mathrm{g})}^{+}\) + xH2O(l) → [M(H2O)x]+
\(\mathrm{X}_{(\mathrm{g})}^{-}\) + yH2O(l) → [X(H2O)y]
ΔhydH is always negative.
The enthalpy change ΔsolnH of solution is given by,
ΔsolnH = ΔLH + ΔhydH
For example, consider enthalpy of solution of NaCl(s).
ΔLHNaCl = 790 kJ mol-1
ΔhydHNaCl = -786 kJ mol-1
Hence enthalpy change for solution of NaCl(s) is,
ΔsolnH = ΔLHNaCl + ΔhydHNaCl
= 790 + (-786)
= + 4 kJ mol-1
Therefore dissolution of NaCl in water is an endothermic process.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Solved Examples 4.9

Question 47.
Solve the following :

(1) Heat of fusion of ice at 0 °C and 1 atmosphere is 6.1 kJ mol-1 and heat of evaporation of water at 100 °C is 40.7 kJ mol-1. Calculate the enthalpy change for the conversion of 1 mole of ice at 0 °C into vapour at 100 °C. Heat capacity of water is 4.184 JK-1 mol-1.
Solution :
Given : Heat of fusion of ice = ΔfusH = 6.01 kJ mol-1
Heat of evaporation of water = ΔvapH = 40.7 kJ mol-1
Temperature of ice = 273 K
Temperature of vapour = (273 + 100) K = 373 K
Heat capacity of water = 4.184 JK-1 g-1
Heat capacity of 1 mole of water
= CH2O = 4.184 × 18
= 75.312 JK-1 mol-1
The conversion of ice at 0 °C to water at 100°C takes place in three steps as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 13
ΔH1 = nice × ΔfusH = 1mol × 6.01kJ mol-1 = 6.01 kJ
ΔH2 is the enthalpy change for raising the temperature from 273 K to 373 K.
ΔH2 = nwater × CH2O × (T2 – T1)
= 1mol × 75.312JK-1 mol-1 × (373 – 273)K
= 7531 J
= 7.531 kJ
ΔH3 = nwater × ΔvapH
= 1 × 40.7
= 40.7 kJ
Hence total enthalpy change will be ΔH = ΔH1 + ΔH2 + ΔH3
= 6.01 + 7.531 + 40.7
= 54.241 kJ
Ans. ΔH = 54.241 kJ

(2) Heat of sublimation of ice at 0°C and 1 atmosphere is 6.01 kJ mol-1 and heat of evaporation of water at 0 °C and 1 atmosphere is 45.07 kJ mol-1. Calculate the heat of sublimation of one mole of ice at 0 °C and 1 atmosphere. Write the equation for the same.
Solution :
The sublimation of ice can be represented by following equation,
\(\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{s})} \stackrel{1 \mathrm{~atm}, 0^{\circ} \mathrm{C}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{g})}\)
This is a process of two steps.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 14
ΔH1 = nH2O × ΔfusH
= 1 × 6.01 =6.01 kJ
ΔH2 = nH2O × ΔvapH
= 1 × 45.07 = 45.07
Heat of sublimation = ΔH = ΔH1 + ΔH2
= 6.01 + 45.07
= 51.08 kJ
Ans. Heat of sublimation of ice = 51.08 kJ

(3) Heat of evaporation of ethyl alcohol at 78.5 °C and 1 atmosphere is 38.6 kJ mol-1. If 100 g ethyl alcohol vapour is condensed, what will be ΔH ?
Solution :
Given : ΔvapHC2H5OH = 38.6 kJ mol-1
Mass of C2H5OH = m = 100 g
Molar mass of C2H5OH = M = 46 g mol-1
ΔcondHC2H5OH = ?
Number of moles of C2H5OH = \(\frac{m}{M}=\frac{100}{46}\)
= 2.174 mol
Heat of condensation = ΔcondH = -38.6 kJ mol-1
∴ ΔcondH = n × ΔcondH
= 2.174mol × (-38.6)kJ mol-1 kJ = – 83.9 kJ
Ans. Heat of condensation = ΔcondH = -83.9 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(4) The hydration enthalpies of Li+(g), and Br(g) are -500 kJ mol-1 and -350 kJ mol-1 respectively and the lattice energy of LiBr(s) is 807 kJmol-1. Write the thermochemical equations for enthalpy of solution of LiBr(s) and calculate its value.
Solution :
Given : Enthalpy of hydration of Li+(g)
= ΔhydH1
= -500 kJmol-1
Enthalpy of hydration of Br(g) = ΔhydH2
= -350 kJ mol-1
Lattice energy of LiBr(s) = ΔLH3 = 807 kJ mol-1
Enthalpy of solution of LiBr(s) = ΔsolnΔH = ?
The thermochemical equation for the dissolution of LiBr(s) forming a solution is,
LiBr(s) + aq → Li+(aq) + Br(aq) (I) ΔsolH = ?
This takes place in two steps as follows :
(i) LiBr(s) → Li+(g) + Br(g) ΔLH3
(ii) (a) Li+(g) + aq → Li+(aq) ΔhydH1
(b) Br(g) + aq → Br(aq) ΔhydH2
Hence by adding equations (i) and (ii) (a) and (b) we get equation I.
∴ ΔsolH = ΔLH3 + ΔhydH1 + ΔhydH2
= 807 + (-500) + (-350)
= -43 kJ mol-1
Ans. Heat of solution of LiBr(s) = ΔsolH = -43 kJ mol-1

(5) Heat of solution of NaCl is 3.9 kJ mol-1. If the lattice energy of NaCl is 787 kJ mol-1, calculate the hydration energies of ions of the salt.
Solution :
Given : Heat of solution of NaCl
= ΔsolnH0
= ΔH1 = 3.9 kJmol-1
Lattice energy of NaCl = ΔLH
= ΔH2 = 787 kJ mol-1
Hydration energy of Na+(g) and Cl(g)
= ΔhydH(Na+ + Cl)
= ΔH3 = ?
Thermochemical equation for dissolution of NaCl(s) is;
NaCl(s) + aq → Na+(aq) + Cl(aq)…ΔH1
NaCl(s) → Na+(g) + Cl(g)… ΔH2
Na+(g) + Cl(g) + aq → Na+(aq) + Cl(aq) ΔH3
∴ ΔH1 = ΔH2 + AH3
3.9 = 787 + AH3
∴ ΔH3 = -787 + 3.9= -783.1 kJmol-1
Ans. Hydration energy of Na+(g) and Cl(g)
= -783.1 kJmol-1

(6) Enthalpies of solution are given as follows :
CuSO4(s) + 10H2O → CUSO4(10H2O)
ΔH1 = -54.5 kJ mol-1
CuSO4(s) + 100 H2O → CUSO4(100H2O)
ΔH2 = -68.4 kJ mol-1
A solution contains 1 mol of CuSO4 in 180 g water at 25 °C. If it is diluted by adding 1620 g water, calculate the enthalpy of dilution.
Solution :
Given : Enthalpy of solution of CuSO4 in 10 mol H2O
= ΔsolnH = ΔH1 = -54.5 kJ mol-1
Enthalpy of solution of CuSO4 in 100 mol
H2O = ΔH2
= -68.4 kJmol-1
Mass of water = 1620 g
For dilution, ΔdilH = ?
Now 180 g H2O = \(\frac {180}{18}\) = 10 mol H2O
And, 1620 g H2O = \(\frac {1620}{18}\) = 90 mol H2O
Hence for heat of dilution,
CUSO4(10H2O) + 90H2O(l) → CUSO4(100H2O) ΔdilH = ?
∴ ΔdilH = ΔH2 -ΔH1
= -68.4 – (54.5)
= -13.9 kJmol-1
Ans. Heat of dilution = ΔdilH = -13.9 kJ mol-1

(7) Heat of solution and heat of hydration of AgF are -20.5kJmol-1 and -930kJmol-1 respectively. Calculate lattice energy of AgF.
Solution :
Given : Heat of solution of AgF = ΔsolnH
= -ΔH1 = -20.5 kJmol-1
Heat of hydration of AgF = ΔhydH = ΔH2
= -930 kJ mol-1
Lattice energy of AgF = ΔLH = ΔH3 = ?
For heat of solution, AgF(s) + aq → AgF(aq) ΔH1
For heat of hydration,
Ag+(g) + F(g) + aq → Ag+(aq) + F(aq) ΔH2
For Lattice energy, Ag+(g) + F(g) → AgF(s)
ΔLH = ?
From above equations,
∴ ΔH3 = ΔH2 – ΔH1
= -930 – (-20.5)
= -909.5 kJmol-1
Ans. Lattice energy of AgF(s) = -909.5 kJ mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(8) Bond enthalpy of H2 is 436kJmol-1 while hydration energy of hydrogen ion is -1075 kJ mol-1. Calculate the enthalpy of formation of H+(aq). (Ionisation energy of hydrogen is 1312 kJ mol-1
Solution :
Given : Bond enthalpy of H2(g) = ΔH0H2(g)
= 436 kJ mol-1
Hydration energy of H+(g) = ΔH2 = -1075 kJmol-1
Ionisation energy of H(g) = ΔH3 = 1312 kJ mol-1
Enthalpy of formation of H+(aq) = ΔfH = ?
Thermochemical equation for the formation of H+(aq)
\(\frac {1}{2}\)H2(g) + aq → H+(aq)ΔfH
This takes place in three steps as follows :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 15
Hence heat of formation of H+(aq) is
ΔfH = ΔH1 + ΔH2 + ΔH3
= \(\frac {1}{2}\) × 436 + (-1075) + 1312
= 218 – 1075 + 1312.
= 455 kJ mol-1
Ans. Enthalpy of formation of H+(aq) = 455 kJmol-1

(9) Calculate lattice energy of crystalline sodium chloride from the following data :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 16
Solution :
Given : Bond enthalpy of Cl2 = ΔH0 = 244 kJmol-1
Thermochemical equation for the formation of 1 mole of NaCl(s),
\(\mathrm{Na}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{Cl}_{2} \longrightarrow \mathrm{NaCl}_{(s)} \quad \Delta_{\mathrm{f}} H_{\mathrm{NaCl}}^{0}=-411 \mathrm{~kJ}\)
Lattice energy, ΔLH = ?
Since enthalpy is a state function, this reaction can be written in various steps as follows :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 17
By Hess’s law,
ΔLH0 = ΔsubH0+ ΔionH0 + \(\frac {1}{2}\)ΔH0cl2 + ΔegH0 + ΔLH0
-411 = 109 + 496 + \(\frac {1}{2}\) × 244 + (-348) + ΔLH
= 109 + 496 + 122 – 348 + ΔLH
∴ ΔLH= -790 kJ mol-1.
Ans. Lattice energy of NaCl(s) = -790 kJ mol

(10) Calculate the internal energy at 298 K for the formation of one mole of ammonia, if the enthalpy change at constant pressure is -42.0 kJ mol-1.
(Given : R = 8.314 J K-1 mol-1)
Solution :
Given : ΔH = -42.0 kJ mol-1, T = 298 K, ΔU = ?
\(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~N}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\frac{3}{2} \mathrm{H}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \longrightarrow \mathrm{NH}_{3(\mathrm{~g})}\)
Δn = 1 – (\(\frac {1}{2}\) + \(\frac {3}{2}\)) = -1 mol
ΔH = ΔU + ΔnRT
∴ ΔU = ΔH – ΔnRT
= -42 – (- 1) × 8.314 × 298 × 10-3
= -42 + 2.477
= -39.523 kJ
Ans. ΔU = -39.523 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 48.
What is thermochemistry ? Explain.
Answer:
Thermochemistry : Thermodynamic study of heat changes or enthalpy changes during the chemical reactions is called thermochemistry.
Consider a reaction, Reactants → Products
The heat changes ΔH for the reaction may be represented as,
ΔHreaction = Σ Hproducts – Σ Hreactants
where H represents enthalpy.
The energy released or absorbed during a chemical change appears in the form of heat energy.

Question 49.
Define and explain the term, enthalpy or heat of reaction.
Answer:
Enthalpy or heat of reaction : The enthalpy of a chemical reaction is the difference between the sum of the enthalpies of products and that of the reactants with every substance in a definite physical state and in the amounts (moles) represented by the coefficients in the balanced equation.
Explanation : Consider the following general reaction,
aA + bB → cC + dD
The heat of the reaction ΔH is the difference in sum of enthalpies of products and sum of enthalpies of reactants.
∴ ΔH = Σ Hproducts – Σ Hreactants
= [cHC + dHD] – [aHA + bHB]
= ΣPH – ΣRZ
where H represents enthalpy of the substance.
For endothermic reaction, ΔH is positive, (ΔH > 0).
For exothermic reaction, ΔH is negative, (ΔH < 0).

Question 50.
Explain the sign convention used for ΔH.
Answer:
The change in enthalpy or heat of reaction ΔH is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 18
(i) If the sum of enthalpies of products, ΣH and reactants, ΣRH are equal then ΔH for the reaction is zero, (ΔH = 0).
i. e. ΣPH = ΣRH
∴ ΔH = ΣPH – ΣRH = 0
(ii) If the sum of enthalpies of products ΣPH is greater than the sum of enthalpies of reactants ΣRH, then ΔH is positive, (ΔH > 0). Since such reactions take place with the absorption of heat from surroundings, they are called endothermic reactions.
∴ ΣHproducts > ΣHreactants
∴ ΔH > 0
(iii) If the sum of enthalpies of products ΣPH is less than the sum of enthalpies of reactants, ΣRH then ΔH is negative, (ΔH < 0). Since in such reactions heat is given out to the surroundings, they are called exothermic reactions.
∴ ΣPH < ΣRH
∴ ΔH < 0

Question 51.
Define : (i) Exothermic process (ii) Endothermic process.
Answer:
(i) Exothermic process : A process taking place with the evolution of heat is called exothermic process.
For this process, Q is -ve, ΔH is -ve.
(ii) Endothermic process : A process taking place with the absorption of heat (from the surroundings) is called endothermic process.
For this process, Q is +ve, ΔH is +ve.

Question 52.
Distinguish between Endothermic reaction and Exothermic reaction.
Answer:
Endothermic reaction:

  • In endothermic reaction heat is absorbed from suroundings.
  • Sum of enthalpies of products is greater than sum of enthalpies of reactants i.e. ΣPH > ΣRH
  • Heat of reaction, ΔH is positive.
  • Products are less stable than reactants.
  • C(s) + O2(g) → CO2(g)
    ΔH = -394 kJ
  • This reaction requires supply of thermal energy.

Exothermic reaction:

  • In exothermic reaction heat is given out to surroundings.
  • Sum of enthalpies of products is less than sum of enthalpies of reactants.
    i.e. ΣPH < ΣRH
  • Heat of reaction, ΔH is negative.
  • Products are more stable than reactants.
  • N2(g) + O2(g) → 2NO
    ΔH = + 180 kJ
  • This reaction does not require supply of thermal energy.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 53.
Explain the standard state of an element.
Answer:
Standard state of an element : It is defined as the most stable state of an element at 298 K and 1 atmosphere (or 1 bar).
In this state, the enthalpy of the element is assumed to be zero.
∴ H0element or in general Helement = 0
∴ H0graphite = HH2(g) = 0; HNa(s) = 0; HHg(l) = 0

Question 54.
What is a thermochemical equation? Explain with an example.
Answer:
Thermochemical equation : It is defined as a balanced chemical equation along with the corresponding heat of reaction (ΔH) and physical states and number of moles of all reactants and all products appropriately mentioned.
E.g. C6H12O6(s) + 6O2(g) = 6CO2(g) + 6H2O(l)
ΔH = -2808 kJ mol-1

Question 55.
What are the guidelines followed for writing thermochemical equations?
Answer:
According to IUPAC conventions, while writing thermochemical equations, following rules must be followed :
(1) Reaction is represented by balanced chemical equation for the number of moles of the reactants and the products. E.g.
CH4(g) + 2O2(g) = CO2(g) + 2H2O(l)
ΔrH°= -890 kJ mol-1
(2) The physical states of all the substances in the reaction must be mentioned. E.g. (s) for solid, (l) for liquid and (g) for gas.
(3) Heat or enthalpy changes are measured at 298 K and 1 atmosphere (or 1 bar).
(4) ΔH0 is written at right hand side of thermochemical equation.
(5) Proper sign must be indicated for ΔH0. For endothermic reaction ΔH0 is positive, (+ΔH0) and for exothermic reaction ΔH is negative, (-ΔH0).
(6) The enthalpy of the elements in their standard states is taken as zero. (H0Element = 0; H0C(s) = 0, H0H2(g) = 0)
(7) When all the substances taking part in the reaction are in their standard states, the enthalpy change is written as ΔH0.
(8) The enthalpy of any compound is equal to its heat of formation.
(9) In case of elements, the allotropic form must be mentioned. E.g. C(graphite), S(rhombic), Sn(white)
(10) For the reverse reaction, ΔH0 value has equal magnitude but opposite sign.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 56.
Define the following terms giving examples :
(1) Standard enthalpy of reaction.
(2) Standard enthalpy of formation or standard heat of formation
(3) Standard enthalpy of combustion or standard heat of combustion.
Answer:
(1) Standard enthalpy of reaction : it is defined as the difference between the sum of enthalpies of products and that of the reactants with every substance in its standard state at constant temperature (298 K) and pressure (1 atm).
Reactants → Products
ΔH0reaction = ΣH0products – ΣH0reactants

(2) Standard enthalpy of formation or standard heat of formation (ΔfH0) : It is defined as the enthalpy change ΔH0 when one mole of a pure compound is formed in its standard state from its constituent elements in their standard states at constant temperature (298 K) and pressure (1 atmosphere or 1 bar). It is denoted by ΔfH0. E.g.
C(s) + O2(g) = CO2(g) ΔfH0= -394 kJ mol-1
fH0 may be positive or negative.)

(3) Standard enthalpy of combustion or standard heat of combustion : it is defined as the enthalpy change when one mole of a substance in the standard state undergoes complete combustion in a sufficient amount of oxygen at constant temperature (298 K) and pressure (1 atmosphere or 1 bar). It is denoted by ΔcH0.
E.g. CH3OH(l) + \(\frac {3}{2}\)O2(g) = CO2(g) + 2H2O
ΔCH0 = -726 kJ mol-1
cH0 is always negative.)
[Note : Calorific value : It is the enthalpy change or amount of heat liberated when one gram of a substance undergoes combustion.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 19

Question 57.
Show that the standard heat of formation of a compound is equal to its enthalpy.
Answer:
Consider the formation of one mole of gaseous CO2 in the standard state at 298 K and 1 atmosphere. The thermochemical equation for formation can be represented as,
C(s) + O2(g) = CO2(g) ΔfH0 = -394 kJ mol-1
Now heat of this reaction, ΔH0 is,
ΔH0reaction = ΣPH0 – ΣRH0
∴ ΔfH0co2(g) = H0co2(g) – [H0c(s) + H0O2(g)]
Since the enthalpies of elements in their standard states are zero,
i.e.
H0c(s) = o, H0O2(g) = 0
∴ ΔfH0co2(g) = H0co2(g) – [0 + 0]
∴ ΔfH0co2 = Hco2(g)
Therefore standard heat of formation of a compound is equal to its enthalpy.

Question 58.
Standard enthalpy of formation of various following compounds are given. Write thermochemical equation for each :

Compound ΔfH0 KJ mol-1
Cao(s) -635.1
Al2Cl6(s) -1300
C2H6(g) -84.7
CH3COOH(l) -484.7
C2H5OH(l) -277.7
NaNO3(s) -950.8

Answer:
(Hint: Write one mole of the compound on right hand side and corresponding constituent elements along with their standard physical states on left hand side.)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 20

Question 59.
Standard enthalpy of combustion of different substances are given. Write thermochemical equation for each.

Substance ΔCH0 KJ mol-1
C(graphite) -393.5
C6H6(l) -3268
C2H5OH(l) -1409
CH3CHO -1166

Answer:
In the combustion reaction, C forms CO2(g),
H forms H2O(l), etc.
(1) C(graphite) + O2(g) → CO2(g)
ΔCH0 = -393.5 kJ mol-1
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 21

Question 60.
Write the thermochemical equations for enthalpy of solution of :
(1) Glucose (C6H12O6)
(2) NaCl(s)
(3) CaBr2(s)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 22

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 61.
How is standard enthalpy of formation useful to calculate standard enthalpy of reaction ?
Answer:
(1) The standard enthalpies of formation, ΔfH0 of the compounds can be used to determine the standard enthalpy of reaction (ΔrH0).
(2) ΔrH0 of a reaction can be obtained by subtracting the sum of ΔfH0 values of all the reactants from the sum of ΔfH0 values of all the products with each ΔfH0 value multiplied by the appropriate coefficient of that substance in the balanced thermochemical equation.
(3) Consider following reaction :
aA + bB → cC + dD
The standard enthalpy of the reaction is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 23
where a, b, c and d are the coefficients (moles) of the substances A, B, C and D respectively.

Question 62.
Write the balanced chemical equation that have ΔH0 value equal to ΔfH0 for each of the following substances :
(1) C2H2(g)
(2) KCIO3(s)
(3) C12H22O11(s) (4) CH3-CH2-OH(1)
Answer:
ΔfH0 represents the standard enthalpy of formation of each given substance. Hence it is necessary to write thermochemical equation for the formation of each substance. ΔH0 of this formation reaction is equal to standard heat of formation, ΔfH0.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 24

Question 63.
Consider the chemical reaction,
OF2(g) + H2O(g) → O2(g) + 2HF(g) ΔH0 = -323 kJ
What is ΔH0 of the reaction if (a) the equation is multiplied by 3, (b) direction of reaction is reversed?
Answer:
(a) If the given thermochemical equation is multiplied by 3 then,
ΔrH0 = 3ΔH0 = 3 × (-323) = -969 kJ
(b) If the direction of equation is reversed, then the reaction will be,
O2(g) + 2HF(g) → OF2(g) + H2O(g)
∴ ΔrH0 = – ΔH0 = – (- 323) = + 323 kJ

Question 64.
Define bond enthalpy (or bond energy).
Answer:
Bond enthalpy (or Bond energy) : The enthalpy change or amount of heat energy required to break one mole of particular covalent bonds of gaseous molecules forming free gaseous atoms or radicals at constant temperature (298 K) and pressure (1 atmosphere) is called bond enthalpy or bond energy. For example, bond enthalpy of H2 is 436.4 kJ mol-1.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 65.
Explain bond enthalpy of diatomic molecules.
Answer:
In case of diatomic molecules, since there is only one bond, the bond enthalpy is equal to heat of atomisation. For example, heat of atomisation of
HCl(g) is 431.9 kJ mol-1.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 25
(Bond enthalpy is generally denoted by D).

Question 66.
Explain bond enthalpy in polyatomic molecules.
Answer:
Consider bond enthalpy in H2O. The thermochemical equation for dissociation of H2O(g) is,
H2O(g) → 2H(g) + O(g), ΔrH0 = 927 kJ mol-1
In this, two O – H bonds are broken. It can be represented in stepwise as follows :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 26
In above, even if two identical O – H bonds are borken, the energies required to break each bond are different.
The average bond enthalpy of O – H bond is,
ΔrH0 = \(\frac {927}{2}\) = 463.5 kJ mol-1

Solved Examples 4.10

Question 67.
Solve the following :

(1) Standard enthalpy of formation of ethane, C2H6(g) is -84.7 kJ mol-1. Calculate the enthalpy change for the formation of 0.1 kg ethane.
Solution :
Given : Enthalpy of formation of C2H6(g)
= ΔfH0 = ΔH1 = -84.7 kJ mol-1
Mass of C2H6(g) = 0.1 kg = 100 g
Molar mass ofC2H6 = 30 g mol-1
ΔH0 for the formation of 0.1 kg C2H6 = 100 g
C2H6 = ΔH2 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 27
Ans. Heat of formation = -282.3 kJ

(2) When 10 g C2H5OH(l) are formed, 51 kJ heat is liberated. Calculate standard enthalpy of formation of C2H5OH(l).
Solution :
Given : Mass of C2H5OH(l) = m = 10 g
Heat liberated = ΔH1 = -51 kJ
Molar mass of C2H5OH = 46 gmol-1
Standard enthalpy of formation of C2H5OH(l)
= ΔfH = ?
Standard enthalpy of formation is the enthalpy change for the formation of 1 mole C2H5OH(l) i.e., 46 g C2H5OH(l).
Now,
∵ For the formation of 10 g C2H5OH(l)
ΔH1 = -51 kJ
∴ For the formation of 46 g C2H5OH,
ΔfH0 = \(\frac{-51 \times 46}{10}\) = – 234.6 kJ mol-1
Ans. Standard enthalpy of formation of C2H5OH = ΔfH0 = – 234.6 kJ mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(3) Standard enthalpy of combustion of CH3OH is -726kJ mol-1. Calculate enthalpy change for the combustion of 0.5 kg CH3OH.
Solution :
Given : Standard enthalpy of combustion of
CH3OH = ΔCH0 = ΔH1 = -726 kJ mol-1
Mass of CH3OH = m = 0.5 kg = 500 g
Molar mass of CH3OH = 32 g mol-1
Enthalpy of combustion = ΔCH = ΔH2 = ?
Now,
Enthalpy of combustion is ΔH for the combustion of 1 mole CH3OH = 32 g CH3OH.
∵ For 1 mole CH3OH = 32g CH3OH
ΔH1 = – 726 kJ
∴ For 500 g CH3OH, ΔH2 = \(\frac{-726 \times 500}{32}\)
= -11344 kJ
Ans. Enthalpy change for combustion of 0.5 kg CH3OH = – 11344 kJ

(4) The heat evolved in a reaction of 7.5 g of Fe2O3 with enough CO is 1.164 kJ.
Calculate ΔH0 for the reaction,
Fe2O3(s) + 3CO(g) → 2Fe(s) + 3CO2(g)
Solution :
Fe2O3(s) + 3CO(g) → 2Fe(s) + 3CO2(g)
ΔH = -1.164 kJ
Atomic mass of Fe = 56 g mol-1
Atomic mass of O = 16 g mol-1
Mass of Fe2O3 = 7.5 g
ΔH = -1.164 kJ
ΔH0 for reaction = ?
Molar mass of Fe2O3 = 2 × 56 + 3 × 16
= 160 g mol-1
∵ For 7.5 g Fe2O3 ΔH= – 1.164 kJ
∴ For 160 g Fe2O3
ΔH0 = \(\frac{-1.164 \times 160}{7.5}\) = -24.86 kJ mol-1
Ans. ΔH0 for the reaction = -24.83 kJ mol-1

(5) Calculate the standard enthalpy of the reaction,
2C (graphite) + 3H2(g) → C2H6(g), ΔH0 = ? from the following ΔH0 values :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 28
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 29
Ans. Standard enthalpy of formation of C2H6 = -84.4 kJ mol-1

(6) The enthalpy of combustion of ethane is -1300 kJ. How much heat will be evolved by combustion of 1.3 × 10-3 kg of ethane?
Solution :
Given : ΔCHC2H6(g) = -1300 kJ mol-1
ΔH = ?
Amount of C2H6(g) = 1.3 × 10-3 kg
Molar mass of C2H6 = 30 × 10-3 kg mol-1
Number of moles of C2H6
= nC2H6 = \(\frac{1.3 \times 10^{-3}}{30 \times 10^{-3}}\) = 4,333 × 10-2 mol
For, combustion of 1 mol C2H6 ΔH = -1300 kJ
∴ For combustion of 4.333 × 10-2 mol C2H6,
ΔH = 4.333 × 10-2 × ( -1300) = – 56.33 kJ
Ans. Heat evolved is -56.33 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(7) Calculate heat of formation of pentane from the following data :
(i) C(s) + O2(g) = CO2(g) ΔH0 = -393.51 kJ
(ii) H2(g) + \(\frac {1}{2}\)O2(g) = H2O(l) ΔH0 = -285.80 kJ
(iii) C5H12 + 😯2(g) = 5CO2(g) + 6H2O1 ΔH0 = -3537 kJ
Solution :
Given :
(i) CO(s) + O2(g) = CO2(g) ….. (1)
\(\Delta H_{1}^{0}\) = -393.51 kJ mol-1
(ii) H2(g) + \(\frac {1}{2}\)O2(g) = H2O(l) … (2)
\(\Delta H_{2}^{0}\) = – 285.80 kJ mol-1
(iii) C5H12(g) + 😯2(g) = 5CO2(g) + 6H2O(l) ….. (3)
\(\Delta H_{3}^{0}\) = -3537 kJ mol-1
Required thermochemical equation :
5C(s) + 6H2(g) → C5H12(g) – ΔH = ?
Add 5 × equation (1) and 6 × equation (2) and subtract equation (3), then we get the required equation.
∴ ΔH0 = 5 \(\Delta H_{1}^{0}\) + 6 \(\Delta H_{2}^{0}\) – \(\Delta H_{3}^{0}\)
= 5( -393.52) + 6( -285.8) – (-3537)
= -1967.6 – 1714.8 + 3537
= -145.4 kJ mol-1
Ans. ΔfH0C5H12 = -145.4 kJ mol-1

(8) How much heat is evolved when 12 g of CO react with NO2 according to the following reaction,
4CO(g) + 2NO2(g) → 4CO2(g) + N2(g), ΔH0 = -1198 kJ ?
Solution :
Given : Mass of CO(g) = m = 12 g
Molar mass of CO = 28 g mol-1
4CO(g) + 2NO2(g) → 4CO2(g) + N2(g)
ΔrH0 = -1198 kJ
Mass of 4 moles of CO = 4 × 28 g CO = 112 g CO
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 30
Ans. Heat evolved during combustion of 12 g CO = 128.4 kJ, or ΔCH = -128.4 kJ

(9) The heats of formation of C12H22O11(S), CO2(g) and H2O(l) are -2271.82, – 393.50 and 285.76 kJ respectively. Calculate the amount of cane sugar (C12H22O11(S)) which will supply 11296.8 kJ of energy.
Solution :
Given : ΔfHC12H22O11(S) = -2271.82 J mol-1
ΔfHCO2(g) = – 393.5 kJ mol-1
ΔfHH2O(l) = – 285.76 kJ mol-1
Energy required = 11296.8 kJ
Thermochemical equation for combustion of C12H22O11(S) is represented as,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 31
= [ 12(-393.5) + 11 (-285.76] – [-2271.82 + 12(0)]
= [ -4722 – 3143.36] + 2271.82
= -5593.54 kJ mol-1
Molar mass of C12H22O11(S) = 342
To obtain 5593.5 kJ energy, C12H22O11(S) required is 342 gram.
Hence for 11296.8 energy, the amount of C12H22O11(S) required as = \(\frac{11296.8 \times 342}{5593.54}\)
= 690.7 g
Ans. Amount of sugar required = 690.7 g

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(10) 6.24 g of ethanol are vaporized by supplying 5.89 kJ of heat energy. What is enthalpy of vaporization of ethanol?
Solution :
Given : Mass of ethanol (C2H5OH) = m = 6.24 g
Heat energy supplied = ΔH = 5.89 kJ
Heat of vaporisation of ethanol = ΔvapH = ?
Molar mass of ethanol, C2H5OH = 46 g mol-1
∵ For 6.24 g C2H5OH ΔH = 5.89kJ
∴ For 1 mole C2H5OH = 46 g C2H5OH
ΔH = \(\frac{5.89 \times 46}{6.24}\)
= 43.42 kJ mol-1
∴ Enthalpy of vaporisation of C2H5OH(l)
= 43.42 kJ
Ans. Enthalpy of vaporisation of C2H5OH(l)
= 43.42 kJ

(11) Given the following equations calculate the standard enthalpy of the reaction :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 32
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 33
By subtracting eq. (ii) from eq. (iii), we get eq. (i)
∴ eq. (i) = eq. (iii) – eq. (ii)
\(\Delta H_{1}^{0}=\Delta H_{3}^{0}-\Delta H_{2}^{0}\)
= -1670 – (-847.6)
= – 822.4 kJ
∴ ΔrH0 = ΔH01 = -822.4 kJ
Ans. Standrad enthalpy of the reaction = ΔrH0 = -822.4 kJ

(12) Calculate the standard enthalpy of combustion of CH2COOH(l) from the following data : ΔfH0(CO2) = -393.3 kJ mol-1
ΔfH0(H2O) = -285.8 kJ mol-1
ΔfH0(CH3COOH) = -483.2 kJ mol-1
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 34
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 35
∴ ΔH1 = 2ΔH2 + 2ΔH3 – ΔH4
= 2(-393.3) + 2(-285.8) – (-483.2)
= -786.6 – 571.6 + 483.2
= -875 kJ mol-1
Ans. Standard enthalpy of combustion of CH3COOH = -875 kJ mol-1.

(13) The bond enthalpies of H2(g), Br2(g) and HBr(g) are 436 kJ mol-1, 193 kJ mol-1 and 366 kJ mol-1 respectively. Calculate the enthalpy change for the following reaction,
H2(g) + Br2(g) → 2HBr(g).
Solution :
Given : Bond enthalpy of H2(g) = ΔH0H2(g)
= 436 kJ mol-1
Bond enthalpy of Br2(g) = ΔH0Br2(g) = 193 kJ mol-1
Bond enthalpy of HBr(g) = ΔH0HBr(g) = 366 kJ mol-1
Given reaction,
H2(g) + Br2(g) → 2HBr(g)
OR
H-H(g) + Br-Br(g) → 2H-Br(g)
The enthalpy change of the reaction is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 36
= [436 + 193] – 2[366]
= 629 – 732
= -103 kJ
Ans. Enthalpy change for the reaction = ΔrH0
= -103 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(14) Calculate ΔrH0 of the reaction
CH4(g) + O2(g) → CH2O(g) + H2O(g)
From the following data:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 37
Solution:
Given:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 38
Standard enthalpy change for the reaction = ΔrH0 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 39
= [ 2ΔH0C-H + ΔH0o=o ] – [ΔH0C=o + 2ΔH0o-H]
= [2 × 414 + 499] – [745 + 2 × 464]
= [828 + 499] – [745 + 928]
= -346 kJ
Ans. Standard enthalpy change for the reaction = ΔrH0 = -346 kJ

(15) Calculate C-Cl bond enthalpy from the following data :
CH3Cl(g) + Cl2(g) → CH2Cl2(g) + HCl(g) ΔH0 = – 104 kJ

Bond C–H Cl–Cl H–Cl
ΔH0/KJ mol-1 414 243 431

(330 kJ mol-1)
Solution :
Given :

Bond C–H Cl–Cl H–Cl
ΔH0/KJ mol-1 414 243 431

For the given reaction, ΔrH0 = -104 kJ
Bond enthalpy of C-Cl = ΔH0C–Cl] = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 40
In this reaction, 1 C–H, 1 Cl–Cl bonds of the reactants are broken while 1C–Cl and 1H–Cl bonds of the products are formed.
Sum of bond enthalpies of bonds formed of the products
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 41
Ans. Bond enthalpy of C–Cl = ΔH0C–Cl
= 330 kJ mol-1

(16) The enthalpy change for the atomisation of 1010 molecules of ammonia is 1.94 × 10-11 kJ. Calculate the bond enthalpy of N-H bond.
Solution :
Given : Enthalpy change for atomisation of 1010 molecules = 1.94 × 10-11 kJ
Number of NH3 molecules dissociate = 1010
Bond enthalpy of N-H = ΔH = ?
1 mole of NH3 contains 6.022 × 1023 NH3 molecules.
∵ For atomisation of 1010 molecules of NH3
ΔH = 1.94 × 10-11 kJ
∴ For atomisation of 6.022 × 1023 molecules of NH3,
ΔH = \(\frac{1.94 \times 10^{-11} \times 6.022 \times 10^{23}}{10^{10}}\)
= 1168 kJ mol-1
In NH3 three N-H bonds are broken on atomisation.
NH3(g) → N(g) + 3H(g) ΔH = 1168 kJ mol-1
∴ Average bond enthalpy of N-H bond is,
ΔH = \(\frac{1168}{3}\) = 389.3 kJ mol-1
Ans. Bond enthalpy of N-H bond
= 389.3 kJ mol-1

(17) Calculate the enthalpy of atomisation (or dissociation) of CH2Br2(g) at 25°C from the following data :

Bond enthalpies C-H C-Br
ΔH0 kJ mol-1 414 352

Solution :
Given : Bond enthalpies : ΔH0C-H
= 414 kJ mol-1;
ΔH0C-Br = 352 kJ mol-1
Enthalpy of atomisation of CH2Br2(g) = ?
Thermochemical equation for atomisation (or dissociation) of CH2Br2 is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 42
ΔatomH° = sum of bond enthalpies of all bonds broken
= 2ΔH0C-H + 2ΔH0C-Br
= 2 × 414 + 2 × 352
= 828 + 704
= 1532 kJ mol-1
Ans. Enthalpy of atomisation of CH2Br2(g)
= 1532 kJ mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(18) Enthalpy of sublimation of graphite is 716 kJ mol-1.

Bond enthalpy H-H C-H
ΔH0 kJ mol-1 436.4 414

Calculate standard enthalpy of formation of CH4.
Solution :
Given : ΔsubH0graphite = 716 kJ mol-1

Bond enthalpy H-H C-H
ΔH0 kJ mol-1 436.4 414

Thermochemical equation for the formation of CH4,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 43
= [716 + 2 × 436.4] – [4 × 414]
= [716+ 872.8] – [1656]
= 1588.8 – 1656
= -67.2 kJ mol-1
Ans. Standard enthalpy of formation of CH4 = ΔfH0CH4(g) = -67.2 kJ mol-1

(19) Calculate enthalpy of formation of propane from the following data :
Heat of sublimation of graphite is 716 kJ mo-1.

Bond enthalpy H-H C-H C-C
ΔH0 kJ mol-1 436.4 414 350

Solution :
Given: Enthalpy of sublimation of graphite = ΔsubH0C
= 716 kJmol-1

Bond enthalpy H-H C-H C-C
ΔH0 kJ mol-1 436.4 414 350

Enthalpy of formation of propane = ΔfH0 = ?
Thermochemical equation of the formation of propane, CH3-CH2-CH3,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 44
= [3 × 716 + 4 × 436.4] – [2 × 350 + 8 × 414]
= [2148 + 1745.6] – [700 + 3312]
= -118.4 kJmol-1
Ans. Enthalpy of formation of propane (C3H8)
= -118.4 kJmol-1

(20) The standard enthalpy of formation of propene, CH3-CH = CH2 is -13.2 kJ mol-1. Enthalpy of sublimation (atomisation) of graphite is 716 kJmol-1.

Bond enthalpy H-H C-H C-C
ΔH0 kJ mol-1 436.4 414 350

Calculate bond enthalpy of C = C
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 45
Bond enthalpy of C = C = ΔH0C=C = ?
For the formation of propene, (CH3 – CH = CH2),
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 46
13.2 = [3 × 716 + 3 × 436.4] – [6 × 414 + 350 + \(\Delta H_{\mathrm{C}=\mathrm{C}}^{0}\) ]
= [2148 + 1309.2] – [2484 + 350 + \(\Delta H_{\mathrm{C}=\mathrm{C}}^{0}\) ]
= [3457.2] – [2834 + \(\Delta H_{\mathrm{C}=\mathrm{C}}^{0}\) ]
= 3457.2 – 2834 – \(\Delta H_{\mathrm{C}=\mathrm{C}}^{0}\)
\(\Delta H_{\mathrm{C}=\mathrm{C}}^{0}\) = 3457.2 – 2834 – 13.2
= 610 kJmol-1
Ans. Bond enthalpy of C = C = \(\Delta H_{\mathrm{C}=\mathrm{C}}^{0}\)
= 610 kJ mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(21) Calculate the enthalpy of the reaction,
CH3COOH(g) + CH3CH2OH(g) → CH3COOCH2CH3(g) + H2O(g)
Bond enthalpies of O-H, C-O, in kJmol-1 are 464, 351 respectively.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 47
In this reaction 1O-H and 1C-0 bond of the reactants are broken while 1C-0 and 1O-H bonds of the products are formed. Enthalpy of reaction,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 48
Ans. Hence Enthalpy change for the reaction = ΔrH0 = 0.

Question 68.
(1) What is a spontaneous process?
(2) What are its characteristics?
Answer:
(1) Spontaneous process : It is defined as a process that takes place on its own or without the intervention of the external agency or influence. For example, expansion of a gas or flow of a gas from higher pressure to low pressure or a flow of heat from higher temperature to lower temperature.

(2) Characteristics :

  • It occurs on its own and doesn’t require external agency.
  • It proceeds in one direction and can’t be completely reversed by external stimulant.
  • These processes may be fast or slow.
  • These processes proceed until an equilibrium is reached.

Question 69.
Give the examples of spontaneous processes.
Answer:
The examples of the spontaneous processes are as follows :

  1. All natural processes are spontaneous.
  2. A flow of gas from higher pressure to lower pressure.
  3. Flow of water on its own from higher level to lower level.
  4. Flow of heat from hotter body to colder body.
  5. Acid-base neutralisation is a spontaneous reaction.

Question 70.
What is relation between spontaneity and energy of a system ?
Answer:
(1) The spontaneous process takes place in a direction in which energy of the system decreases. For example, neutralisation reaction between NaOH and HCl solution is exothermic with release of energy.

(2) The spontaneous process also takes place with the increase in energy by absorbing heat. For example,
(a) Melting of ice at 0 °C by absorption of heat
(b) Dissolution of NaCl,
NaCl(s) + aq → NaCl(aq) → Na+(aq) + Cl(aq)
ΔH0 = + 3.9 kJ mol-1

Question 71.
Which of the following are spontaneous ?
(a) Dissolving sugar in hot coffee.
(b) Separation of Ar and Kr from their mixture.
(c) Spreading of fragrance when a bottle of perfume is opened.
(d) Flow of heat from cold object to hot object.
(e) Heat transfer from ice to room temperature at 25 °C.
Answer:
The spontaneous processes are :
(a) Dissolving sugar in hot coffee.
(b) Separation of Ar and Kr from their mixture.
(c) Spreading of fragrance when a bottle of perfume is opened.

The non-spontaneous processes are :
(d) Flow of heat from cold object to hot object.
(e) Heat transfer from ice to room temperature at 25 °C.

Question 72.
Explain : (a) Order in a system.
(b) Disorder in a system.
Answer:
(a) (i) When the atoms, molecules or ions constituting the system are arranged in a perfect order then the system is said to be in order. For example, in the solid state, the constituent atoms, molecules or ions are tightly placed at lattice points in the crystal lattice.
(ii) When solid melts forming a liquid or when a liquid vaporises, the constituents are separated and are in random motion imparting maximum disorder.
(iii) As energy of the system decreases order increases.

(b) Increase in entropy is a measure of disorder in the system. Consider following process :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 49
Fig. 4.11 : Order decreases and disorder increases, Entropy increases

Question 73.
What is the change in order and entropy in the following :
(i) Dissolution of solid I2 in water.
(ii) Dissociation of H2(g) into atoms ?
Answer:
(i) For dissolution of solid I2,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 50
In the solid I2, there is ordered arrangement which collapses in solution increasing disorder and entropy, hence ΔS is positive.

(ii) In the dissociation of H2(g)
H2(g) → 2H(g) (ΔS > 0)
In the molecular state, two H atoms in every molecule are together but in atomic state the disorder is increased with the increase in entropy and hence ΔS > 0.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 74.
How does addition of heat to a system at different temperatures changes disorder or ΔS ?
Answer:

  • The amount of heat added to a system at higher temperature causes less disorder than when the heat is added at lower temperature.
  • Since disorder depends on the temperature at which heat is added, ΔS relates reciprocally to temperature.
  • This can also be explained from equation,
    ΔS = \(\frac{Q_{\text {rev }}}{T}\)

Question 75.
Explain the change in entropy for the following processes :
(i) 2H2O2(l) → 2H2O(l) + O2(g)
(ii) 2H2(g) + O2(g) → 2H2O(l)
(iii) When ice melts at 0 °C and water vaporises at 100 °C.
Answer:
(i) In the following reaction,
2H2O2(l) → 2H2O(l) + O2(g) ΔS = + 126 JK
Due to formation of O2 gas from liquid, entropy increases.
(ii) In the reaction, entropy decreases due to formation of liquid H2O from gaseous H2 and O2.
(iii) \(\text { Ice } \stackrel{0^{\circ} \mathrm{C}}{\longrightarrow} \text { water } \stackrel{100^{\circ} \mathrm{C}}{\longrightarrow} \text { vapour }\)
In these two steps, entropy increases due to increase in disorder from solid ice to liquid water and further to gaseous state.

Question 76.
How does entropy change in the following processes ? Explain.
(a) freezing of a liquid
(b) sublimation of a solid
(c) dissolving sugar in water
(d) condensation of vapour.
Answer:
(a) Freezing of a liquid results in decrease in randomness and disorder, hence entropy decreases, ΔS < 0.
(b) Sublimation of a solid converts it into vapour where the molecules or atoms are free to move randomly. Hence disorder increases accompanying increase in entropy, ΔS > 0.
(c) Dissolving sugar in water separates the molecules of sugar in the solution increasing disorder and entropy, ΔS > 0.
(d) Condensation of vapour decreases the disorder and randomness, hence entropy, ΔS < 0.

Question 77.
Predict the sign of ΔS in the following processes. Give reasons for your answer :
OR
Explain with reason sign conventions of ΔS in the following reactions.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 51
Answer:
(a) N2O4(g) → 2NO2(g)
Since 1 mole N2O4 on dissociation gives two moles of NO2, the number of molecules increase, disorder increases hence entropy increases, ΔS > 0.

(b) Fe2O3(s) + 3H2(g) → 2Fe(s) + 3H2O(g)
In the reaction number of moles of gaseous reactants and products are same, hence ΔS = 0.

(c) N2(g) + 3H2(g) → 2NH3(g)
In the reaction, 4 moles of gaseous reactants form 2 moles of gaseous products (Δn < 0). Therefore disorder decreases and hence entropy decreases, ΔS < 0.

(d) MgCO3(s) → MgO(s) + CO2(g)
In this 1 mole of orderly solid MgCO3 gives 1 mole of solid MgO and 1 mole of gaseous CO2 (Δn > 0) with more disorder. Hence entropy increases, ΔS > 0.

(e) CO2(g) → CO2(s)
In this system from higher disorder in gaseous state changes to less disorder in the solid state, hence entropy decreases, ΔS < 0.

(f) Cl2(g) → 2Cl(g)
Since the dissociation of Cl2 gas gives double Cl atoms, the number of atoms increases (Δn >0) increasing the disorder of the system. Hence ΔS > 0.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 78.
Identify which of the following pairs has larger entropy ? Why ?
(a) He(g) in a volume of 1 L or He(g) in a volume of 5 L both at 25 °C.
(b) O2(g) at 1 atm or O2(g) at 10 atm both at the same temperature.
(c) C2H5OH(l) or C2H5OH(g)
(d) 5 mol of Ne or 2 mol of Ne.
Answer:
(a) Atoms of He in 5 L at 25 °C occupy more volume than in 1 L. Hence, the randomness and disorder is more in 5 L. Expansion of a gas always increases its entropy. Therefore He(g) in 5L will have larger entropy.

(b) O2(g) at 1 atm will occupy more volume than O2(g) at 10 atm at the same temperature. Hence at 1 atm O2(g) will have higher disorder and hence higher entropy.

(c) The molecules of gaseous C2H5OH(g) will have more disorder and randomness due to free motion of molecules than C2H5OH(l). Hence entropy of C2H5OH(g) will be larger.

(d) 5 mol Ne will contain more Ne atoms than 2 mol Ne. Hence disorder in 5 mol will be more. Therefore 5 mol Ne will have larger entropy.

Question 79.
Mention entropy change (ΔS) for :
(i) spontaneous process
(ii) nonspontaneous process
(iii) at equilibrium.
Answer:
(a) ΔStotal > 0, the process is spontaneous
(b) ΔStotal < 0, the process is non-spontaneous
(c) ΔStotal = 0, the process is at equilibrium.

Question 80.
Define Gibbs free energy and change in free energy. What are the units of Gibbs free energy ?
OR
Derive the relation between ΔG and ΔS Total.
Answer:
(i) Gibbs free energy, G is defined as,
G = H – TS
where H is the enthalpy, S is the entropy of the system at absolute temperature T.
Since H, T and S are state functions, G is a state function and a thermodynamic function.

(ii) At constant temperature and pressure, change in free energy ΔG for the system is represented as, ΔG = ΔH – TΔS
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 52
This is called Gibbs free energy equation for ΔG. In this ΔS is total entropy change, i.e., ΔSTotal.

(iii) The SI units of ΔG are J or kJ (or Jmol-1 or kJmol-1).
The c.g.s. units of ΔG are cal or kcal (or cal mol-1 or kcal mol-1.)

Question 81.
Explain Gibbs free energy and spontaneity of the process.
Answer:
The total entropy change for a system and its surroundings accompanying a process is given by,
ΔSTotal = ΔSsystem + ΔSsurr
By second law, for a spontaneous process,
ΔSTotal > 0. If + ΔH is the enthalpy change (or enthalpy increase) for the process, or a reaction at constant temperature (T) and pressure, then enthalpy change (or enthalpy decrease) for the surroundings will be -ΔH.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 53
By Gibbs equation,
ΔG = ΔH – TΔS
By comparing above two equations,
∴ ΔG = -TΔSTotal
As ΔSTotal increases, ΔG decreases.
For a spontaneous process, ΔSTotal > 0
which is according to second law of thermodynamics.
∴ ΔG < 0.
Hence in a spontaneous process, Gibbs free energy decreases (ΔG < 0) while entropy increases (ΔS > 0).
Therefore for a non-spontaneous process Gibbs free energy increases (Δ G > 0).
It can be concluded that for a process at equilibrium, ΔG=0.
Hence,

  • For the spontaneous process, Δ G < 0
  • For the non-spontaneous process, Δ G > 0
  • For the process at equilibrium, Δ G = 0.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Question 82.
How does second law of thermodynamics explain the conditions of spontaneity ?
Answer:
The second law explains the conditions of spontaneity as below :
(i) ΔStotal  > 0 and ΔG < 0, the process is spontaneous.
(ii) ΔStotal  < 0 and ΔG > 0, the process is nonspontaneous.
(iii) ΔStotal = 0 and ΔG = 0, the process is at equilibrium.

Question 83.
Discuss the factors, ΔH, ΔS and ΔG for spontaneous and non-spontaneous processes.
OR
What can be said about the spontaneity of reactions when (1) ΔH and ΔS are both positive (2) ΔH and ΔS are both negative (3) ΔH is positive and ΔS is negative (4) ΔH is negative and ΔS is positive.
Answer:
For a spontaneous or a non-spontaneous process, ΔH and ΔS may be positive or negative (ΔH < 0 or ΔH > 0; ΔS < 0 or ΔS > 0). But ΔG must decrease, i.e., ΔG < 0. If ΔG > 0, the process or a reaction will definitely be non-spontaneous. This can be explained by Gibbs equation, ΔG = ΔH – TΔS.
(1) If ΔH and ΔS are both negative, then ΔG will be negative only when TΔS < ΔH or when temperature T is low. Such reactions must be carried out at low temperatures.
(2) If ΔH and ΔS are both positive then ΔG will be negative if, TΔS > ΔH; such reactions must be carried out at high temperature.
(3) If ΔH is negative (ΔH < 0) and ΔS is positive (ΔS > 0) then for all temperatures ΔG will be negative and the reaction will be spontaneous. But as temperature increase, ΔG will be more negative, hence the reaction will be more spontaneous at higher temperature.
(4) If ΔH is positive, (ΔH > 0) and ΔS is negative (ΔS < 0), ΔG will be always positive (ΔG > 0) and hence the reaction will be non-spontaneous at all temperatures.

This can be summarised in the following table :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 54

Question 84.
Obtain a temperature condition for equilibrium.
Answer:
For a system at equilibrium, free energy change ΔG is,
ΔG = ΔH – TΔS
where ΔH is enthalpy change, ΔS is entropy change at temperature, T. Since ΔG = 0 at equilibrium,
O = ΔH – TΔS
∴ TΔS = ΔH
OR T = \(\frac{\Delta H}{\Delta S}\)
Hence at temperature T, changeover between forward spontaneous step and backward non-spontaneous step occurs and the system attains an equilibrium.
Here ΔH and ΔS are assumed to be independent of temperature.

Question 85.
Predict the signs of ΔH, ΔS and ΔG of the system when a solid melts at 1 atmosphere and at (a) -55 °C (b) -95 °C (c) -77 °C, if the normal melting point of the solid is -77 °C.
Answer:
Since the normal melting point of the solid is -77°C, to melt the solid at any temperature other than at -77 °C, the pressure is required to be changed. During the phase change, the system will be at equilibrium, hence Δ G = 0.
(a) In case a solid at -55 °C, the temperature should be decreased (ΔH < 0, ΔS < 0) to -77 °C and then it will melt, so ΔH > 0, ΔS > 0, ΔG = 0.
(b) In case of a solid at -95 °C, it represents supercooled system and the temperature should be raised to -77 °C (ΔH > 0, ΔS > 0) and then it will melt so ΔH > 0, ΔS > 0, ΔG = 0.
(c) At -77 °C, solid will melt, solid and liquid will be at equilibrium. Melting involves absorption of heat,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 55
ΔH >0, ΔS > 0, ΔG = 0.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Solved Examples 4.11

Question 86.
Solve the following :

(1) In an isothermal reversible process, 6 kJ heat is absorbed at 27 °C. Calculate the entropy change.
Solution :
Given : Temperature = T = 273 + 21 = 300 K
Heat absorbed = Qrev = 6 kJ = 6000 J
Entropy change = ΔS = ?
ΔS = \(\frac{Q_{\text {rev }}}{T}=\frac{6000}{300}\) = 20 JK-1
Ans. Entropy change = ΔS = 20 JK-1

(2) The latent heat of evaporation of water is 2.26 kJ g-1 at 1 atm and 100 °C. Calculate the entropy change for evaporation of 1 mole of water at 100 °C.
Solution :
Given : Latent heat of evaporation = ΔvapH0
= 2.26 kJ g-1
Temperature = T = 273 + 100 = 373 K
Molar mass of water = 18 g mol-1
ΔS = ?
For 1g H2O(l) ΔvapH0 = 2.26 KJ
∴ For 1 mol H2O(l) = 18 g H2O(l)
ΔvapH0 = 2.26 × 18
= 40.68 kJ
= 40680 J
Entropy change, ΔS is given by,
ΔS = \(\frac{\Delta_{\mathrm{vap}} H^{0}}{T}=\frac{40680}{373}\) = 109.06 JK-1 mol-1
Ans. Entropy change = ΔS = 109.06 JK-1 mol-1

(3) Calculate the standard (absolute) entropy change for the formation of CO2(g).

Substance C(graphite) O2(g) CO2(g)
Standard molar enthalpy JK-1 mol-1 5.74 205 213.7

Solution:
Given:

Substance C(graphite) O2(g) CO2(g)
Standard molar enthalpy S0 JK-1 mol-1 5.74 205 213.7

For the formation of CO2(g),
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 56

(4) The standard entropies of H2(g), O2(g) and H2O(g) in JK-1 mol-1 are 130, 205 and 189 respectively. The heat of formation of H2O(g) is -242 kJ mol-1. Calculate ΔS for formation of H2O(g), for the surroundings and the universe at 298 K. Mention whether the reaction is spontaneous or non-spontaneous.
Solution :
Given :

Substance H2(g) O2(g) H2O(g)
Standard entropy S0 JK-1 mol-1 130 205 189

ΔfH0 = -242 kJ mol-1
ΔSuniverse = ?, ΔSsurr = ?
Thermochemical equation for the formation of H2O(g)
H2(g) + \(\frac {1}{2}\)O2(g) → H2O(g)
ΔS0 = [S0H2O] – [H0H2 + \(\frac {1}{2}\) H0O2]
= 189 – [130 + \(\frac {1}{2}\)(205)]
= 189 – [232.5]
= -43.5 JK-1 mol-1
Hence, ΔSsystem = -43.5 JK-1 mol-1
Since for the formation of H2O(g)
ΔfH0 = -242 kJmol-1 = -242 × 103 Jmol-1, the reaction is exothermic. Hence the surroundings gains heat energy 242 × 103J. Therefore entropy of the system decreases while entropy of surroundings increases.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 57
Hence, ΔSsys < 0 but ΔSuniverse > 0, hence the reaction is spontaneous.
Ans. ΔSH2O(g) = -43.5 JK-1 mol-1
ΔSsurr = 813 JK-1 mol-1
ΔSuniverse = 769.5 JK-1.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(5) Calculate ΔSTotal and hence show whether the following reaction is spontaneous at 25 °C.
Hg(s) + O2(g) → Hg(l) + SO2(g) ΔH0 = – 238.6 kJ
ΔS0 = +36.7 JK-1
Solution :
Given : Hg(s) + O2(g) → Hg(l) + SO2(g)
ΔrH0 = – 238.6 kJ
ΔS0 = +36.7 JK-1
T = 273 + 25 = 298 K
ΔSTotal = ?
ΔSTotal = ΔSsys + Δ Ssurr
Now, ΔSsys = 36.7 JK-1
Since the reaction is exothermic, system loses heat to surroundings. Hence the entropy of the surroundings increases.
ΔHsurr = + 238.6 kJ = 238600 J
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 58
∵ ΔSTotal > 0, the reaction is spontaneous.
Ans. ΔSTotal = 837.4 JK-1
The reaction is spontaneous.

(6) What is the value of ASsurr for the following reaction at 298 K ?
6CO2(g) + 6H2O(l) → C6H12O6(s) + 6O2(g),
ΔG0 = 2879 kJ mol-1, ΔS0 = -210 JK-1 mol-1.
Solution :
Given :
6CO2(g) + 6H2O(l) → C6H12O6(s) + 6O2(g),
ΔG0 = 2879 kJmol-1;
ΔS0 = -210 JK-1mol-1 = -0.210 kJ K-1 mol-1
T = 298 K ΔH0 = ?
ΔG0 = ΔH0 – TΔS0
∴ ΔH0 = ΔG0 + TΔS0
= 2879 + 298(-0.210)
= 2879 – 62.58
= 2816.42 kJ mol-1
Since ΔH0 > 0, the reaction is endothermic, and system absorbs heat from surroundings. Hence surroundings loses heat,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 59
Ans. ΔS0surr = -9.45 kJ K-1

(7) Calculate ΔSsurr when on mole of methanol (CH3OH) is formed from its elements under standard conditions if ΔfH0(CH3OH) = -238.9 J mol-1.
Solution :
Given : Number of moles of ethanol,
(C2H5OH) = n = 1 mol
ΔfH0(CH3OH) = -238.9 kJ mol-1
= -238.9 × 103J mol-1
Temperature = T = 298 K
ΔS = ?
ΔSsurr = ?
Since ΔfH0 is negative, the reaction for the formation of one mole of C2H5OH is exothermic.
As heat is released to the surroundings,
ΔH0surr = + 238.9 kJ mol-1
∴ ΔSsurr = \(\frac{\Delta H_{\text {surr }}^{0}}{T}=\frac{+238.9 \times 10^{3}}{298}\)
= +801.7 JK-1
Thus entropy of the surroundings increases.
Ans. ΔSsurr = +801.7 JK-1

(8) What is the value of ΔSsurr for the following reaction at 298 K –
6CO2(g) + 6H2O(l) → C6H12O6(s) + 6O2(g)
Given that: ΔG° = 2879 KJ mol-1
ΔS0 = -210 J K-1 mol-1
Solution :
Given : ΔG0 = 2879 KJ mol-1 = 2879 × 103 J mol-1
ΔS0 = -210 JK-1 mol-1
ΔSsurr = ?
ΔG0 = ΔH0 – TΔS0
∴ ΔH0 = ΔG0 + TΔS0
= 2879 × 103 + 298 × (- 210)
= 2879 × 103 – 62580
= 2816420 J
Since, for a system, ΔH0 is +2816420 J, the surrounding loses heat to system,
∴ ΔH0surr = – 2816420 J
∴ ΔS0surr = \(\frac{\Delta H_{\text {surr }}^{0}}{T}\)
= \(\frac{-2816420}{298}\)
= -9451 JK-1
= -9.451 kJ K-1
Ans. ΔSsurr = -9.451 kJ K-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(9) Determine whether the reactions with the following ΔH and ΔS values are spontaneous or non-spontaneous. State whether they are exothermic or endothermic.
(a) ΔH = -110 kJ and ΔS = +40 JK-1 at 400 K
(b) ΔH = +50 kJ and ΔS = -130 JK-1 at 250 K.
Solution :
(a) Given : ΔH= -110 kJ ΔS = 40 JK-1 = 0.04 kJK-1
Temperature = T = 400 K ΔG = ?
Since ΔH is negative, the reaction is exothermic
ΔG = ΔH – TΔS
= -110 – 400 × 0.04
= -110 – 16
= -126 kJ
Since ΔG is negative, the reaction is spontaneous.

(b) Given : ΔH=50 kJ,
ΔS= -130 JK-1 = -0.13 kJ K-1
Temperature = T = 250 K
ΔG = ?
Since ΔH is positive, the reaction is endothermic.
ΔG = ΔH – TΔS
= 50 – 250 × (-0.13)
= 50 + 32.5
= 82.5 kJ
Since ΔG > 0, the reaction is non-spontaneous.
Ans. (a) ΔG = -126 kJ; The reaction is exothermic and spontaneous.
(b) ΔG = 82.5 kJ; The reaction is endothermic and non-spontaneous.

(10) For a certain reaction, ΔH0 = -224 kJ and ΔS0 = -153 JK-1. At what temperature will it change from spontaneous to non-spontaneous ?
Solution :
Given : ΔH0 = – 224 kJ = – 224000 J
ΔS0 = – 153 JK-1
Temperature (T) at which, reaction changes from spontaneous to non-spontaneous = ?
Find the temperature at equilibrium, where ΔG0 = 0
ΔG0 = ΔH0 – TΔS0
0 = ΔH0 – TΔS0
∴ TΔS0 = ΔH0
∴ T = \(\frac{\Delta H^{0}}{\Delta S^{0}}\)
= \(\frac{224000}{153}\)
= 1464 K.
Hence reaction will be spontaneous below 1464 K. It will be at equilibrium at 1464 K and non-spontaneous above 1464 K.
Ans. Change over temperature from spontaneous to non-spontaneous = 1464 K.

(11) Determine whether the reactions with the following ΔH and ΔS values are spontaneous or non-spontaneous. State whether the reactions are exothermic or endothermic.
(a) ΔH = -110 kJ, ΔS = +40 JK-1 at 400 K
(b) ΔH = + 40 kJ, ΔS = – 120 JK-1 at 250 K
Solution :
(a) Given : ΔH = -110 kJ, ΔS = +40 JK-1 at T = 400K
ΔG = ΔH – TΔS
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 60
= -110 – 16
= -126 kJ
Since ΔG is negative, the reaction is spontaneous.
Since ΔH is negative, the reaction is exothermic.

(b) Given : ΔH = + 40 kJ, ΔS = -120 JK-1 at T = 250 K
ΔG = ΔH – TΔS
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 61
= 40 + 30
= 70 kJ
Since ΔG is negative, the reaction is spontaneous.
Since ΔH is negative, the reaction is exothermic.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(12) Determine whether the following reaction will be spontaneous or non-spontaneous under standard conditions.
Zn(s) + Cu2+ → Zn2+ +Cu(s) ΔH0 = -219 kJ, ΔS0 = -21 JK-1
Solution :
Given : ΔH0 = -219 kJ;
ΔS0 = -21 JK-1= 0.021 kJ K-1
ΔG0 = ?
For standard conditions : Pressure = 1 atm
Temperature = T = 298 K
ΔG0 = ΔH0 – TΔS0
= -219 – 298 × (-0.021)
= -219 + 6.258
= -212.742 kJ
Since ΔG < 0, the reaction is spontaneous.
Ans. The reaction is spontaneous.

(13) The equilibrium constant for a gaseous reversible reaction at 200 °C is 1.64 × 103 atm2. Calculate ΔG° for the reaction.
Solution :
Given : Equilibrium constant = KP = 1.64 × 103 atm2
Temperature = T = 273 + 200 = 473 K
ΔG0 = ?
ΔG0 = -2.303 RTlog10 Kp
= – 2.303 × 8.314 × 473 × log10 1.64 × 103
= – 2.303 × 8.314 × 473 × (3.2148)
= -29115 J
= -29.115 kJ
Ans. ΔG0 = -29.115 kJ

(14) Calculate ΔG for the reaction at 25°C
CO(g) + 2H2(g) ⇌ CH3OH(g)
ΔG0 = -24.8 kJ mol-1.
if Pco = 4 atm, PH2 = 2 atm, PCH3OH = 2 atm.
Solution :
Given : Partial pressures : pco = 4 atm,
PH2 = 2 atm,
PCH3OH = 2 atm
Temperature = T = 273 + 25 = 298 K
ΔG0 = -24.8 kJ mol-1
CO(g) + 2H2(g) ⇌ CH3OH(g)
The reaction quotient, Q is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 62
= – 24.8 + 2.303 × 8.314 × 298 × log10 0.125
= – 24.8 + 2.303 × 8.314 × 298 × (\(\overline{1} \cdot 09691\))
= – 24.8 + 2.303 × 8.314 × 298 × (- 0.90709)
= – 24.8 – 2.303 × 8.314 × 298 × 0.90709 × 10-3
= -24.8 – 5.176
= -29.976 kJ mol-1.
Ans. ΔG = – 29.976 kJ mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

(15) Calculate KP for the reaction,
C2H4(g) + H2(g) ⇌ C2H6(g),
ΔG0 = -100 kJ mol-1, at 25°C.
Solution :
Given : ΔG0 = – 100 kJ mol-1 = – 100 × 103 J mol-1
= -1 × 105 Jmol-1
Temperature = T = 273 + 25 = 298 K
Equilibrium constant = KP = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 63

(16) KP for the reaction,
MgCO3(s) → MgO(s) + CO2(g) is 9 × 10-10.
Calculate ΔG0 for the reaction at 25 °C.
Solution :
Given : KP = 9 Δ 10-10
Temperature = T = 273 + 25 = 298 K
ΔG0 = ?
ΔG0 = -2.303 RTlog10KP
= -2.303 × 8.314 × 298 × log109 × 10-10
= -2.303 × 8.314 × 298 × \([\overline{10} \cdot 9542]\)
= – 2.303 × 8.314 × 298 × [ – 9.0458]
= 51683 Jmol-1
= 51.683 kJmol-1
Ans. ΔG0 = 51.653 kJ mol-1

(17) Calculate ΔH, ΔS and ΔG for melting of 10 g ice at 0 °C and 1 atm. (ΔfusH0 = 6.02 kJ mol-1 for ice)
Solution :
Given : ΔfusH0 = 6.02 kJ mol-1 = 6.02 × 103 Jmol-1
Temperature = T = 273 + 0 = 273 K
Mass of ice = 10 g
Molar mass of H2O = 18 g mol-1
ΔH= ?, ΔS = ?, ΔG = ?
For melting of ice,
H2O(s) ⇌ H2O(l)
For 1 mol ice = 18 g ice ΔfusionH = 6.05 kJ
∴ For 10 g ice
ΔH = \(\frac{6.02 \times 10}{18}\)
= 3.344 kJ
ΔH = 3.344 kJ = 3.344 × 103 J
∴ ΔS = \(\frac{\Delta H}{T}=\frac{3.344 \times 10^{3}}{273}\) = 12.25 JK-1
ΔG = ΔH – TΔS
= 3.344 – 273 × 12.25 ×10-3 kJ
= 3.344 – 3.344
= 0
Since ΔG = 0, the system is at equilibrium.
Ans. ΔH = 3.344 kJ; ΔS = 12.25 JK-1; ΔG = 0

(18) Calculate Kp, ΔG0 for the reaction,
C(s) + H2O(g) ⇌ CO(g) + H2(g)
at 990 K if the equilibrium concentrations are as follows :
[H2O] = 1.10 mol dm--3,
[CO] = [H2] = 0.2 mol dm-3,
R = 0.08206 L atm K-1 mol-1.
Solution :
Given : [H2O] = 1.1 mol dm-3,
[CO] = 0.2 mol dm-3,
[H2] = 0.2 mol dm-3, T = 990 K,
R = 0.08206 L atm K-1 mol-1
KP = ? ΔG0 = ?
C(s) + H2O(g) ⇌ CO(g) + H2(g)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 64
KP = KC × (RT)Δn
= 0.03636 × (0.08206 × 990)
= 2.954 atm
ΔG0 = -2.303 RTlog10KP
= -2.303 × 8.314 × 990 × log10 2.954
= -2.303 × 8.314 × 990 × 0.4704
= -8917 J
= -8.917 kJ
Ans. KP = 2.954 atm; ΔG0 = -8.917 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 87.
Select and write the most appropriate answer from the given alternatives for each subquestion :

1. For an isochoric process, the change in
(a) pressure is zero
(b) volume is negative
(c) volume is zero
(d) temperature is zero
Answer:
(c) volume is zero

2. Which of the following is an extensive property ?
(a) Surface tension
(b) Refractive index
(c) Energy
(d) Temperature
Answer:
(c) Energy

3. Which of the following is an intensive property ?
(a) Enthalpy
(b) Weight
(c) Refractive index
(d) Volume
Answer:
(c) Refractive index

4. Which of the following pairs is an intensive property ?
(a) Density, viscosity
(b) Surface tension, mass
(c) Viscosity, internal energy
(d) Heat capacity, volume
Answer:
(a) Density, viscosity

5. The property which is not intensive is
(a) freezing point
(b) viscosity
(c) temperature
(d) free energy
Answer:
(d) free energy

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

6. Which of the following is not an extensive property ?
(a) molarity
(b) molar heat capacity
(c) mass
(d) volume
Answer:
(b) molar heat capacity

7. Which of the following is NOT a state function ?
(a) Work
(b) Enthalpy
(c) Temperature
(d) Pressure
Answer:
(a) Work

8. In an adiabatic process
(a) ΔT ≠ 0
(b) ΔU ≠ 0
(c) Q = 0
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

9. For an isothermal and reversible process
(a) P1V1 = P2V2
(b) P1V1 ≠ P2V2
(c) ΔV ≠ 0
(d) ΔH ≠ 0
Answer:
(a) P1V1 = P2V2

10. For the process to occur under adiabatic conditions, the correct condition is :
(a) ΔT = 0
(b) Δp = 0
(c) Q = 0
(d) W = 0
Answer:
(c) Q = 0

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

11. What is true for an adiabatic process ?
(a) ΔT = 0
(b) ΔU
(c) ΔH = ΔU
(d) Q = 0
Answer:
(d) Q = 0

12. ΔU = 0 is true for
(a) Adiabatic process
(b) Isothermal process
(c) Isobaric process
(d) Isochoric process
Answer:
(b) Isothermal process

13. When a gas expands in vacuum, the work done by the gas is
(a) maximum
(b) zero
(c) less than zero
(d) greater than zero
Answer:
(b) zero

14. When a sample of an ideal gas is allowed to expand at constant temperature against an atomospheric pressure,
(a) surroundings does work on the system
(b) ΔU = 0
(c) no heat exchange takes place between the system and surroundings
(d) internal energy of the system increases
Answer:
(b) ΔU = 0

15. In what reaction of the following work is done by the system on the surroundings ?
(a) Hg(l) → Hg(g)
(b) 3O2(g) → 2O3(g)
(c) H2(g) + Cl2(g) → 2HCl(g)
(d) N2(g) + 3H2(g) → 2NH3(g)
Answer:
(a) Hg(l) → Hg(g)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

16. A gas does 0.320 kJ of work on its surroundings and absorbs 120 J of heat from the surroundings. Hence, ΔU is
(a) 440 kJ
(b) 200 J
(c) 120.32 J
(d) -200J
Answer:
(d) -200J

17. For an isothermal and reversible expansion of 0.5 mol of an ideal gas, Wmax is -3.918 kJ. The value of ΔU is
(a) 3.918 kJ
(b) zero
(c) 1.959 kJ
(d) 3918 J
Answer:
(b) zero

18. The mathematical expression of the first law of thermodynamics for an adiabatic process is
(a) W = Q
(b) W = -ΔU
(c) W = +ΔU
(d ) W = -Q
Answer:
(c) W = +ΔU

19. A gaseous system absorbs 600 kJ of heat and performs the work of expansion equal to 130 kJ. The internal energy change is
(a) 730 kJ
(b) -470 kJ
(c) -730 kJ
(d) 470 kJ
Answer:
(d) 470 kJ

20. When a gas is compressed, the work obtained is 360 J while the heat transferred is 190 J. Hence the change in internal energy is
(a) -170 J
(b) 170 J
(c) 550 J
(d) -550 J
Answer:
(b) 170 J

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

21. For the reaction N2(g) + 3H2(g) = 2NH3(g); Which of the following is valid ?
(a) ΔH = ΔU
(b) ΔH < ΔU
(c) ΔH > ΔU
(d) ΔH = 2ΔH
Answer:
(b) ΔH < ΔU

22. For which reaction ΔH = ΔU ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 65
Answer:
(b) \(\mathrm{C}_{6} \mathrm{H}_{12} \mathrm{O}_{6(\mathrm{~s})}+6 \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \rightarrow 6 \mathrm{CO}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+6 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{l})}\)

23. For the following reaction at 298 K
H2(g) + \(\frac {1}{8}\)O2(g) = H2O(l)
Which of the following alternative is correct ?
(a) ΔH = ΔU
(b) ΔH > ΔU
(c) ΔH < ΔU
(d) ΔH = 1.5 ΔU
Answer:
(c) ΔH < ΔU

24. The heat of combustion of carbon is 394 kJ mol-1. The heat evolved in combustion of 6.023 × 1021 atoms of carbon is
(a) 3940 kJ
(b) 3940.0 kJ
(c) 3.94 kJ
(d) 0.394 kJ
Answer:
(c) 3.94 kJ

25. Which of the reactions defines the heat of formation ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 66
Answer:
(d) \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{H}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{Cl}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \rightarrow \mathrm{HCl}_{(\mathrm{g})}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

26. ΔUo of combustion of methane is -X kJ mol-1. The value of ΔH0 is
(a) = ΔUo
(b) > ΔUo
(c) < ΔUo
(d) =0
Answer:
(c) < ΔUo

27. The enthalpy of combustion of 5(rhomic)is -297.4 kJ mol-1. The amount of sulphur required to produce 29.74 kJ of heat is
(a) 32 × 10-2 kg
(b) 3.2 × 10-3 kg
(c) 3.2 × 10-2 kg
(d) 6.4 × 10-3 kg
Answer:
(b) 3.2 × 10-3 kg

28. The heat of formation of SO2(g) and SO3(g) are -269 kJ mol-1 and -395 kJ mol-1 respectively the value of ΔH for the reaction
SO2(g) + \(\frac {1}{2}\)O2(g) → SO3(g) is
(a) -664 kJ mol-1
(b) -126 kJ mol-1
(c) 63 kJ mol-1
(d) 126 kJ mol-1
Answer:
(b) -126 kJ mol-1

29. The enthalpy of combustion of methane, graphite and dihydrogen at 298 K are, -890.3 kJ mol-1, -393.5 kJ mol-1 and -285.8 kJ mol-1 respectively. Enthalpy of formation of CH4(g) will be
(a) – 74.8 kJ mol-1
(b) – 52.27 kJ mol-1
(c) + 74.8 kJ mol-1
(d) + 52.26 kJ mol-1
Answer:
(a) – 74.8 kJ mol-1

30. The enthalpies of formation of N2O(g) and NO(g) are 82 kJ mol-1 and 90 kJ mol-1 respectively. Then enthalpy of a reaction 2N2O(g) + O2(g) → 4NO(g) is …………
(a) 8 kJ
(b) -16 kJ
(c) 88 kJ
(d) 196 kJ
Answer:
(d) 196 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

31. The heat of combustion of naphthalene (C10H8) to CO2 gas and water vapour at 298 K and at constant pressure is -5.1567 × 106 J. The heat of combustion at constant volume at 298 K is (R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1)
(a) -5.1567 × 106 J
(b) -5.6161 × 106 J
(c) -5.1616 × 106 J
(d) -5.7161 × 106 J
Answer:
(c) -5.1616 × 106 J

32. Given the reaction,
2NH3(g) → N2(g) + 3H2(g) ΔH = 92.6 kJ
The enthalpy of formation of NH3 is
(a) -92.6 kJ
(b) 92.6 kJ mol-1
(c) -46.3 kJmol-1
(d) -185.2 kJmol-1
Answer:
(c) -46.3 kJmol-1

33. Calculate the heat of reaction at 298 K for the reaction C2H4(g) + H2(g) = C2H6(g)
Given that the heats of combustion of ethylene, hydrogen and ethane are 337.0, 68.4 and 373.0 kcal respectively.
(a) 23.4 kcal
(b) 62.2 kcal
(c) 32.4 kcal
(d) 34.2 kcal
Answer:
(c) 32.4 kcal

34. Entropy change for a process is given by,
(a) Qrev × T
(b) Qrev/T
(c) \(\frac{T}{Q_{\text {rev }}}\)
(d) ΔHrev × T
Answer:
(b) Qrev/T

35. For a spontaneous process, total entropy change for a system and its surroundings is
(a) ΔStotal < 0
(b) ΔStotal = 0
(c) ΔStotal > 0
(d) ΔStotal ≤ 0
Answer:
(c) ΔStotal > 0

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

36. For a system at equilibrium,
(a) ΔStotal = 0
(b) ΔStotal > 0
(c) ΔStotal < 0
(d) ΔStotal ≥ 0
Answer:
(a) ΔStotal = 0

37. If the enthalpy of vaporisation of water at 100°C is 186.5 J·mol-1, the entropy of vaporization will be-
(a) 4.0 J·K-1 mol-1
(b) 3.0 J·K-1 mol-1
(c) 1.5 J·K-1 mol-1
(d) 0.5 J·K-1 mol-1
Answer:
(d) 0.5 J·K-1 mol-1

38. Heat of fusion of ice is 6.02kJmol-1 at 0 °C. If 100 g water is frozen at 0 °C, entropy change will be
(a) -0.1225 JK-1
(b) 310.6 JK-1
(c) -122.6 JK-1
(d) 92.8 JK-1
Answer:
(c) -122.6 JK-1

39. If for a reaction ΔH is negative and ΔS is positive then the reaction is
(a) spontaneous at all temperatures
(b) non-spontaneous at all temperatures
(c) spontaneous only at high temperatures
(d) spontaneous only at low temperature
Answer:
(a) spontaneous at all temperatures

40. The relationship between ΔGo of a reaction and its equilibrium constant is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 67
Answer:
(c) \(\frac{R T \ln K}{\Delta G^{0}}=-1\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

41. Which of the following has highest entropy?
(a) Al(s)
(b) CaCO3(s)
(c) H2O(l)
(d) CO2(g)
Answer:
(d) CO2(g)

42. The entropy change for the formation of 3.5 mol NO(g) from the following data will be,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 68
Answer:
(b) 42.875 JK-1

43. Gibbs free energy change at equilibrium is
(a) ΔG = 0
(b) ΔG > 0
(c) ΔG < 0
(d) ΔG ≤ 0
Answer:
(a) ΔG = 0

44. For spontaneous process,
(a) ΔG = 0
(b) ΔG > 0
(c) ΔG < 0
(d) ΔG ≤ 0
Answer:
(c) ΔG < 0

45. A substance which shows highest entropy is
(a) SrCO3(S)
(b) Cu(S)
(c) NaC(aq)
(d) Cl2(g)
Answer:
(d) Cl2(g)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

46. For which of the following reactions ΔS is negative ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics 69
Answer:
(a) \(\mathrm{Mg}_{(s)}+\mathrm{Cl}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \rightarrow \mathrm{MgCl}_{2(s)}\)

47. For a reaction, at 300K enthalpy is 138 kJ and entropy change is 115 JK-1. Hence the free energy change of the reaction is
(a) 130.5 kJ
(b) 103.5 kJ
(c) 82.8 kJ
(d) – 60.5 kJ
Answer:
(b) 103.5 kJ

48. Bond enthalpies of H2-1, I2(g) and HI are 436, 151 and 298 kJ mol-1 respectively. Hence enthalpy of formation of HI(g) is
(a) -9 kJmol-1
(b) -4.5kJmol-1
(c) 4.5 kJ mol-1
(d) 9 kJ mol-1
Answer:
(b) -4.5kJmol-1

49. The average bond energy of C-H bond is 410 kJmol-1. The enthalpy change of atomisation of 3.2 g CH4(g) is
(a) 1312 kJ
(b) 29.8 kJ
(c) 328 kJ
(d) 120 kJ
Answer:
(c) 328 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Thermodynamics

50. For a chemical reaction ΔS = -0.035 kJ/K and ΔH = -20 kJ. At what temperature does the reaction turn non-spontaneous ?
(a) 5.14 K
(b) 57.14 K
(c) 571.4 K
(d) 5714.0 K
Answer:
(c) 571.4 K

51. For a certain reaction, ΔH = -50 kJ and ΔS = -80 JK-1, at what temperature does the reaction turn from spontaneous to non-spontaneous.
(a) 6.25 K
(b) 62.5 K
(c) 625 K
(d) 6250 K
Answer:
(c) 625 K

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 6 Dissolution of Partnership Firm

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Commerce Book Keeping & Accountancy Important Questions Chapter 6 Dissolution of Partnership Firm Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Commerce BK Important Questions Chapter 6 Dissolution of Partnership Firm

1. Objective Questions:

A. Select the most appropriate answer from the alternatives given below and rewrite the sentences.

Question 1.
_____________ means winding up of partnership firm.
(a) Dissolution
(b) Formation
(c) Retirement
(d) Death
Answer:
(a) Dissolution

Question 2.
When a partner takes over a liability, his Capital Account is _____________
(a) debited
(b) credited
(c) deducted
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) credited

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 6 Dissolution of Partnership Firm

Question 3.
Dissolution expenses are debited to the _____________ Account.
(a) Profit and Loss
(b) Trading
(c) Capital
(d) Realisation
Answer:
(d) Realisation

Question 4.
The debit balance on Realisation A/c indicates _____________
(a) profit
(b) loss
(c) gain
(d) deficiency
Answer:
(b) loss

Question 5.
The partner who is unable to pay his liabilities is called an _____________ partner.
(a) solvent
(b) working
(c) insolvent
(d) sleeping
Answer:
(c) insolvent

Question 6.
Debit balance of insolvent Partner’s Capital Account is known as _____________
(a) capital deficiency
(b) capital surplus
(c) profit
(d) loss
Answer:
(a) capital deficiency

B. Give the word/term/phrase which can substitute each of the following statements.

Question 1.
The account records all realisable assets and external liabilities of the firm on dissolution.
Answer:
Realisation Account

Question 2.
The partner who bears capital deficiency of an insolvent partner.
OR
The person who bears insolvency loss of an insolvent partner.
Answer:
Solvent Partner

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 6 Dissolution of Partnership Firm

Question 3.
Account to which the ultimate unpaid balances on the outside liability accounts are transferred on dissolution.
Answer:
Deficiency Account

C. State whether the following statements are True or False with reasons.

Question 1.
The cash and bank balances are not transferred to the Realisation A/c.
Answer:
This statement is True.
Cash or bank balance are liquid assets. They cannot be sold or realised. The cash and/or bank balances are recorded in the Cash and/or Bank Account. All cash and/or bank transactions, at the time of Realisation, are recorded in the Cash and Bank Accounts. Therefore, Cash and Bank balances are not transferred to Realisation Account.

Question 2.
On dissolution, sundry debtors are transferred to Realisation A/c at their net figure.
Answer:
This statement is False.
On dissolution, sundry debtors are transferred to Realisation A/c at their Gross value book value and not at their net figure. R.D.D. which is deducted from debtors is not an asset and therefore R.D.D. is transferred to the credit side of Realisation A/c and the remaining debtors are transferred to the debit side of Realisation A/c.

Question 3.
On dissolution of the firm, the partner’s wife loan is transferred to Realisation A/c.
Answer:
This statement is True.
A loan taken from the partner’s wife is an external liability and it is a third party’s liability. So, the partner’s wife’s loan is transferred to Realisation A/c at the time of dissolution of the firm.

Question 4.
A liability that is not shown in the Balance Sheet on the date of dissolution cannot be repaid.
Answer:
This statement is False.
Liability of the firm which is not yet recorded in the book of accounts is called unrecorded liability. At the time of dissolution unrecorded liability is supposed to be paid though it is not shown in the Balance Sheet.

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 6 Dissolution of Partnership Firm

Question 5.
A debit balance of Realisation A/c indicates profit on realisation.
Answer:
This statement is False.
A debit balance of Realisation A/c means payment is more than the receipt. When payments exceed receipts there is a loss. Hence, debit balance on realisation account indicates loss on realisation and not profit.

D. Answer in one sentence only.

Question 1.
What is Realisation Account?
Answer:
An account that is opened by the firm at the time of its dissolution to determine profit or loss on realisation of assets and payment of liabilities is known as Realisation Account.

Question 2.
Why is the Realisation Account opened?
Answer:
Realisation Account is opened to find out profit or loss made on the sale of assets and discharge of liabilities of the partnership firm.

Question 3.
What are realisation or dissolution expenses?
Answer:
The expenses incurred by the firm to realise the assets and to liquidate the liabilities of the firm on its dissolution are called realisation or dissolution expenses.

Solved Problem

Question 1.
Asha, Bela, and Nisha were partners sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 3 : 2 : 1. On 31st March 2020 their Balance Sheet was as follows:
Balance Sheet as of 31st March 2020
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 6 Dissolution of Partnership Firm Q1
The firm was dissolved on 31st March 2020 and the assets realised as follows:
1. Joint Life Policy was taken over by Asha at ₹ 10,000.
2. Stock realised: ₹ 36,000, Debtors realised: ₹ 29,000, Machinery was sold for ₹ 72,000.
3. Liabilities were paid in full. In addition, one bill for ₹ 700 under discount was dishonoured and had to be taken up by the firm.
4. There were no realisation expenses.
Give the Journal entries and prepare necessary Ledger Accounts to close the books of the firm.
Solution:
In the Journal of Partnership Firm
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 6 Dissolution of Partnership Firm Q1.1
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 6 Dissolution of Partnership Firm Q1.2
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 6 Dissolution of Partnership Firm Q1.3
Ledger Accounts:
In the books of Partnership Firm
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 6 Dissolution of Partnership Firm Q1.4
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 6 Dissolution of Partnership Firm Q1.5
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 6 Dissolution of Partnership Firm Q1.6

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Accounts – Issue of Shares

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Commerce Book Keeping & Accountancy Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Accounts – Issue of Shares Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Commerce BK Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Accounts – Issue of Shares

1. Objective Questions:

A. Select the appropriate answer from the alternative given below and rewrite the sentence.

Question 1.
Nominal value of shares allotted to the public is called ____________ capital.
(a) authorised
(b) reserve
(c) paid-up
(d) subscribed
Answer:
(d) subscribed

Question 2.
Paid-up value of all shares allotted is called ____________ capital.
(a) uncalled
(b) issued
(c) subscribed
(d) nominal
Answer:
(c) subscribed

Question 3.
If the articles are silent regarding interest on Calls-in-Arrears, the minimum rate of interest to be charged is ____________
(a) 5% p.a.
(b) 6% p.a.
(c) 8% p.a.
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) 5% p.a.

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Accounts - Issue of Shares

Question 4.
If the articles are silent regarding interest on Calls-in-Advance, the minimum rate of interest to be charged is ____________ p.a.
(a) 5%
(b) 6%
(c) 8%
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) 6%

Question 5.
____________ is deducted from the share capital to know paid-up value of shares.
(a) Calls-in-Advance
(b) Calls-in-Arrears
(c) Forfeited Shares
(d) Discount on Issue
Answer:
(b) Calls-in-Arrears

Question 6.
The excess price received over the par value of shares should be ____________ to Securities Premium A/c.
(a) debited
(b) credited
(c) adjusted
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) credited

Question 7.
The capital with which a company is registered is called ____________
(a) Issued Capital
(b) Subscribed Capital
(c) Authorised Capital
(d) Called-up Capital
Answer:
(c) Authorised Capital

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Accounts - Issue of Shares

Question 8.
If a share of ₹ 100 is issued at ₹ 90, it is said to be issued ____________
(a) at par
(b) at a discount
(c) at a premium
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) at a discount

Question 9.
If a share of ₹ 100 is issued at ₹ 100, it is said to be issued ____________
(a) at par
(b) at premium
(c) at discount
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) at par

Question 10.
If a share of ₹ 100 is issued at ₹ 110, it is said to be issued ____________
(a) at par
(b) at a premium
(c) at a discount
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) at a premium

B. Give one word/term/phrase for each of the following statements.

Question 1.
The capital is not disclosed in the Balance Sheet.
Answer:
Reserve capital

Question 2.
Preference share on which arrears of dividend accumulate.
Answer:
Cumulative preference shares

Question 3.
A preference share having the right of conversion into equity.
Answer:
Convertible preference shares

Question 4.
The account to which excess amount on Share Forfeited A/c is transferred.
Answer:
Capital Reserve Account

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Accounts - Issue of Shares

Question 5.
The maximum amount beyond which a company is not allowed to raise its share capital.
Answer:
Authorised/Nominal capital

Question 6.
Deduction made from share capital to find out paid-up capital.
Answer:
Calls-in-Arrears

Question 7.
The capital on which dividend is paid.
Answer:
Paid-up share capital

Question 8.
Shares having voting rights.
Answer:
Equity shares

Question 9.
Part of the authorised capital is offered by the company to the public to subscribe for.
Answer:
Issued capital

Question 10.
Part of the uncalled capital is called up at the time of winding up of the company.
Answer:
Reserve capital

Question 11.
Shares that do not preference shares.
Answer:
Equity shares

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Accounts - Issue of Shares

Question 12.
Shares enjoy preferential rights in the matter of payment of dividends and repayment of capital.
Answer:
Preference shares

Question 13.
The direct sale of shares by a company to a limited number of sophisticated investors.
Answer:
Private placement of shares

Question 14.
A demand made by the company after allotment of shares to pay the remaining amount of shares.
Answer:
Call on share

C. State true or false with reasons.

Question 1.
In private placement, shares are issued to the public through the prospectus.
Answer:
This statement is False.
‘Private placement’ means a direct private offering of the company’s securities by a company to a selected group of sophisticated investors. In private placement, shares are not issued to the public through the prospectus.

Question 2.
In public issues whole amount of share, capital is called at once.
Answer:
This statement is False.
In public issues whole amount of share, capital is not called at once but called in several installments such as application money, allotment money and calls money by following SEBI guidelines.

Question 3.
Shares are always issued at par.
Answer:
This statement is False.
Depends on the company’s position in the market, the company can issue shares at par or at a premium, or a discount.

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Accounts - Issue of Shares

Question 4.
Share forfeited balance is transferred to Capital Reserve Account.
Answer:
This statement is True.
Share forfeited balance is a profit earned by the company at the time of issuing shares, which is not recurring in nature. It is also known as capital profit. Therefore it is to be transferred to Capital Reserve Account.

Question 5.
Shares are issued for cash only.
Answer:
This statement is False.
The company issues shares for cash and also for consideration other than cash. Shares are issued by the company to the vendor for the purchase of land, machinery, etc. In such cases, money is not paid, but shares are issued by the company for value received.

Question 6.
Preference shares can be redeemed after a certain period of time.
Answer:
This statement is True.
When a provision of Articles of Association permits, Preference shares can be redeemed after a certain period of time with other preferential rights like a preference for the payment of dividend at a predetermined fixed rate and for repayment of capital.

Question 7.
Authorised capital of a company is always equal to its issued capital.
Answer:
This statement is False.
Authorized capital means the maximum limit up to which a company is authorised to raise share capital while issued capital means capital that is issued or offered for subscription to the public. Issued capital is a part of authorised capital. So, authorised capital and issued capital can’t be equal for a company.

D. State whether you agree or disagree with the following statements.

Question 1.
Equity shareholders enjoy preferential rights.
Answer:
Disagree

Question 2.
An equity share is a guarantee of a fixed rate of dividend.
Answer:
Disagree

Question 3.
The private placement method saves time and cost.
Answer:
Agree

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Accounts - Issue of Shares

Question 4.
Shares can be issued at par or at a discount or a premium.
Answer:
Agree

Question 5.
A public company forfeits shares on nonpayment of the final call only.
Answer:
Disagree

Question 6.
Forfeited shares are reissued at par.
Answer:
Disagree

Question 7.
Calls-in-Arrears are also called unpaid calls.
Answer:
Agree

Question 8.
The balance of the Calls-in-Advance account is shown in the Balance Sheet under the head ‘Share Capital’.
Answer:
Agree

Question 9.
Sweat shares can be issued for consideration other than cash.
Answer:
Agree

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Accounts - Issue of Shares

Question 10.
Equity shares are issued to the public through the prospectus.
Answer:
Agree

E. Answer in one sentence only.

Question 1.
What is Owned Capital?
Answer:
The capital collected through the issue of shares is known as Owned Capital.

Question 2.
State the types of shares.
Answer:
There are two types of shares viz.

  • Equity or Ordinary Shares
  • Preference Shares

Question 3.
What is Subscribed Capital?
Answer:
Subscribed Capital is a part of the issued capital which the company has actually received by way of application from the public and also allotted by the company.

Question 4.
What is Under Subscription?
Answer:
When a company received applications for shares less than those actually offered or issued to the public, the issue is said to be undersubscribed.

Question 5.
State the meaning of issued capital.
Answer:
The part of the portion of authorised capital which is issued or offered for subscription to the public is called issued capital.

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Accounts - Issue of Shares

Question 6.
Define Share.
Answer:
The owned capital of a company when divided into a large number of parts having equal face value, each such part is called a ‘Share’.

Question 7.
What is Equity Share?
Answer:
An equity share is one that has no special preferential right to dividend or repayment of capital.

Question 8.
Write the meaning of Equity Share Capital.
Answer:
The capital raised by the company through the issue of equity shares is called equity share capital.

Question 9.
What is meant by Convertible Preference Share?
Answer:
Preference share which can be converted into equity share after a certain period is called Convertible Preference Share.

Question 10.
Which preference shares are called Cumulative Preference Shares?
Answer:
Preference shares in which unpaid dividend in a year gets accumulated and added in the dividend of the next year are called Cumulative Preference Shares.

Question 11.
What is Allotment qf Shares?
Answer:
Allotment of shares means after considering the demand of the applicants, accepting application forms up to certain fixed numbers as per the resolution passed in the meeting of the board of directors.

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Accounts - Issue of Shares

Question 12.
What is meant by a Discount on the Issue of Shares?
Answer:
When shareholders are supposed to pay a price lower than the face value of the shares, then the shares are said to be issued at discount.

Question 13.
Give the full form of SEBI.
Answer:
The full form of SEBI is the Securities Exchange Board of India.

Question 14.
Define Calls-in-Advance.
Answer:
Calls-in-Advance is that amount paid by the shareholders in excess of the call amount due from them. .

Question 15.
Define Securities Premium Account.
Answer:
In case of issue of shares at a premium, a separate account into which premium amount is deposited is called ‘Securities Premium Account’.

Question 16.
When are shares said to be issued at par?
Answer:
Shares are said to be issued at par when the company issues shares at their face value.

F. Complete the following sentences.

Question 1.
The portion of Subscribed capital which has not yet been called-up is ____________
Answer:
Uncalled capital

Question 2.
The capital which is not disclosed in the Balance Sheet is known as ____________
Answer:
Reserve capital

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Accounts - Issue of Shares

Question 3.
____________ shares have voting right.
Answer:
Equity

Question 4.
The liability of shareholder of public limited company is ____________
Answer:
limited

Question 5.
____________ shares are issued to public through prospectus.
Answer:
Equity

Question 6.
In public issue whole amount of share capital is called in ____________
Answer:
instalments

Question 7.
A public company ____________ share on non-payment of call money.
Answer:
forfeits

Question 8.
Share forfeited balance is transferred to ____________ Account.
Answer:
Capital Reserve

Question 9.
Preference shares can be ____________ after certain period of time.
Answer:
redeemed

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Accounts - Issue of Shares

Question 10.
____________ shares have a right to participate in decision making process.
Answer:
Equity

Solved Problems

Question 1.
Kandla Co. Ltd. made an issue of 80,000 equity shares of ₹ 20 each payable as follows:
Application: ₹ 5 per share
Allotment: ₹ 10 per share
First Call: ₹ 3 per share
Second and Final Call: ₹ 2 per share
The company received applications for 90,000 shares of which applications for 10,000 shares were rejected and money refunded. All the shareholders paid up to the second call except Sachin, the allottee of 4,000 Shares, who failed to pay a final call.
Pass Journal Entries for the above transaction in the books of Kandla Co. Ltd.
Solution:
Journal Entries in the books of KANDLA CO. LTD.
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Accounts - Issue of Shares Q1
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Accounts - Issue of Shares Q1.1

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Accounts - Issue of Shares

Question 2.
Vraj Ltd. issued 20,000 equity shares of ₹ 20 each, payable as follows:
On Application: ₹ 4
On Allotment: ₹ 6
On First Call: ₹ 6
On Second Call: ₹ 4
The company received applications for 25,000 equity shares. Allotment of shares was made on a pro-rata basis. Share allotment and calls were made and as also received except Raja holding 500 shares failed to pay both the calls. His shares were forfeited after the second call.
Record the above transactions in the books of Vraj Ltd.
Solution:
Journal Entries in the books of VRAJ LIMITED
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Accounts - Issue of Shares Q2
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Accounts - Issue of Shares Q2.1

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Reconstitution of Partnership (Admission of Partner)

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Commerce Book Keeping & Accountancy Important Questions Chapter 3 Reconstitution of Partnership (Admission of Partner) Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Commerce BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Reconstitution of Partnership (Admission of Partner)

1. Objetive type questions.

A. Select appropriate alternatives from those given below and rewrite the sentences.

Question 1.
If an asset is depreciated, Revalutation Account is ______________
(a) debited
(b) credited
(c) debited and credited
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) debited

Question 2.
______________ Account is debited when unrecorded liability is brought into business.
(a) Liability
(b) Revaluation
(c) Capital
(d) Current
Answer:
(b) Revaluation

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Reconstitution of Partnership (Admission of Partner)

Question 3.
The proportion in which old partners make a sacrifice is called ______________ Ratio.
(a) Capital
(b) Gaining
(c) Sacrifice
(d) New
Answer:
(c) Sacrifice

Question 4.
The ______________ Ratio is useful for making adjustment for goodwill among the old partners.
(a) New
(b) Sacrifice
(c) Old
(d) Profit and Loss
Answer:
(b) Sacrifice

Question 5.
Krishna and Balram, who are equal partners, admit Arjun into a partnership for 1/4th share, their new profit sharing ratio will be ______________
(a) 3 : 3 : 1
(b) equal
(c) 3 : 3 : 2
(d) 2 : 2 : 1
Answer:
(c) 3 : 3 : 2

Question 6.
In case of admission of a partner, the profit or loss on revaluation of assets and liabilities is shared by ______________ partners.
(a) all
(b) old
(c) new
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) old

Question 7.
When the reserve funds is distributed to old partners, the ______________ Account is debited.
(a) Capital
(b) Current
(c) Reserve Fund
(d) Profit and Loss
Answer:
(c) Reserve Fund

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Reconstitution of Partnership (Admission of Partner)

Question 8.
Goodwill brought in by a new partner is shared by the old partners in their ______________ Ratio.
(a) New
(b) Gain
(c) Sacrifice
(d) Balance of 1
Answer:
(c) Sacrifice

Question 9.
______________ Ratio is a ratio surrendered by old partners in favour of a new partner.
(a) Sacrifice
(b) Gain
(c) New
(d) Old
Answer:
(a) Sacrifice

Question 10.
When goodwill is written off, partners’ capital accounts are ______________
(a) credited
(b) debited
(c) increase
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) debited

Question 11.
X and Y are equal partners, admit Z into the partnership. If Z’s share is 1/5th, the new profit sharing ratio of the partners will be ______________
(a) 3 : 2 : 1
(b) 4 : 2 : 1
(c) 3 : 3 : 2
(d) 2 : 2 : 1
Answer:
(d) 2 : 2 : 1

Question 12.
A and B who are equal partners admit C into the partnership for 1/7th share. The new profit sharing ratio of the partners will be ______________
(a) 3 : 3 : 2
(b) 3 : 3 : 1
(c) 1 : 2 : 3
(d) 4 : 2 : 1
Answer:
(b) 3 : 3 : 1

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Reconstitution of Partnership (Admission of Partner)

Question 13.
If prepaid expenses are to be recorded in the books of account, they should be shown on the ______________ side of Revaluation A/c.
(a) debit
(b) credit
(c) liabilities
(d) assets
Answer:
(b) credit

Question 14.
If an asset is appreciated, Revaluation Account is ______________
(a) debited
(b) credited
(c) depreciated
(d) neutralised
Answer:
(b) credited

B. Write a word/phrase/term which can substitute each of the following statements.

Question 1.
The account shows the change in the values of assets.
Answer:
Revaluation Account or Profit and Loss Adjustment Account

Question 2.
The credit balance of the Revaluation Account.
Answer:
Profit on Revaluation Account

Question 3.
Excess of actual capital over proportionate capital.
Answer:
Surplus Capital

Question 4.
Name of an intangible asset having a value.
Answer:
Goodwill

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Reconstitution of Partnership (Admission of Partner)

Question 5.
The account is debited when the new partner brings cash for his share of goodwill.
Answer:
Cash/Bank Account

Question 6.
The account is credited when goodwill is withdrawn by old partners.
Answer:
Cash/Bank Account

Question 7.
Profit and Loss Account appearing on the Asset side of a balance sheet.
Answer:
Undistributed Loss

Question 8.
The account is opened to record the gains and losses on revaluation.
Answer:
Profit and Loss Adjustment Account

Question 9.
Change in the relationship between the partners.
Answer:
Reconstitution of a Partnership

Question 10.
An account is credited when a new partner brings cash for his share of goodwill.
Answer:
Goodwill A/c

Question 11.
A fund created by the partnership firm out of profit as a precautionary measure.
Answer:
General Reserve/Reserve Fund

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Reconstitution of Partnership (Admission of Partner)

Question 12.
The ratio in which the old partners share the amount brought in by the new partner towards goodwill.
Answer:
Sacrifice Ratio

Question 13.
The ratio in which the Goodwill A/c may be written off after admission of a partner.
Answer:
New Profit and Loss Ratio

Question 14.
An account was opened for the Revaluation of Assets and Liabilities.
Answer:
Profit and Loss Adjustment A/c or Revaluation A/c

Question 15.
Debit balance of Revaluation Account.
Answer:
Loss on revaluation of assets and liabilities

Question 16.
An amount by which the actual capital of a partner exceeds his Proportionate capital.
Answer:
Surplus capital/Excess capital

Question 17.
An amount by which the proportionate capital of a partner exceeds his actual capital.
Answer:
Deficit or Deficiency in capital

C. State True or False with reasons.

Question 1.
The credit balance of the Revaluation Account means a loss on revaluation of assets and liabilities.
Answer:
This statement is False.
The credit balance of the Revaluation Account means profit on revaluation of assets and liabilities. Revaluation A/c is nominal A/c. On the credit side of this A/c, all incomes and gains are recorded. The credit balance means the credit amount is more than the debt amount. Hence, the credit balance of the Revaluation Account is profit on the revaluation of assets and liabilities.

Question 2.
If the Goodwill Account is raised up, Goodwill Account is debited.
Answer:
This statement is True.
As per the rules of Accountancy when the value of an asset increases or raises, its account is debited in the books of account. Goodwill is an Asset.

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Reconstitution of Partnership (Admission of Partner)

Question 3.
On admission of a partner, the amount of goodwill brought in cash is credited to Goodwill Account.
Answer:
This statement is True.
When newly admitted partner brought cash for goodwill, Cash/Bank Account is debited as it comes in and Goodwill Account is credited and afterward, Goodwill Account will be debited when benefits of Goodwill are transferred to old partners’ Capital Accounts.

Question 4.
The new partner is entitled to receive a share in the general reserve of the existing partnership firm.
Answer:
This statement is False.
General reserve is the amount kept aside from the part and current profit earned by the business for future business development purposes. Hence on this amount, the new partner has no right. Therefore new partner is not entitled to receive a share in general reserve.

Question 5.
On admission of a partner, the profit or loss on revaluation is distributed among the old partners.
Answer:
This statement is True.
At the time of admission of a new partner, existing assets and liabilities of the business are to be revalued and whatever the profit or loss is there it is to be distributed among old partners only.

Question 6.
The goodwill brought in by a new partner is shared by the old partner.
Answer:
This statement is True.
The reputation of business measured in terms of money is known as goodwill and on this, old partners have right so when goodwill is brought in by a new partner in the business, it is shared by the old partner.

Question 7.
The new ratio minus the old ratio is equal to the gain ratio.
Answer:
This statement is True.
At the time of Retirement or Death of a partner, existing partners may have some gain, which is found out by the Gain ratio = New ratio – Old ratio.

Question 8.
When a partner takes away any asset from the business, his account will be debited.
Answer:
This statement is True.
When a partner takes away any asset from the business, Asset Account will be credited and the Partner’s Account will be debited as it decreases the partner’s capital.

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Reconstitution of Partnership (Admission of Partner)

Question 9.
Average profit means profit that is earned over and above the normal profit.
Answer:
This statement is False.
When a firm earns extra profit over and above the normal profit because of the reputation of the firm then it is known as a super profit and not average profit.

D. Answer in one sentence.

Question 1.
What is meant by the admission of a partner?
Answer:
A process in which a new person is taken into the partnership firm as a partner is called admission of a partner.

Question 2.
In what proportion is general reserve distributed among the old partners?
Answer:
On admission of a new partner, the amount of general reserve is distributed among the old partners in their old profit sharing ratio.

Question 3.
How is the sacrifice ratio calculated?
Answer:
The sacrifice ratio is calculated by deducting the new ratio of the partner from his old ratio.
Formula:
Sacrifice ratio = Old ratio – New ratio.

Question 4.
What does credit balance on Profit and Loss Adjustment A/c or Revaluation A/c show?
Answer:
A credit balance on Profit and Loss Adjustment A/c or Revaluation A/c shows a profit on revaluation of assets and liabilities.

Question 5.
In which ratio do the old partners share the profit or loss made on revaluation of assets and liabilities of the firm?
Answer:
The profit or loss made on revaluation of assets and liabilities of the firm is shared by old partners in their old profit sharing ratio.

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Reconstitution of Partnership (Admission of Partner)

Question 6.
What is General Reserve or Reserve Fund?
Answer:
A fund created by keeping aside a part of profit every year to provide timely finance for unforeseen contingencies like fire, flood, earthquake, change in Government policy, etc. is called General Reserve or Reserve Fund.

Question 7.
Who shares the amount of general reserve on the admission of a new partner?
Answer:
On admission of a new partner, the amount of general reserve is shared by old partners only.

Question 8.
On what single factor does the valuation of goodwill primarily depend?
Answer:
The most important factor of the valuation of goodwill is the profit earning capacity of the firm.

Solved Problems

Question 1.
The Balance Sheet of Anal and Arvind who shared the profits in the ratio of 2 : 1 is as under:
Balance Sheet as of 31st March 2019
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Reconstitution of Partnership (Admission of Partner) Q1
On 1st April 2019 Zalak was admitted as 1/4th partner on the following terms:
1. She brings equipment of ₹ 40,000 as her capital.
2. Firm’s goodwill is valued at ₹ 72,000 and Zalak agreed to bring her share in the firm’s goodwill by cheque.
3. R.D.D. should be maintained at 7.5% on debtors.
4. Increase the value of livestock by ₹ 1,300 and write off loose tools by 20%.
5. Outstanding rent paid ₹ 4,520 in full settlement.
Pass necessary journal entries to record the above scheme of admission.
Solution:
Journal entries in the books of partnership firm
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Reconstitution of Partnership (Admission of Partner) Q1.1
Working Notes:
1. To find out Profit or Loss made on revaluation of assets and liabilities, Profit and Loss Adjustment A/c is prepared:
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Reconstitution of Partnership (Admission of Partner) Q1.2
2. Discount earned on payment of outstanding Rent = 5,000 – 4,520 = ₹ 800.
It is credited to Profit and Loss-Adjustment A/c.

3. Increase in RDD = New RDD – Old RDD
= 7.5% on 24,000 – 1,000.
= 1,800 – 1,000
= ₹ 800.
It is debited to Profit and Loss-Adjustment A/c

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Reconstitution of Partnership (Admission of Partner)

Question 2.
Mahesh and Kamlesh are partners in a business sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 2 : 1 respectively. Their Balance Sheet as of 31st March 2019 is as follows:
Balance Sheet as of 31st March 2019
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Reconstitution of Partnership (Admission of Partner) Q2
They admitted Kiran on 1st April 2019 as a partner on the following terms:
1. Kiran will bring ₹ 60,000 as his capital for 1/4th share in future profit and ₹ 24,000 as goodwill which will be withdrawn by old partners.
2. Stock and Machinery are to be depreciated by 10%.
3. R.D.D. is to be maintained at 5% on debtors.
4. Building is to be appreciated by 20% and Furniture is revalued at ₹ 20,000.
Prepare Profit and Loss Adjustment Account, Partners’ Capital Accounts, and Balance Sheet of the new firm.
Solution:
In the books of partnership firm
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Reconstitution of Partnership (Admission of Partner) Q2.1
Balance Sheet as of 1st April 2019
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Reconstitution of Partnership (Admission of Partner) Q2.2
Working Notes:
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Reconstitution of Partnership (Admission of Partner) Q2.3

Question 3.
Akash and Aman are partners in firm sharing profits and losses in the ratio 3 : 2. Their Balance Sheet as of 31st March 2019 was as follows:
Balance Sheet as of 31st March 2019
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Reconstitution of Partnership (Admission of Partner) Q3
They agreed to admit Raj in their partnership on 1st April 2019, on the following terms:
1. Raj should bring ₹ 2,250, as his share of goodwill in the firm and ₹ 3,000 as his capital.
2. Reserve for doubtful debts is to be provided @ 5% on debtors.
3. Land and building are to be depreciated at 10% p.a.
4. Plant and Machinery is to be depreciated @ 5% and stock is to be depreciated @ 10% p.a.
5. The new profit sharing, the ratio will be 2 : 1 : 1.
Prepare:
(a) Revaluation Account
(b) Partners’ Capital Accounts
(c) New Balance Sheet of the firm.
Solution:
In the books of Partnership Firm
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Reconstitution of Partnership (Admission of Partner) Q3.1
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Reconstitution of Partnership (Admission of Partner) Q3.2
Balance Sheet as of 1st April 2019
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Reconstitution of Partnership (Admission of Partner) Q3.3
Working Notes:
1. Calculation of sacrifice ratio of old partners:
Old ratio: Akash = \(\frac{3}{5}\) and Aman = \(\frac{2}{5}\)
New ratio: Akash = \(\frac{2}{4}\) and Aman = \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Sacrifice ratio = Old ratio – New ratio
Akash’s sacrifice ratio = \(\frac{3}{5}-\frac{2}{4}=\frac{12-10}{20}=\frac{2}{20}\)
Aman’s sacrifice ratio = \(\frac{2}{5}-\frac{1}{4}=\frac{8-5}{20}=\frac{3}{20}\)
Sacrifice ratio of Akash and Aman = \(\frac{2}{20}\) : \(\frac{3}{30}\) i.e. 2 : 3.
Benefits of Goodwill of ₹ 2,250 distributed and transferred to Akash’s Capital A/c and Aman’s Capital A/c in their sacrifice ratio (which is 2 : 3).
Goodwill credited to Akash’s Capital = 2,250 × \(\frac{2}{3+2}\) = ₹ 900
and Aman’s Capital = 2,250 × \(\frac{3}{5}\) = ₹ 1,350.

2. Debit balance of Revaluation of ₹ 17,955 indicates Loss on revaluation.
Division of Revaluation Loss:
Akash = 17,955 × \(\frac{3}{3+2}\) = ₹ 10,773
and Aman = 17,955 × \(\frac{2}{5}\) = ₹ 7,182.

3. Balance in Cash A/c at the end = 13,800 + 3,000 + 2,250 = ₹ 19,050.
It is shown on the Assets side of the Balance sheet.

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Reconstitution of Partnership (Admission of Partner)

4. R.D.D. = 5 % on value of Debtors = \(\frac{5}{100}\) × 94,500 = ₹ 4,725.
Amount of R.D.D. is first debited to Revaluation A/c and then deducted from the value of Debtors on the Assets side of Balance Sheet.

5. Division of General Reserve:
Akash = \(\frac{3}{5}\) × 15,000 = ₹ 9,000
and Aman = \(\frac{2}{5}\) × 15,000 = ₹ 6,000.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 1.
What are d-block elements? Give their general electronic configuration.
Answer:
Definition : d-block elements are defined as the elements in which the differentiating electron enters d-orbital of the penultimate shell i.e. (n – 1) d-orbital where ‘n is the last shell.

The general electronic configuration can be represented as, (n – n) dn – 10, nsn – 2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 2.
What is the position of the transition elements in the periodic table?
Answer:
The transition elements are placed in periods 4 to 7 and groups 3 to 12 of the periodic table.

Question 3.
In which block of the modern periodic table are the transition elements placed?
Answer:
Transition elements are placed in d-block of the modern periodic table.

Question 4.
Why are most of the d-block elements called transition elements?
Answer:

  • d-block elements have electronic configuration,(n – n) dn – 10, nsl – 2. They are all metals.
  • In the periodic table, they are placed between the ,s-block and p-block elements, i.e., in the groups between 2 and 13.
  • They show characteristic properties which are intermediate between those of the elements of s-block and p-block.
  • Hence, they show a transition in the properties from those of the most electropositive .v-block elements and less
  • electropositive (or electronegative) p-block elements.
  • Therefore, most of the d-block elements are called transition elements.

Question 5.
How many series of d-block elements are present in the long-form periodic table? Give their general electronic configuration.
Answer:
There are four series of d-block elements which are placed between 5 and p-block elements in the long-form periodic table as follows :

d-series Period Electronic configuration
(1) 3d-series fourth [Ar] 3d1 – 10, 4s1 – 2
(2) 4d-series fifth [Kr] 4d1 – 10, 5s1 – 2
(3) 5d-series sixth [Xe] 4f14 5d1 – 10 6s1 – 2
(4) 6d- series seventh [Rn] 5f14 6d1 – 10 7s2

Modern periodic table :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 6.
Represent the elements in the four series of transition elements.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 2

Question 7.
In which period of the periodic table, will an element, be found whose differentiating electron is a 4d-electron?
Answer:
An element whose differentiating electron is a 4d-electron will be present in fifth period of the periodic table.

Question 8.
Write the condensed electronic configuration of each series of transition elements.
Answer:
Condensed Electronic Configuration of Transition Elements
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 3
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 4

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 9.
Write expected and observed electronic configuration of 3d-series block elements.
Answer:
Electronic configuration of 3d-series of d-block elements
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 5

Question 10.
Explain why transition elements with electronic configuration 3d44s2 and 3d94s2 do not exist.
Answer:
(1) d-orbitals are degenerate orbitals and they acquire extra stability when half-filled (3d5) or completely filled (3d10). Hence 3d4 and 3d9 electronic configurations are less stable.
(2) The energy difference between 3d and 4.s’ subshells is very low, hence there arises a transfer of one electron from 45 orbital to 3d orbital.
The electronic configuration changes as,
3d4, 4s2 → 3d5 4s1
3d9, 4s2 → 3d10 451
Therefore transition elements, with electronic configurations 3d4, 4s2 and 3d9, 4s2 do not exist.

Question 11.
Write observed electronic configuration of elements from first transition series having half-filled d-orbitals.
Answer:
There are two elements namely Cr and Mn which have half-filled d-orbitals.
24Crls22s22p63s23p63d54s1
25Mnls22s22p63s23p63d54s2

Question 12.
Explain the variable oxidation states of metals of first transition series.
Answer:

  • The transition metals (or, elements) exhibit variable oxidation states due to their electronic configuration, (n – 1) d1 – 10 ns1 – 2 for the first row.
  • They show only positive oxidation states due to loss of electrons from outer 45-orbital and the penultimate 3rf-orbital.
  • Loss of one 45 electron forms M+ ion. Loss of two 45 electrons form M2+ ion.
  • +2 is the common oxidation state of these elements.
  • Higher oxidation states are due to loss of 3 d-electrons along with 45 electrons.
  • As the number of unpaired electrons increases, the number of oxidation states shown by the element also increases.
  • Sc has only one unpaired electron and it shows two oxidation states ( + 2 and + 3)
  • Mn with 5 unpaired d electrons show six different oxidation states. They are +2, +3, +4, +5, +6 and + 7. Thus Mn has the highest oxidation state.
  • From Fe onwards variable oxidation states decreases as the number of unpaired electron decreases.
  • The last element in the series, Zn shows only one oxidation state ( + 2).

Question 13.
Show different oxidation states of 3d-series of transition elements.
Answer:
The following table shows, different oxidation states of 3d-series of transition elements.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 7

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 14.
Write oxidation states and outer electronic configuration of first transition series elements.
Answer:
Oxidation states of first transition series elements
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 8
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 9

Question 15.
Zinc shows only one oxidation slate. Explain.
Answer:

  • The electronic conliguration of zinc is, 30Zn Is2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d10 4s2 or [Ar] 3d10 4s2.
  • Due lo loss of two electrons from 4s suhshell Zn shows oxidation state +2. with elcctronic configuration. [Ar] 183d10.
  • Since Zn+2 acquires an extra stability of completely fIlled 3d10 orbital. it shows only one oxidation state + 2.

Question 16.
Why is manganese more stable in the + 2 state than the + 3 state and the reverse is true for iron?
Answer:

  • The electronic configuration of Mn is 25Mn [Ar] 3d5 4s2
  • In + 2 and + 3 oxidation states, the electronic configuration of Mn is, Mn2+ [Ar] 3d5 and Mn3+ [Ar] 3d4
  • Since half-filled d-orbital (3d5) has more stability and lower energy than 3d4, Mn2+ is more stable than Mn3+.
  • The electronic configuration of Fe is 26Fe [Ar] 3d6 4s2 In + 2 and + 3 oxidation states of Fe, the electronic configuration is, Fe2+ [Ar] 3d6 and Fe3+ [Ar] 3d5 Since half-filled orbital is more stable, + 3 state of Fe is more stable than + 2 state.

Question 17.
What are the electronic configurations of various ions of 3d-elements?
Answer:
Electronic configuration of various ions of 3d elements
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 10

Question 18.
Scandium shows only two oxidation states. Explain.
Answer:
Scandium has electronic configuration, 21Sc : Is2, 2s2, 2p6, 3s2, 3p6, 3d1, 4s2 Sc shows only two oxidation states namely + 2 and + 3.

  • Due to the loss of two electrons from the 4s-orbital, Sc acquires + 2 oxidation state Sc2 + : Is2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d1.
  • Due to the loss of one more electron from the 3d-orbital, it acquires + 3 oxidation state with the extra stability of an inert element 18Ar. Sc+3 : Is2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6.
  • Since Sc3+ acquires extra stability of inert element [Ar]18, it does not form higher oxidation state.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 19.
Write different oxidation states of iron.
OR
Write the electronic configurations of
(i) Fe
(ii) Fe2+ and
(iii) Fe3+.
Answer:
Oxidation states of iron are +2, +3, +4, +5, +6.
(i) 26Fe : ls22s22p63s23p63d64s2
(ii) Fe2+ : Is2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d6
(iii) Fe3+ : Is2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d5.

Question 20.
Explain different oxidation states of chromium.
Answer:

  • The observed electronic configuration of chromium is, 24Cr [Ar] 3d5 4s1.
  • Different possible oxidation states of Cr are 4-1 (3d5), + 2 (3d4), + 3 (3d3), + 4 (3d2), + 5 (3d1) and + 6 (3d°).
  • Although in + 1 state, Cr gets extra stability of half-filled 3d5-orbital, it does not exhibit + 1 state in common except with pyridine.
  • Cr+2 has few stable salts like CrCl2, CrSO4 while Cr+3 forms very stable salts like CrCl3.
  • Cr+4 and Cr + 5 are unstable oxidation states.
  • Cr+6 is the most stable state due to inert gas [Ar] electronic configuration and form the salts like K2Cr2O7.

Question 21.
Manganese shows variable oxidation states. Give reasons.
Answer:

  • Manganese (25Mn) has electronic configuration. 25Mn [Ar]18 3d5 4s2.
  • Mn has stable half-filled d-subshell.
  • Due to a small difference in energy between 3d and 4s-orbitals, Mn can lose or share electrons from both the orbitals, hence shows variable oxidation states.
  • Mn shows oxidation states ranging from + 2 to + 7.

Question 22.
Write the different oxidation states of manganese. Why is + 2 oxidation state of manganese more stable than Mn3+?
Answer:

  • The different oxidation states of Mn are +2, +3, +4, +5, + 6 and +7.
  • The electronic configuration of Mn is Is2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d5 4s2
  • + 2 oxidation state is very stable due to higher stability of half-filled 3d orbital.
  • Mn3+ has electronic configuration, ls22s2 2p63s23p63dA which is less stable.

Question 23.
Write the physical properties of first transition series.
Answer:
Physical properties of first transition series :

  • All transition elements of the first series are metals.
  • Except Zn, they are very hard and have low volatility.
  • They show characteristic properties of metals. They are lustrous, malleable and ductile.
  • They are good conductors of heat and electricity.
  • They have high melting points and boiling points.
  • Except Zn and Mn, they have one or more typical metallic structures at normal temperatures.

Question 24.
Which elements in the transition elements, 3d-series has
(i) the lowest density
(ii) the highest density?
Answer:
In 3d transition elements,
(i) Scandium (Sc) has lowest density and
(ii) Zinc (Zn) has the highest density.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 25.
Explain the variation in density of d-block elements.
Answer:
The densities of d-block elements are higher than 5-block elements due to higher nuclear charge which results in reduction in atomic size.

Question 26.
Explain the variation in melting points of the transition elements.
Answer:

  1. All transition elements are metals and the strength of metallic bonding increases as the number of unpaired electrons increases.
  2. In transition elements as atomic number increases, the number of unpaired electrons increases from (n – 1)d1 to (n – 1 )d5.
    For example in 3d-series, melting points increase from 21Sc to 24Cr in 4d-series from 39Y to 42Mo, and in 5d-series from 72Hf to 74W.
  3. After (n – l)d5 electronic configuration, the electrons start pairing, hence the number of unpaired electrons decrease, hence metallic character, melting points decrease from (n-1 )d6 to (n – 1)d10.
  4. In all transition series the melting point increases steadily up to d5 configuration and after this melting point decreases regularly.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 11

Question 27.
The first ionisation enthalpies of third transition series elements are much higher than those of the elements of first and second transition series. Explain.
Answer:

  1. Third transition series elements have electronic configuration, 4f14 5d1 – 10 6s2.
  2. Thus, atoms of third series elements possess filled 4f-orbitals.
  3. 4f-orbitals due to their diffused shape, exhibit poor shielding effect and give rise to lanthanide contraction. Hence the valence electrons experience greater nuclear attraction and greater amount of energy is required to ionise the elements of third transition series namely (Hf to Au).
  4. Therefore the ionisation enthalpies of third transition series elements are much higher than those of the first and second transition series.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 13

Question 28.
Explain the metalic character of transition metals.
Answer:

  • All the transition elements are metals.
  • They are hard, lustrous, malleable, ductile and they have high tensile strength.
  • They have high melting points and boiling points.
  • Their metallic character is due to vacant or partially filled (n – 1) d-orbitals, and they involve both metallic and covalent bonding.
  • Since the strength of metallic bonds depends upon the number of unpaired electrons, it increases up to middle i.e., up to (n – 1 )d5, hence accordingly melting points and boiling points also increase.
  • After (n – l)d5 configuration, the electrons start pairing, hence the metallic strength, melting points and boiling points decrease with the increase in atomic number.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 29.
How does metallic character vary in 3d transition elements?
Answer:

  1. In 3d-series elements as atomic number increases from scandium (Sc [Ar]18 3d1 4s2) the number of unpaired electrons increases up to 3d5 in chromium.
  2. As the number of unpaired electrons increases, the metallic character increases, hence the melting points and boiling points increase from 21Sc(3d1) to 24Cr (3d5).
  3. After chromium the number of unpaired electrons goes on decreasing due to the pairing of electrons, hence metallic character, melting points and boiling points decrease from 25Mn to 29Cu.
  4. Zinc has all electrons paired, hence it is soft, has a low melting and boiling points.

Question 30.
Which are the common arrangement of the atoms in the structure of transition metals?
Answer:
Most of the transition metals have simple hexagonal closed packed (hep), cubic closed packed (ccp) or body centred cubic (bcc) lattices.

Question 31.
Why do the compounds of transition metals exhibit magnetic properties?
Answer:
The compounds of transition metals exhibit magnetic properties due to the presence of unpaired electrons in their atoms or ions.

Question 32.
What is the cause of paramagnetism and ferromagnetism?
Answer:
Paramagnetism and ferromagnetism is due to the presence of unpaired electrons in species.

Question 33.
When does species become diamagnetic?
Answer:
When there is no unpaired electron, i.e. all electron spins are paired, the species become diamagnetic.

Question 34.
How do metals Fe, Co, Ni acquire permanent magnetic moment?
Answer:
The transition metals Fe, Co and Ni are ferromagnetic. When the magnetic field is applied, all the unpaired electrons in these metals (and their compounds) align in the direction of the applied magnetic field. Due to this the magnetic susceptibility is enhanced and these metals can be magnetised, that is, they acquire permanent magnetic properties.

Question 35.
In which oxidation state, is vanadium diamagnetic?
Answer:

  • The electronic configuration of vanadium is, 23V [Ar] 3d3 4s2.
  • In +5 oxidation state, the electronic configuration is, V5+ [Ar].
  • Since in V5+ state, vanadium has all electrons paired, it is diamagnetic.

Question 36.
How is a magnetic moment expressed?
Answer:
The magnetic moment is expressed in Bohr magneton (B.M.). It is denoted by μ.

Question 37.
What is Bohr magneton (B.M.)?
Answer:
Bohr magneton (B.M.) is a unit of magnetic moment :
\(1 \mathrm{~B} . \mathrm{M} .=\frac{e h}{4 \pi m_{\mathrm{e}} c}\)
where, h : Planck’s constant (h = 6.626 x 10-34 Js)
e : electronic charge (1.60218 x 10-19 C)
me : mass of an electron (9.109 x 10-31 kg)
c : velocity of light. (2.998 x 108 ms-1)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 38.
Explain the magnetic properties of transition (or d-block) elements.
Answer:

  • Most of the transition metal ions and their compounds are paramagnetic in nature due to the presence of one or more unpaired electrons in their (n – 1)d-orbitals. Hence they are attracted in the magnetic field.
  • As the number of unpaired electrons increases from 1 to 5 in J-orbitals, the paramagnetic character and magnetic moment increase.
  • The transition elements or their ions having all electrons paired are diamagnetic and they are repelled in the magnetic field.
  • Metals like Fe, Co and Ni possess very high paramagnetism and acquire permanent magnetic moment hence they are ferromagnetic.

Question 39.
Explain the effective magnetic moment of the species.
Answer:

  • The magnetic moment in the species arises due to the presence of unpaired electrons.
  • The magnetic moment depends upon the sum of orbitals and spin contribution for each unpaired electron present in the species.
  • In transition metal ions, the contribution of orbital magnetic moment is suppressed by the electrostatic field of other atoms, molecules or ions surrounding the metal ion in the compound.
  • Hence the net or effective magnetic moment arises mainly due to spin of electrons. The effective magnetic moment μeff, of a paramagnetic substance is given by 1 spin only’ formula represented as, \(\mu=\sqrt{n(n+2)}\) B.M. where n is the number of unpaired electrons.

Question 40.
What is the importance of magnetic moment (μ)?
Answer:

  • From the measurements of the magnetic moment (μ) of the species or metal complexes of the first row of transition elements, the number of unpaired electrons can be calculated with the spin-only formula.
  • As magnetic moment is directly related to the number of unpaired electrons, value of μ will vary directly with the number of unpaired electrons.
  • In 2nd and 3rd transition series, orbital angular moment is significant. Hence spin-only formula for the complexes of 2nd and 3rd transition series is not useful.

Question 41.
Calculate the magnetic moment of the following species :
(1) Cr3+
(2) Co
(3) Co3+
(4) Cu2 +.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 14

Question 42.
Explain : A slight difference in the calculated and observed values of magnetic moments.
Answer:
Magnetic moments are determined experimentally in solution or in solid state where the central atom or ion is hydrated or bound to ligands. Hence a slight difference is observed in calculated and experimentally obtained values of magnetic moment (μ).

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 15

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 43.
Calculate the magnetic moment of a divalent ion in an aqueous solution, if its atomic number is 24.
Answer:
(1) The electronic configuration of divalent inri M2+ having atomic number 24 is.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 18

The ion has number of unpaired electrons. n = 4.
By spin only’ formula, the magnetic μ is given by, \(\mu=\sqrt{n(n+2)}=\sqrt{4(4+2)}=4.90 \mathrm{~B} . \mathrm{M}\)
(This M2+ ion is Cr2+ ion)

Question 44.
When does a substance appear coloured?
Answer:
A substance appears coloured when it absorbs a portion of visible light. The colour depends upon the wavelength of absorption in the visible region of electromagnetic radiation.

Question 45.
Why do the d-block elements form coloured compounds?
Answer:

  • Compounds (or ions) of many d-block elements or transition metals are coloured.
  • This is due to the presence of one or more unpaired electrons in (n – 1) d-orbital. The transition metals have incompletely filled (n – 1) cf-orbitals.
  • The energy required to promote one or more electrons within the d-orbitals involving d-d transitions is very low.
  • The energy changes for d-d transitions lie in visible region of electromagnetic radiation.
  • Therefore transition metal ions absorb the radiation in the visible region and appear coloured.
  • Colour of ions of d-block elements depends on the number of unpaired electrons in (n – 1) d-orbital. The ions having equal number of unpaired electrons have similar colour.
  • The colour of metal ions is complementary to the colour of the radiation absorbed.

Question 46.
How is complementary colour of a compound identified?
Answer:

  1. The transition metal ions absorb the radiation in the visible region and appeared coloured.
  2. Metal ion absorbs radiation of certain wavelength from the visible region. Remaining light is transmitted and the observed colour corresponds to the complementary colour of the light observed.
  3. The complementary colour can be identified (with the diagram given).

For example if red colour is absorbed then transmitted complementary colour is green.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 19

Question 47.
Write outer electronic configuration (d-orbital) and colour of 3d-series of transition metal ions.
Answer:
Colour of 3d-transition metal ions
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 20

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 48.
Mention the factors on which the colour of a transition metal ion depends.
Answer:
The factors on which the colour of transition metal ion depends are as follows :

  • The presence of incompletely filled d-orbitals in metal ions. (The compounds with the configuration d° and d’0 are colourless.)
  • The presence of unpaired electrons in d-orbitals.
  • d → d transitions of electrons due to absorption of radiation in the visible region.
  • Nature of groups (anions) (or ligands) linked to the metal ion in the compound or a complex.
  • Type of hybridisation in metal ion in the complex.
  • Geometry of the complex of the metal ion.

Question 49.
Give reasons : Zinc salts are colourless.
Answer:

  • Colour of the ions of d-block elements depends on the number of unpaired electrons in (n – 1) d-orbitals.
  • Zinc forms salts of Zn2+ ions.
  • The electronic configuration of Zn+2 is [Ar] 3d10.
  • Since Zn+2 does not have unpaired electrons in 3d-orbital, d→d transition cannot take place, hence, Zn+2 ions form colourless salts.

Question 50.
Explain : The compounds of Cu(II) are coloured.
Answer:

  • The electronic configuration of 29Cu [Ar] 3d10 4s1 and Cu2+ [Ar] 3d9.
  • In copper compounds Cu2+ ions have incompletely filled 3d-orbital (3d9).
  • Due to the presence of one unpaired electron in 3 d-orbital, Cu2+ ions absorb red light from visible spectrum and emit blue radiation due to d → d transition. Therefore, copper compounds are coloured.

Question 51.
Explain why the solution of Ti3+ salt is purple in colour.
OR
Why is Ti3+ coloured? (atomic number Ti = 22)
Answer:

  • Ti2+ ions in the aqueous solution exist in the hydrated complex form as [Ti(H2O)6]2+.
  • The electronic configuration of Ti is, 22Ti [Ar]18 3d2 4s2 and Ti3+ [Ar]18 3d1. Hence in complex, Ti3+ has one unpaired electron in 3d subshell.
  • Initially, the 3d electron occupies lower energy d-orbital (in t2g-orbitals).
  • On the absorption of radiations of about 500 nm in yellow green region by a complex, 3d1 electron is excited to the higher energy d-orbital (eg-orbitals).
  • When the electron returns back to the lower energy d-orbital (t2g), it transmits radiation of complementary colour i.e. red blue or purple colour. Hence, the solution of hydrated Ti3+ is purple.

Question 52.
What will be the colour of Cd2+ salts? Explain.
Answer:

  • The electronic configuration of, 48Cd [Kr]36 3d10 5s2 and Cd2+ [Kr]36 3d10.
  • Cd2+ ions have completely filled 3d subshell and there are no unpaired electrons in 3d-orbital.
  • Hence d → d transition is not possible.
  • Therefore, Cd2+ ions do not absorb radiations in the visible region and the salts of Cd2+ ions are colourless (or white).

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 53.
Indicate which of the ions may be coloured- V3+, Sc3+, Cr31, Cu2+, Ti3+, Cu+
Answer:

  • V3+ [Ar]18 3d2-((green)
    Since there are two unpaired electrons available, for d → d transition, it will show a Green colour.
  • Sc3+ [Ar]18 3d° (colourless/white).
    Since there are no unpaired electrons in the 3d subshell, it will not show colour.
  • Cr3+ [Ar]18 3d3 – (violet)
    There are three unpaired electrons in the 3d subshell, hence due to d → d transition, it will show violet colour.
  • Cu2+ [Ar]18 3d9 (blue)
    It has one unpaired electron that can undergo a d → d transition, hence it will show the colour blue.
  • Ti3+ [Ar]18 3d1 (purple)
    It has one unpaired electron that can undergo a d → d transition, hence it will show the colour purple.
  • Cu1+ [Ar]18 3d10 (colourless)
    There are no unpaired electrons in the 3d subshell, hence it will not show colour.

Question 54.
Explain why is cobalt chloride pink in colour when dissolved in water but turns deep blue when treated with concentrated hydrochloric acid.
Answer:

  • The electronic configuration of 27Co : [Ar] 3d14s2 and Co2+ [Ar] 3d1.
  • When dissolved in water cobalt chloride, Co2+ forms pink complex, [Co(H2O)6]2+.
  • The complex has octahedral geometry.
  • Due to absorption of radiation in the visible region and d – d transition, it forms pink coloured solution.
  • When CoCl2 solution is treated with concentrated HCl solution it turns deep blue.
  • This change is due to the formation of another complex, [CoC14]2+ which has a tetrahedral geometry.
  • Thus due to a change in geometry of the complex formed the colour of the solution changes from pink to deep blue.

Question 55.
Explain the catalytic properties of the rf-block or transition metals.
Answer:

  • d-block elements or transition metals and their compounds or complexes influence the rate of a chemical reaction and hence act as catalysts.
  • In homogeneous catalysis a catalyst forms an unstable intermediate compound which decomposes into products and regenerates the catalyst. But transition metals involve heterogeneous catalysis.
  • The transition metals have incompletely filled d-subshells which adsorb reactants on the surface and provide a large surface area for the reactants to react.
  • Since transition metals have variable oxidation states they are very good catalysts.
  • Hence, compounds of Fe, Co, Ni, Pt, Pd, Cr etc are used as catalysts in many reactions.

Question 56.
Explain the use of different transition metals as catalysts.
Answer:
The transition metals are very good catalysts.

  • MnO2 is used as a catalyst in the decomposition of KClO3.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 21
  • In the manufacture of ammonia by Haber’s process, Mo/Fe is used as a catalyst.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 22
  • In the synthesis of gasoline by Fischer Tropsch process, Co-Th alloy is used as a catalyst.
  • Finely divided Ni (formed by reduction of heated oxide in hydrogen) is very efficient catalyst in hydrogenation of ethene to ethane at 140 °C.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 23
  • Commercially, hydrogenation with Ninkel as catalyst is used to convert inedible oils into solid fat for the production of margarine.
  • In the contact process of industrial production of sulphuric acid, sulphur dioxide and oxygen (from air) react reversibly over a solid catalyst of platinised asbestos.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 24
  • Carbon dioxide and hydrogen are formed by the reaction of carbon monoxide and steam at 500 °C with Fe-Cr catalyst.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 25

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 57.
What are interstitial compounds of transition metals?
Answer:

  • The interstitial compounds of the transition metals are those which are formed when small atoms like H, C or N are trapped inside the interstitial vacant spaces in the crystal lattices of the metals.
  • Sometimes, sulphides and oxides are also trapped in the crystal lattices of transition elements.
  • Presence of these elements in the crystal lattices of metals provide new properties to the metals.

Question 53.
Give one example of an interstitial compound.
Answer:
Steel and cast iron are examples of interstitial compounds of carbon and iron.

Question 54.
Give examples of interstitial compounds where the property of the transition metal is changed.
Answer:
Steel and cast iron are interstitial compounds of carbon and iron (carbides of iron). Due to the presence of carbon, the malleability and ductility of iron is reduced while its tenacity increases.

Question 55.
What are the properties of the interstitial compounds of transition metals?
Answer:

  • The chemical properties of the interstitial compounds are the same as that of parent transition metals.
  • They are hard and show the metallic properties like electrical and thermal conductivity, lustre, etc.
  • Since metal-non-metal bonds in the interstitial compounds are stronger than metal-metal bonds in pure metals, the compounds have very high melting points, higher than the pure metals.
  • They have lower densities than the parent metal.
  • The interstitial compounds containing hydrogen (i.e., hydrides of metals) are powerful reducing agents.
  • The compounds containing carbon, hence behaving as carbides, are chemically inert and extremely hard like diamond.
  • In these compounds, malleability and ductility are changed. For example steel and cast iron.

Question 56.
What are interstitial compounds? Why do these compounds have higher melting points than corresponding pure metals?
Answer:

  1. The interstitial compounds of the transition metals are those which are formed when small atoms like H, C or N are trapped inside the interstitial vacant spaces in the crystal lattice of the metals.
  2. Since metal-nonmetal bonds in the interstitial compounds are stronger than metal-metal bonds in pure metals, the compounds have very high melting points, higher than the pure metals.

Question 57.
Explain the formation of alloys of transition metals.
Answer:

  • The transition metals form a large number of alloys among themselves, which are hard with high melting points.
  • During alloy formation atoms of one metal are distributed randomly in the lattice of another metal.
  • The metals with similar atomic radii and similar properties readily form alloys.
  • These alloys have industrial importance.
  • The alloys can be ferrous alloys or nonferrous alloys.

Question 58.
How are the transition metal alloys classIfied?
Answer:
The transition metal alloys are classified into

  • Ferrous alloys
  • Nonferrous alloys.

Question 59.
Explain what are
(1) ferrous alloys and
(2) nonferrous alloys.
Answer:

  1. Ferrous alloys: In ferrous alloys, atoms of other elemems are distributed randomly in atoms of iron in the mixture. As the percentage of iron is more in these alloys, they are termed as ferrous alloys. For expamle : nickel steel, chromium steel, stainless steel, (All steels have abot 2% carbon)
  2. onferrous alloys : These are formed by mixing atoms of transition metal other than iron with a non transition elemeni. For example, brass is an alloy of Cu and Zn. Bronze is an alloy of Cu and Sn.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 60.
What are the uses of alloys?
Answer:

Name of alloy Important use in industry
(1) Bronze (Cu + Sn) In making statues, medals and trophies (as it is tough, strong and corrosion-resistant)
(2) Cupra-nickel (Cu + Ni) In making machinery parts of marine ships, boats, marine conden­ser tubes.
(3) Stainless steel In the construction of the outer fuselage of ultra-high-speed aircraft.
(4) Nichrome : (Ni+ Cr in the ration 80 : 20) For gas turbine engines.
(5) Titanium alloys For ultra-high-speed flight, fireproof bulkheads and exhaust shrouds (as they withstand high temperatures).

Question 61.
Write the preparation of potassium permanganate.
Answer:
Potassium permanganate (KMnO4) is prepared in the following steps,

(1) Chemical Oxidation : When finely divided manganese dioxide (Mn02) is heated strongly with fused caustic potash (KOH) and an oxidising agent potassium chlorate (KCIO3), dark green potassium manganate (K2MnO4) is obtained. (In neutral or acidic medium K2MnO4 disproportionates.)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 26

The liquid is filtered through glass wool or sintered glass and evaporated. Potassium manganate crystallises as small, blackish crystals.

(2) Oxidation of K2MnO4 by
(i) Electrolytic oxidation : An alkaline solution of manganate ion is electrolysed between iron electrodes separated by a diaphragm. Manganate ion \(\left(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{2-}\right)\) undergoes oxidation at anode forming permanganate ion \(\left(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{-}\right)\). Oxygen evolved at anode converts \(\left(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{2-}\right)\) to \(\left(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{-}\right)\).

The overall reaction is as follows :
2K2MnO4 + H2O + [O] → 2KMnO4 + 2KOH

The electrolytic solution is filtered and evaporated to obtain deep purple black crystals of KMn04.

(ii) By passing CO2 through the solution of K2MnO4 :
3K2MnO4 + 4CO2 + 2H2O → 2KMnO4 + MnO2 + 4 KHCO3

Question 62.
What is meant by the disproportionation of an oxidation state? Explain giving example of manganese.
Answer:

  1. Disproportionation reaction is a chemical reaction in which atom or an ion of an element forms two or more species having different oxidation states, one lower and one higher.
  2. Manganese (Mn) shows different oxidation states + 2 to +7.
  3. When one oxidation state, lower or higher oxidation state becomes unstable as compared to another oxidation state, it undergoes disproportionation reaction.
  4. For example, + 6 oxidation state of Mn is less stable than + 7 and + 4.
    • Hence, in acidic medium \(\mathrm{Mn}^{6+} \text { in } \mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{2-}\) undergoes disproportionation reaction.
      Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 27
    • In neutral medium green K2MnO4 disproportionates to KMn04 and MnO2.
      Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 28

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 63.
Give examples of oxidising reactions of KMnO4.
Answer:
(1) KMnO4 in acidic medium :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 57
(2) KMnO4 in neutral or alkaline medium in neutral or weakly alkaline medium :
(i) Iodide is oxidised to iodate ion.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 33
(ii) Thiosulphate ion is oxidised to sulphate ion.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 34
(iii) Manganous salt is oxidised to MnO2.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 35

Question 64.
Balance the following equations :
KI + KMnO4 + H2SO4 → K2SO4 + MnSO4 + 8H2O + I2
H2S + KMnO4 + H2SO4 → K2SO4 + MnSO4 + H2O + S.
Answer:
10 KI + 2KMnO4 + 8H2SO4 → 6K2SO4 + 2MnSO4 + 8H2O + 5I2
5H2S + 2KMnO4 + 3H2SO4 → K2SO4 + 2MnSO4 + 8H2O + 5S.

Question 65.
Give the uses of potassium permanganate.
Answer:
Uses of potassium permanganate :

  • as an antiseptic.
  • as a powerful oxidising agent in laboratory and industry.
  • in the detection of unsaturation in organic compounds in the laboratory. (Baeyer’s reagent, alkaline KMnO4).
  • for detecting halides in qualitative analysis.
  • in volumetric analysis for the estimation of H2O2, FeSO4 etc.)

Question 66.
Write the formula of chromite ore.
Answer:
FeOCr2O3.

Question 67.
How is potassium dichromate manufactured from chromite ore (FeOCr2O3)?
Answer:
Manufacture of potassium dichromate (K2Cr2O2) from chrome iron ore (FeOCr2O3) involves following steps :
(1) Concentration of ore : The chromite ore (FeOCr2O3) is powdered and washed with current of water.
(2) Conversion of chromite ore into sodium chromate : The concentrated ore is mixed with anhydrous sodium carbonate (Na2CO3) and a flux of lime in excess air and heated in a reverberatory furnace.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 36
Sodium chromate (Na2CrO4) formed in the reaction is then extracted with water so that Na2CrO4 dissolves into solution and insoluble substances separate out.
(3) Conversion of Na2CrO4 into sodium dichromate (Na2Cr4O7) : Na2CrO4 solution is acidified with concentrated H2SO2, so that sodium chromate is converted into sodium dichromate.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 37
Less soluble sodium sulphate crystallises out as Na2SO4.10H2O. which is filtered off.
(4) Conversion of Na2Cr2O7 into K2Cr2O7 : Concentrated solution of Na2Cr2O7 is treated with KCl on by double decomposition, K2Cr2O7 is obtained.
Na2Cr2O7 + 2KCl → K2Cr2O7 + 2NaCl
On concentrating and cooling the solution, less soluble orange coloured K2Cr2O7 crystallises out which is filtered and purified by recrystallisation.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 68.
What happens when hydrogen sulphide gas (H2S) is passed through acidified K2Cr2O7 solution?
Answer:
When hydrogen sulphide (H2S) gas is passed into solution of K2Cr2O7, H2S is oxidised to a pale yellow solid (precipitate) of sulphur. Orange coloured solution becomes green due to formation of chromic sulphate (green coloured).

In the reaction, H2S is oxidised to S and K2Cr2O7 is reduced to Cr2(SO4)3.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 38

Question 69.
What are the common physical properties of d-block elements?
Answer:
The common physical properties of d-block elements are :

  • All d-block elements are lustrous and shining.
  • They are hard and have high density
  • They have high melting and boiling points.
  • They are good electrical and thermal conductors.
  • They have high tensile strength and malleability.
  • They can form alloys with transition and nontransition elements
  • Many metals and their compounds are paramagnetic.
  • Most of the metals are efficient catalysts.

Question 70.
What are the common chemical properties of d-block elements?
Answer:
The common chemical properties of the d-block elements are :

  • All d-block elements are electropositive metals.
  • They exhibit variable oxidation states and form coloured salts and complexes.
  • They are good reducing agents.
  • They form insoluble oxides and hydroxides.
  • Iron, cobalt, copper, molybdenum and zinc are biologically important metals.
  • They catalyse biological reactions.

Question 71.
Give examples to show that elements of first row of d-block elements differ from second and third row with respect to the stabilisation of higher oxidation states.
Answer:

  • Highest oxidation state for the first row element is + 7 as in Mn.
    For the second row, the highest oxidation state is + 8 as in Ru (RuO4).
    For the third row, the highest oxidation state is + 8 as in Os (OsO4).
  • Compounds of Mo(V) of 2nd row and W(VI) of 3rd row of transitional elements are more stable than Cr(VI) and Mn (VIII) of first row elements.

Question 72.
How do metals occur in nature?
Answer:
In nature, few metals occur in earth’s crust in free state or native state while other metals occur in the combined form.
(1) Elements in free state or native state : The metals which are non-reactive with air, water, CO2 and non-metals occur in free state or native state. For example, gold, platinum, palladium occur in free state. Metals like Cu, Ag and Hg occur partly in the free state.

(2) Combined form : The metals which are reactive occur in the combined state with other elements forming compounds like oxides, sulphides, sulphates, carbonates, silicates, etc.

Question 73.
What are minerals?
Answer:
Minerals : They are naturally occurring chemical substances in the earth’s crust containing metal in free state or in combined form and obtainable from mining are called minerals. For example, haematite Fe203, galena PbS, etc.

Question 74.
What are ores?
Answer:
Ores : The minerals containing a high percentage of metals from which metals can be profitably extracted are called ores.
[Note : Every ore is a mineral but every mineral is not an ore.]

Question 75.
Write names of minerals and ores of Iron, Copper and Zinc.
Answer:

Metals Mineral Ore
Iron Haematite Fe2O3
Magnetite Fe3O4
Limonite 2Fe2O3, 3H2O
Iron pyrites FeS2
Siderite FeCO3
Haematite
Copper Chalcopyrite CuFeS2 Chalcocite Cuprite Cu2O Chalcopyrite
Chalcocite
Zinc Zinc blende ZnS
Zincite ZnO
Calamine ZnCO3
Zinc blende

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 76.
What is metallurgy?
Answer:
Metallurgy : The process of extraction of metal in a pure state from its ore is called metallurgy.

Question 77.
Define the following:
(1) Pyrometallurgy
(2) Hydrometallurgy
(3) Electrometallurgy.
Answer:

  1. Pyrometallurgy : It is a process of extraction of metal from metal oxide from concentrated ore by reduction with a suitable reducing agent like carbon, hydrogen, aluminium, etc. at high temperature.
  2. Hydrometallurgy : It is a process of extraction of metals by converting their ores into aqueous solutions of metal compounds and reducing them by suitable reducing agents.
  3. Electrometallurgy : It is a process of extraction of highly electropositive metals like Na, K, Al, etc. by electrolysis of fused compounds of the metals where metal ions are reduced at cathode forming metals.

Question 78.
What is gangue?
Answer:
Gangue : The earthly and undesired impurities of various substances like sand (SiO2), metal oxides, etc. present in the ore are called gangue or matrix.

Question 79.
Define concentration of an ore.
Answer:
Concentration : A process of removal of gangue or unwanted impurities from the ore is called concentration of an ore. It is also called benefaction or dressing of an ore.

Question 80.
What are common methods of concentration of an ore?
Answer:
The concentration of an ore involves different methods depending upon the differences in physical properties of compounds or the metal present and the nature of the gangue.

The common methods of concentration of ore are as follows :

  1. Gravity separation or hydraulic washing :
    This can be carried out by two processes as follows :

    • Hydraulic washing by using Wilfley’s table method
    • Hydraulic classifier methods.
  2. Magnetic separation
  3. Froth floatation process.
  4. Leaching.

The method depends upon the nature of ore.

Question 81.
What is leaching?
Answer:
Leaching : ft is a (chemical) process used in the concentration of an ore by extracting soluble material from an insoluble solid by dissolving in a suitable solvent. This method is used in the concentration process of ores of Al, Ag, Au, etc.

Question 82.
What is roasting of an ore?
Answer:
Roasting : It is a process of strongly heating a concentrated ore in the excess of air below melting point of metal, to convert it into oxide form. It is used for a sulphide ore. For example, ZnS ore on roasting forms ZnO.

Question 83.
Write an equation to show how zinc blende (ZnS) is converted to ZnO.
Answer:
When zinc blende is roasted, it is converted to ZnO.
\(\mathrm{ZnS}+\mathrm{O}_{2} \stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{ZnO}+\mathrm{SO}_{2}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 84.
Explain the term : Smelting
Answer:
Smelting : The process of extraction of a metal from its ore by heating and melting at high temperature is called smelting. Reduction of ore is carried out during smelting.

Question 85.
What is calcination?
Answer:
Calcination is a process in which the ore is heated to a high temperature below the melting point of the metal in the absence of air or limited supply of air in a reverberatory furnace.

It is generally used for carbonate and hydrated oxides to convert them into anhydrous oxides.

Question 86.
Define the terms :
(1) Flux
(2) Slag
Answer:
(1) Flux : A flux is a chemical substance which is added to the concentrated ore during smelting in order to remove the gangue or impurities by chemical reaction forming a fusible mass called slag.
(2) Slag : It is a waste product formed by combination of a flux and gangue (or impurities) during the extraction of metals by smelting process.

Iron is the fourth most abundant element in the earth’s crust.

Question 87.
What is the composition of haematite ore?
Answer:
Composition of Haematite ore is Fe2O3 + SiO2 + Al2O3 + phosphates

Question 88.
Which impurities (gangue) are present in haematite ore?
Answer:
SiO2 and Al2O3 are the impurities present in the haematite ore.

Question 89.
Which reducing agents are used to reduce haematite ore into metallic iron?
Answer:
Haematite ore is reduced using coke and CO. Carbon in the coke is converted to carbon monoxide. Carbon and carbon monoxide together reduce Fe203 to metallic iron.

Fe2O3 + 3C → 2Fe + 3CO.
Fe2O3 + 3CO → 2Fe + 3CO2.

Question 90.
Why is limestone used in the extraction of iron?
Answer:

  • The ore of iron contains acidic gangue or impurity of silica, SiO2.
  • To remove silica gangue, basic flux like calcium oxide CaO, is required, which is obtained from the decomposition of limestone, CaCO3. \(\mathrm{CaCO}_{3} \stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{CaO}+\mathrm{CO}_{2}\)
  • Silica reacts with CaO and forms a fusible slag of CaSiO3.
    \(\mathrm{SiO}_{2}+\mathrm{CaO} \stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{CaSiO}_{3}\)

Therefore in the extraction of iron, lime is used.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 91.
Name the furnace in which iron is extracted from Haematite ore.
Answer:
Extraction of iron is carried out in Blast furnace.

Question 92.
Explain the extraction of iron from haematite.
Answer:
Iron is mainly extracted from haematite, Fe2O3 by reduction process.
Haematite ore contains silica (SiO2), alumina (Al2O3) and phosphates as impurity or gangue.

Coke is used for the reduction of ore.

To remove acidic gangue SiO2, a basic flux CaO is used which is obtained from lime stone CaCO3.

The extraction process involves following steps :
(1) Concentration of an ore : The powdered ore is concentrated by gravity separation process by washing it in a current of water. The lighter impurities (gangue) are carried away leaving behind the ore.
(2) Roasting : The concentrated ore is heated strongly in a limited current of air. During this, moisture is removed and the impurities like S, As and phosphorus are oxidised to gaseous oxides which escape.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 41
After roasting, the ore is sintered to form small lumps.
(3) Reduction (or smelting) : The roasted or calcined ore is then reduced by heating in a blast furnace.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 42
The blast furnace is a tall cylindrical steel tower about 25 m in height and has a diameter about 5-10m lined with fire bricks inside.

Blast furnace has three parts :

  • the hearth,
  • the bosh and
  • the stack.

At the top, there is a cup and cone arrangement to introduce the ore and at the bottom, tapping hole for withdrawing molten iron and an outlet to remove a slag.

The roasted ore is mixed with coke and limestone in the approximate ratio of 12 : 5 : 3.

A blast of hot air at about 1000 K is blown from downwards to upwards by layers arrangement. The temperature range is from bottom 2000 K to 500 K at the top. The charge of ore from top and the air blast from bottom are sent simultaneously. There are three zones of temperature in which three main chemical reactions take place.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

(i) Zone of combustion : The hot air oxidises coke to CO which is an exothermic reaction, due to which the temperature of furnace rises.
C + 1/2 O2 → CO ΔH= – 220kJ
Some part of CO dissociates to give finely divided carbon and O2.
2CO → 2C + O2
The hot gases with CO rise up in the furnace and heats the charge coming down. CO acts as a fuel as well as a reducing agent.

(ii) Zone of reduction : At about 900 °C, CO reduces Fe2O3 to spongy (or porous) iron.
Fe2O3 + 3CO → 2Fe + 3CO2
Carbon also reduces partially Fe203 to Fe.
Fe2O3 + 3C → 2Fe + 3CO

(iii) Zone of slag formation : At 1200 K limestone, CaCO3 in the charge, decomposes and forms a basic flux CaO which further reacts at 1500 K with gangue (SiO2, Al2O3) and forms a slag of CaSiO3 and Ca3AlO3.
CaCO3 + CaO + CO2.
CaO + SiO2 → CaSiO3
12CaO + 2Al2O3 → 4Ca3AlO3 + 3O2

The slag is removed from the bottom of the furnace through an outlet.

(iv) Zone of fusion : The impurities in ore like MnO2 and Ca3(PO4)2 are reduced to Mn and P while SiO2 is reduced in Si. The spongy iron moving down in the furnace melts in the fusion zone and dissolves the impurities like C, Si, Mn, phosphorus and sulphure. The molten iron collects at the bottom of furnace. The lighter slag floats on the molten iron and prevents its oxidation.

The molten iron is removed and cooled in moulds. It is called pig iron or cast iron. It contains about 4% carbon.

Question 93.
Write the reaction involved in the zone of reduction in blast furnace during extraction of iron.
Answer:
Zone of reduction : At about 900 °C, CO reduces Fe2O3 to spongy (or porous) iron.
Fe2O3 + 3CO → 2Fe + 3CO2
Carbon also reduces Fe2O3 to Fe.
Fe2O3 + 3C → 2Fe + 3CO

Question 94
Write reactions involved at different temperatures in the blast furnace.
Answer:

Temperature K Change taking place in the blast furnace Reactions
1. 500 K Haematite ore loses moisture ore xH2O → ore
2. 900 K Reduction of ore by CO Fe2O3 + 3CO → 2Fe + 3CO
3. 1200K Limestone decomposes CaCO3 → CaO + CO2
4. 1500K Reduction of ore by C Fe2O3 + 3C → 2Fe + 3CO
5. 1600 K (i) Reduction of FeO by C
(ii) Fusion of iron and slag formation
FeO + C → Fe + CO
CaO + SiO2 → CaSiO3
6. 2000 K Combustion of coke 2C + O2 → CO

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 95.
What is the action of carbon on Fe203 in blast furnace?
Answer:
Fe2O3 + 3C → 2Fe + 3CO

Question 96.
What is refining of metals?
Answer:
Refining of metals : The purification of impure or crude metals by removing metallic and nonmetallic impurities is known as refining of metals. H

Question 97.
How is pure iron obtained from crude iron?
Answer:
Pure iron can be obtained by electrolytic refining.

Question 98.
Name the methods of refining of metals.
Answer:
Methods of refining of metals :

  • Electrorefining
  • Liquefaction
  • Distillation
  • Oxidation m

Question 99.
What are the factors that govern the choice of extraction technique of metals?
Answer:
The choice of extraction technique is governed by the following factors.

  • Nature of ore
  • Availability and cost of reducing agent. (Generally, cheap coke is used).
  • Availability of hydraulic power.
  • Purity of metal required.
  • Value of by-products. For example. SO2 obtained during the roasting of sulphide ores is important for the manufacture of H2SO4.

Question 100.
Which are the commercial forms of iron?
Answer:
Commercial forms of iron are :

  • Cast iron
  • wrought iron
  • steel. H

Question 101.
(A) What are f-block elements?
(B) What are inner transition elements?
Answer:
(A)

  • Elements in which differentiating electron enters into the pre-penultimate shell the (n – 2) f-orbital are known as f.block elements.
  • They include 28 elements with atomic numbers ranging from 58-71 and atomic numbers 90 to 103 collectively.
  • There are two f-series or two f-block elements, namely 4f and 5f series.
  • The f-block includes two inner transition series namely the lanthanoid series. Cerium (58) to LuteUum (71) or the 4 f-block elements and the actinoid series. Thorium (90) to I.awrencium (103) or the 5f block elements.

(B) f-block elements are called inner transition elements since f-orbital lies much inside the f-orbital in relation to the transition metals, These elements have 1 to 14 electrons in their f-orbital.

Question 102.
What are fIrst inner transition elements?
Answer:

  1. 4f-hlock elements are called (first) inner transition elements and have partly filled inner orbitaIs or (4f) orbitais.
  2. They have general outer electronic configuration \((n-2) f^{1-14},(n-1) d^{0-1}, n s^{2}\).
  3. There are two f-series, namely 4f and 5f series, called lanthanoids and acùnoids respectively.
  4. They shos intermediate properties as compared to electropositive s-block elements and electronegative p-block elements. Hence they are called (first) inner transition elements.

Question 103.
What are lanthanoids (or lanthanides)?
OR
What is the lanthanoid series?
Answer:

  • Lanthanoids or Lanthanoid series or Lanthanones : The series of fourteen elements from 58Ce to 71Lu in which a differentiating electron enters 4f sub-shell and follows lanthanum is called lanthanoid series and the elements are called lanthanoids.
  • They have general electronic configuration, [Xe] 4f1-14 ,5d0-1, 6s2.
  • They follow Lanthanum (Z = 57) in 3d-series.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 104.
What are rare earths?
Answer:

  • Lanthanoids or 4f-block elements are called rare earths.
  • Lanthanoids are never found in free state, and their minerals are not pure.
  • They exhibit similar chemical properties hence cannot be extracted and separated by normal metallurgical processes.
  • Lanthanoid metals are available on small scale. Therefore they are called rare earths.

Question 105.
Explain the position of lanthanoids in the periodic table.
OR
How is the position of lanthanoids justified?
Answer:

  1. Position of Lanthanoids in the periodic table : Group – 3; Period – 6.
  2. They interrupt the third transition series of t/-block elements (i.e. 5 d series) in the sixth period.
  3. They are 14 elements from 58Ce to 71Lu and their position is in between La and Hf. Since they follow lanthanum, they are called lanthanoids.
  4. They are called 4f-series elements and for the convenience, they are placed separately below the main periodic table.
  5. The actual position of lanthanoids is in between Lanthanum (Z = 57) and Hafnium (Z = 72).
  6. Their position is justified due to following reasons :
    • All these elements have the same electronic configuration in ultimate and penultimate shells, one electron in 5d-orbital and two electrons in 6s-orbital.
    • Group valence of all lanthanoids is 3.
    • All lanthanoids from 58Ce to 71Lu have similar physical and chemical properties.

Question 106.
Explain the meaning of inner-transition series.
Answer:
A series of f-block elements having electronic configuration (n – 2)f1-14 (n – I) d0-1 ns2 placed separately in the periodic table represents inner transition series. The f-orbitals lie much inside the e/ orbitals.

Since the last electron enters pre-penultimate shell, these elements are inner transition elements.

There are two inner transition series as follows :
4f-series 58Ce → 71Lu
5f-series 90Th → 103Lr

Question 107.
Draw a skeletal diagram of the periodic table to show the position of d and/- block elements.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 44

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 108.
What are the properties of lanthanoids?
Answer:

  • Lanthanoids are soft metak with silvery white colour, Colour and brightness reduces on exposure to air.
  • They are good conductors of heat and electricity.
  • Except promethium (Pm), all are non-radioactive in nature.
  • The atomic and ionic radii decrease from La to Lu. (Lanthanoid contraction).
  • Coordination numbers arc greater than 6.
  • They are paramagnetic.
  • They become ferromagnetic at lower temperature.
  • Their magnetic and optical properties are independent of environment.
  • They are called rare earths as their exiractioli was difficult.
  • They are abundant in earth’s crust
  • All lanthanoids fonn hydroxides which are ionic and basic. l3asicity decreases with atomic number,
  • They react with nitrogen to give nitrides and with halogen to give halides.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 45
  • When heated with carbon at very high temperature give carbides
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 46

Question 109.
Explain the variations in ionisation enthalpy of lanthanoids.
Answer:

  • The first ionisation enthalpy of lanthanoids is nearly same. It is very high for Gd and Yb.
  • The ionisation enthalpy increases from first (IE1] to third (IE3).

First, second and third ionization enthalpies of lanthanoids in kj/mol

Lanthanoid IE1 IE2 IE3
La 538.1 1067 1850.3
Ce 528.0 1047 1949
Pr 523.0 1018 2086
Nd 530.0 1034 2130
Pm 536.0 1052 2150
Sm 543.0 1068 2260
Eu 547.0 1085 2400
Gd 592.0 1170 1990
Tb 564.0 1112 2110
Dy 572.0 1126 2200
Ho 581.0 1139 2200
Er 589.0 1151 2190
Tm 596.7 1163 2284
Yb 603.4 1175 2415
Lu 523.5 1340 2022

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 110.
Give the general electronic configuration of 4f-series elements (OR lanthanoids).
Answer:

  • The general electronic configuration of 4f-series elements is, Ln[Xe]54 4f1-14 5d0-1 6s2 where Ln is a lanthanoid.
  • Xenon has electronic configuration, [Xe] : Is2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d10 4s2 4p6 4d10 5s2 5p6.
  • In lanthanoids, the differentiating electron enters prepenultimate shell, 4f m

Question 111.
What are the important features of the electronic configuration of lanthanoids?
Answer:

  1. Lanthanoids show two types of electronic configurations
    (a) an expected or idealized
    (b) an observed electronic configuration.
    In the idealized electronic configuration, the filling of the 4/-orbitals is regular but in the observed configuration, there is the shift of a single electron from 5d to 4/ sub-shell.
  2. Lanthanum (57) has an electronic configuration [Xe] 4f° 5d16s2. It does not have any f-electron.
  3. The next incoming electron does not enter the 5d sub-shell but goes to the 4f sub-shell.
  4. 14 electrons are progressively filled in the 4f sub-shell as the atomic number increases by one unit from La to Lu.
  5. La, Gd and Lu are the only elements which possess one electron in a 5d orbital, while in all other lanthanoids the 5d sub-shell is empty.
  6. La-(4f°), Gd-(4f7) and Lu-(4f14) posses extra stability due to their empty, half-filled and completely filled 4f-orbitals respectively.
  7. The 4f-electrons in the prepenultimate shell are shielded by the outermost higher orbitals, 5s2, 5p6, 5d1, 6s2, i.e. by eleven electrons, hence they are less effective in chemical bonding.

Electronic configuration (Idealised and observed)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 48
[Xe]54 ls22s22p63s23p63d104s24p64d105s25p6

Question 112.
Write the expected electronic configuration of (a) Nd (Z = 60) (b) Tm (Z = 69).
Answer:
Expected electronic configuration :
(a) Nd = [Xe] 4f3 5d1 6s2
(b) Tm= [Xe] 4f145d16s2

Question 113.
Write electronic configurations of
(i) Gd
(ii) Yb.
Answer:
(i) 64Gd [Xe] 4f75d16s2 (Observed)
(ii) 70Yb [Xe] 4f145d°6s2 (Observed)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 114.
Write expected and observed electronic configurations of
(i) Ce
(ii) Tb.
Answer:

Element Expected (Idealised) Observed
(i) 58Ce [Xe] 4f15d16s2 [Xe] 4f25d°6s2
(ii) 65Tb [Xe] 4f85d16s2 [Xe] 4f95d°6s2

Question 115.
Why are the expected and observed ground state electronic configurations of gadolinium and lawrencium same?
Answer:

  • The degenerate orbitals like 4f and 5f acquire extra stability when they are half filled (4f7) or completely filled (5f14).
  • The expected and observed electronic configuration of gadolinium is, 64Gd [Xe] 4f7 5d1 6s2.
  • The expected and observed electronic configuration of lawrencium is 103Lr [Rn] 5f14 6d1 7s2.

Question 116.
Explain oxidation states of lanthanoids.
Answer:

  • The common oxidation state of the Lanthanoids is 3 + due to the loss of 2 electrons from outermost 6s orbital and one electron from the penultimate 5d sub-shell.
  • Gd3+ and Lu3+ show extra stability due to their half-filled and completely filled f-orbitals, Gd3+ = [Xe]4f7, Lu3+ = [Xe]4f14
  • Ce and Tb attain the 4f° and 4f7configurations in the 4 + oxidation states. Eu and Yb attain the 4f7 and 4f14 configurations in the 2 + oxidation states. Sm and Tm also show the 2+ oxidation state although their stability can be explained based on thermodynamic factors.
  • Some lanthanoids show 2 + and 4 + oxidation states even though they do not have stable electronic configuration of 4f°, 4f7 or 4f14. E.g. Pr4+ (4f1), Nd2+ (4f4), Sm2+ (4f6), Dy4+ (4f8) etc

Question 117.
Write the. electronic configuration of the following ions :
(1) La3 + ;
(2) Gd3+;
(3) Eu3+;
(4) Ce3+.
Answer:
(1) La3 + = [Xe]
(2) Gd3+ = [Xe] 4f7
(3) Eu3+ = [Xe] 4f6
(4) Ce3+ = |Xe] 4f1

Question 118.
Write the electronic configuration of
(1) Nd2+
(2) Nd3+
(3) Nd4+.
Answer:
(1) Nd2+ [Xe] 4f4
(2) Nd3+ [Xe] 4f3
(3) Nd4+ [Xe] 4f2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 119.
Among the following lathanoids, which elements show only one oxidation state 3 +? Why? Dy, Gd, Yb, Lu.
Answer:
Gd and Lu show only one oxidation state 3 +, since they acquire electronic configurations with extra stability namely 4f7 and 4f14 respectively.

Question 120.
Write the expected electronic configurations of :
(1) europium (Z = 63),
(2) erbium (Z = 68).
Answer:
(1) Europium (63Eu) [Xe]544f6 5d1 6s2
(2) Erbium (68Er) [Xe]544f11 5d1 6s2

Question 121.
Why does lanthanum form La3+ ion, while cerium forms Ce4+ ion? (Atomic number La = 57 and Ce = 58).
Answer:

  1. Electronic configuration Lanthanum is La [Xe] 4f° 5d1 6s2. By losing three electrons, La acquires stable electronic configuration of Xe and forms La3+.
  2. Electronic configuration of Cerium is Ce [Xe] 4f1 5d1 6s2. By losing four electrons, Ce acquires stable electronic configuration of Xe and forms Ce4+.

Question 122.
63EU and 70Yb show 2 + oxidation state. Explain.
Answer:
63EU has electronic configuration, [Xe] 4f7 5d°6s2. By losing 2 electrons from 6s orbital, it acquires stable configuration and 4f-orbital is half-filled.
70Yb has electronic configuration, [Xe] 4f14 5d° 6s2. By losing 2 electrons from 6 s orbital, it acquires stable configuration and 4/-orbital is completely filled.
Hence Eu and Yb show 2 + oxidation states.

Question 123.
Display electronic configuration, atomic and ionic radii of lanthanoids.
Answer:
Answers are given in bold.

Electronic configuration and atomic ionic radii of lanthanoids
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 49

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 124.
Explain the trend in atomic and ionic sizes of lanthanoids.
Answer:

  • From 57La (187 pm) to first element of 4f-series 58Ce (183 pm), the contraction in atomic radius is very large, 4 pm.
  • But from Ce onwards as atomic number increases atomic radius decreases very steadily so that total decrease in atomic radius from Ce to Lu is only 10 pm.
  • In case of tripositive ions due to large pull by nucleus, the decrease in ionic radii is slightly more, i.e. 18 pm. For example, Ce3+ (103 pm) to Lu3+ (85 pm ).
  • Hence all lanthanoids have similar properties. Therefore they cannot be separated from each other easily by normal metallurgical methods but require special methods.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 50

Question 125.
What is meant by lanthanoid contraction?
Answer:
Lanthanoid contraction : The gradual decrease in atomic and ionic radii of lanthanoids with the increase in atomic number is called lanthanoid contraction.

Question 153.
Explain the causes of the lanthanoid contraction.
Answer:
The causes of the lanthanoid contraction are as follows :

  • As the atomic number of lanthanoids or 4f-block elements increases the positive nuclear charge increases and correspondingly electrons are added to the prepenultimate 4f sub-shell.
  • The attraction of nucleus on 4 f-electrons increases with the increase in atomic number.
  • The outer eleven electrons namely, 5s2, 5p6, 5d3 and 6s2 do not shield inner 4 f-electrons from the nucleus.
  • There is imperfect shielding of each 4f-electron from other 4 f-electrons.
  • As compared to d sub-shell, the extent of shielding for 4 f-electrons is less.
  • Due to these cumulative effects, 4 f-electrons experience greater nuclear attraction and hence valence shell is pulled towards the nucleus to the greater extent decreasing atomic and ionic radii appreciably.
  • From 57La to 58Ce, there is a sudden contraction in atomic radius from 187 pm to 183 pm but the further decrease up to the last 4f-element, 71Lu is comparatively low (about 10 pm).

Question 126.
Explain lanthanoid contraction effect with respect to (1) decrease in basicity, (2) ionic radii of post-lanthanoids.
Answer:
The lanthanoid contraction has a definite effect on the properties of lanthanoids as well as on the properties of post-lanthanoid elements.
(1) Decrease in basicity :

  • In lanthanoids due to lanthanoid contraction, as the atomic number increases, the size of the lanthanoid atoms and their try positive ions decreases, i.e. from La3+ to Lu3+.
  • As size of the cation decreases, according to Fajan’s rule, the polarizability increases and thus the covalent character of the M-OH bond increases, and ionic character decreases.
  • Therefore the basic nature of the hydroxides decreases.
  • Basicity and ionic character decrease in the order La(OH)3 > Ce(OH)3 > … Lu(OH)3.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

(2) Ionic radii of post-lanthanoids :

  • Elements following the lanthanoids in the 6th period (third transition series, i.e. 5d-series) are known as post-lanthanoids.
  • Due to lanthanoid contraction the atomic radii (size) of elements which follow lanthanum in the 6th period (3rd transition series – Hf, Ta, W, Re)-are similar to the elements of the 5th period (4d-series Zr, Nb Mo, Tc).
  • Due to similarity in their size, post-lanthanoid elements (5d-series) have closely similar properties to the elements of the 2nd transition series (4d-series) which lie immediately above them.
  • Pairs of elements namely Zr-Hf(Gr-4), Nb-Ta (Gr-5), Mo-W(Gr-6), Tc-Re (Gr-7) are called chemical twins since they possess almost identical sizes and similar properties.

Question 127.
Why do lanthanoids form coloured compounds?
Answer:

  • The colour in lanthanoid ions is due to the presence of unpaired electrons in partially filled 4f sub-shells.
  • Due to the absorption of radiations in the visible region there arises the excitations of the unpaired electrons from f-orbital of lower energy to the f-orbital of higher energy-giving f → f transitions.
  • The observed colour is complementary to the colour of the light absorbed.
  • The colour of try positive ions (M3+) depends upon the number of unpaired electrons in f-orbitals. Hence the lanthanoid ions having equal number of unpaired electrons have similar colour.
  • The colours of M3+ ions of the first seven lanthanoids, La3+ to Eu3+ are similar to those of seven elements Lu3+ to Tb3+ in the reverse order.

Question 128.
Explain, why Ce3+ ion is colourless.
Answer:

  • The electronic configuration of Ce3+ is, [Xe] 4f7
  • Even though there is one unpaired electron in 4f sub-shell, the f → f transition involves very low energy. Hence, Ce3+ ion does not absorb radiation in the visible region.

Therefore Ce3+ ion is colourless.

Question 129.
Explain why Gd3+ is colourless.
Answer:

  • Gd3+ has electronic configuration, [Xe] 4f7
  • Due to extra stability of half filled orbital, it does not allow f → f transition, and hence does not absorb radiations in the visible region.

Hence Gd3+ is colourless.

Question 130.
The salts of (1) La3+ and (2) Lu3+ are colourless. Explain.
Answer:
(1) (i) La3+ has electronic configuration, [Xe] 4f°
(ii) Since there are no unpaired electrons in 4 f-orbital, f → f transition is not possible. Hence La3+ ions do not absorb radiations in visible region, and they are colourless.

(2) (i) LU3+ has electronic configuration [Xe] 4 f14
(ii) Since there are no unpaired electrons in 4f-orbital, f → f transition is not possible. Hence Lu3+ ions do not absorb radiations in visible region and they are colourless.

Question 131.
Explain giving examples, the colour of nf electrons is about the same as those having (14-n) electrons.
Answer:
(1) Consider Pr3+ and Tm3+ ions.
Tm3+ (4f12) has nf electron 12 electrons.
Pr2+ (4f2) has (14 – n) = (14 – 2) = 12 electrons. Both, Tm3+ and Pr3+ are green.

(2) Consider Nd3+ and Er3+ ions. Er3+ (4f11) has nf electrons 11.
Nd3+ (4f3) has (14 – n) is (14 – 3) = 11 electrons. These both ions Er3+, Na3+ are pink in colour.

Question 132.
Lu3+ has observed magnetic moment zero. How many unpaired electrons are present?
Answer:
Since magnetic moment is zero, it has no unpaired electrons.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 133.
What are the application of lanthanoids?
Answer:

  1. Lanthanoid compounds are used inside the colour television tubes and computer monitor. For example mixed oxide (Eu, Y)2 O3 releases an intense red colour when bombarded with high energy electrons.
  2. Lanthanoid ions are used as active ions in luminescent materials. (Optoelectronic application)
  3. Nd : YAG laser is the most notable application. (Nd : YAG = neodymium doped ytterium aluminium garnet)
  4. Erbium doped fibre amplifiers are used in optical fibre communication systems.
  5. Lanthanoids are used in cars, superconductors and permanent magnets.

Question 134.
What are actinoids? Give their general electronic configuration.
Answer:

  • Actinoids : The series of fourteen elements from 90Th to 103Lr which follow actinium (89Ac) and in which differentiating electrons are progressively filled in 5f-orbitals in prepenultimate shell are called actinoids.
  • Their general electronic configuration is, [Rn]86 5f1-14 6d0-1 7s2.

Question 135.
Why are actinoids called inner transition elements?
Answer:

  • Actinoids are 5f-series elements in which electrons progressively enter into 5f-orbitals, which are inner orbitals.
  • They have electronic configuration [Rn]86 5f1-14 6d0-1 7s2.
  • They show intermediate properties as compared to electropositive 5-block elements and electronegative p-block elements. Hence they are called second inner transition elements.

Question 136.
Explain the position of actinoids in the periodic table.
OR
What is the position of actinoids in the periodic table?
Answer:

  • Position of actinoids in the periodic table : Group-3; Period-7.
  • They interrupt the fourth transition series (6d series) in the seventh period in the periodic table.
  • After Actinium, 89Ac which has electronic configuration [Rn] 6d17s2, the electrons enter progressively 5f orbital and they have general electronic configuration, [Rn] 5f1 – 14 6d0 – 1 7s2.
  • They are fourteen elements from 90Th to 103Lr and since they follow actinium, they are called actinoids.
  • They are called 5f series or second inner transition series elements and for the convenience they are placed separately below the periodic table.

Question 137.
Write idealised and observed electronic configuration of actinoids.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 52

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 138.
Explain the oxidation states of actinoids.
Answer:

  • Due to availability of electrons in 5f, 6d and 7s sublevels, lanthanoids show varied oxidation states.
  • The most common oxidation state is + 3 due to loss of one electron from 6d and two electrons from 6s-orbitals.
  • Ac, Th and Am show + 2 oxidation state.
  • Th, Pa, U, Np, Pu, Am and Cm show + 4 oxidation state.
  • Np and Pu show the highest oxidation state + 7.
  • U, Np, Bk, Cm and Am show stable oxidation state + 4.
  • In + 6 oxidation state, due to high charge density the actinoid ions form oxygenated ions, e.g. \(\mathrm{UO}_{2}^{+}, \mathrm{NpO}_{2}^{+},\) etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 53

Question 139.
Why do actinoids show variable oxidation states?
Answer:

  • The large number of variable oxidation states of actinoids is due to very small energy difference between 5f, 6d and 7s subshells.
  • The electronic configuration of actinoids is, [Rn] 5f1-14 6d0-1, 7s2
  • Due to the loss of three electrons from 6d1 and 7s2, the common oxidation state is + 3, but due to further loss of electrons from 5f subshell, actinoids show higher oxidation states.
  • The variable oxidation states are + 2 to + 7.

Electronic configuration of actinoids and their ionic radii in + 3 oxidation state
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 54

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 140.
What is meant by actinoid contraction?
Answer:
Actinoid contraction: The gradual decrease in atomic and ionic radii of actinoids with the increase in atomic number is called actinoid contraction.

Question 141.
The extent of actinoid contraction is greater than lanthanoid contraction. Explain Why?
Answer:

  • The electronic configurations of :
    Lanthanoids [Xe] 4f1 – 14 5d0 – 1 6s2
    Actinoids [Rn] 5f1 – 14, 6d0 – 1 7s2
  • The mutual screening offered in case of 5f-electrons is less than that in the 4f-electrons.
  • Hence, the outer orbitals are pulled to the greater extent by nuclei in actinoids (5f-series) than in lanthanoids (4f-series).
  • Therefore, actinoid contraction is greater than lanthanoid contraction.

Question 142.
Describe the important properties of actinoids.
Answer:
Properties of actinoids :

  • Actinoids are silvery white ( similar to lanthanoids).
  • They are highly reactive radioactive elements.
  • Most of these elements are not found in nature. They are radioactive and man made.
  • They experience decrease in the atomic and ionic radii from Ac to Lw, known as actinoid contraction.
  • The common oxidation state is +3. Elements of the first half of the series exhibit higher oxidation states.

Question 143.
What are the applications of actinoids?
Answer:

  • Thorium oxide (ThO2) with 1% CeO2 is used as a major source of indoor lighting, as well as for outdoor camping.
  • Uranium is used in the nuclear reactors.
  • The isotopes of Thorium and Uranium have very long half-life, so that we get very negligible radiation from them: Hence they can be used safely.

Question 144.
What are transuranic elements?
Answer:

  • The man-made elements heavier titan Uranium (Z = 92) in the Actinoid señes are called transuranic elements.
  • These are synthetically or artificially prepared (man-made) elements starting from Neptunium (Z= 93).
  • Transuranic elements arc generally considered to be from Neptunium (Z = 93) to Lawrencium (Z = 103).
  • Recently elements from atomic number 104 (Rf) to atomic number 118 (Og) or (Uuo) in 6 d series have also been identified as transuranic elements.
  • All transuranic elements are radioactive.

Question 145.
What are post actinoid elements?
Answer:

  • Elements from atomic number 104 to 118 are called postactinoid elements.
  • The post actinoid elements known so far are transition metals.
  • They can be synthesised in the nuclear reactions.
  • As they have very short half life period, it is difficult to study their chemistry.
  • Ruiherfordium forms a chloride (RfCl4) similar to zirconium and hafnium in + 4 oxidation state.
  • Dubniurn resembles niobium and protactinium.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 146.
Name the transuranic elements.
Answer:
Names of transuranic elements

Name Symbol Atomic number
Neptunium Np 93
Plutonium Pu 94
Americium Am 95
Curium Cm 96
Berkelium Bk 97
Californium Cf 98
Einsteinium Es 99
Ferminum Fm 100
Mendelevium Md 101
Nobelium No 102
Lawrencium Lr 103
Rutherfordium Rf 104
Dubnium Db 105
Seaborgium Sg 106
Bohrium Bh 107
Hassium Hs 108
Meitnerium Mt 109
Darmstadtium Uun/Ds 110
Roentgenium Uuu/Rg 111
Copernicium Uub/Cn 112
Ununtrium Uut 113
Ununquadium Uuq 114
Ununpentium Uup 115
Ununhexium Uuh 116
Ununseptium Uus 117
Ununoctium Uuo 118

In the transuranic elements, elements from atomic number 93 to 103 are actinoids and from atomic number 104 to 118 are called postactinoid elements.

Question 147.
What are the similarities between lanthanides and actinides.
Answer:
Lanthanides and actinides show similarities as follows :

  • Both, lanthanides and actinides show+ 3 oxidation state.
  • In both the series, the f-orbitals are filled gradually.
  • Ionic radius of the elements in both the series decreases with increase in atomic number.
  • Electronegativity in both the series is low for all the elements.
  • They all are highly reactive.
  • The nitrates, perchlorates and sulphates of all elements are soluble while their hydroxides, theorides and carbonates
    are insoluble.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Question 148.
Differentiate between lanthanoids and actinoids.
Answer:

Lanthanoids Actinoids
Electronic configuration [Xe] 4f1-14 5d0-1, 6s2 Electronic configuration [Rn] 5f1-14 6d0-1, 7s2
The differentiating electron enters the 4f subshell. The differentiating electron enters the 5f subshell.
Except for Promethium all other elements occur in nature. Except for Uranium and Thorium, all others are synthesized in the laboratory.
The binding energy of 4f electrons is higher. 5f-orbitals have lower binding energy.
Only Promethium is radioactive. All elements are radioactive.
Besides 3 + oxidation state they show 2 + and 4 + oxidation states. Besides 3 + oxidation state they show 2 + , 4 + , 5 + , 6 + , 7 + oxidation states.
They have a less tendency to form complexes. They have greater tendency to form complexes.
Many lanthanoid ions are colourless. Their colour is not as deep and sharp as actinoids. Actinoids are coloured ions. Their colour is deep, e.g. U3+ is red and U4+ is green.
Lanthanoids cannot form oxo-cations. Actinoids form oxo-cations such as – UO2+, PuO2+, UO22+, PuO22+.
Lanthanoid hydroxides are less basic. Actinoid hydroxides are more basic.
Lanthanoid contraction is relatively less. Actinoid contraction from element to element is comparatively more.
Mutual shielding of 4f electrons is more. Mutual shielding effect of 5f electrons is less.

Question 149.
Compare Pre-transition metals, Lanthanoid and transition metals.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements 55

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 150.
Select and write the most appropriate answer from the given alternatives for each sub-question :

1. In transition elements, the different electron enters into
(a) ns subshell
(b) np subshell
(c) (n – 1) d subshell
(d) (n – 2)f subshell
Answer:
(c) (n – 1) d subshell

2. Chromium (Z = 24) has electronic configuration
(a) [Ar]4dA 4s2
(b) [Ar] 4d5 451
(c) [Ar] 3d5 3s1
(d) [Ar] 3d5 4s1
Answer:
(d) [Ar] 3d5 4s1

3. Manganese achieves the highest oxidation state in its compounds
(a) Mn3O4
(b) KMnO4
(c) K2MnO4
(d) MnO2
Answer:
(b) KMnO4

4. The group which belongs to transition series is
(a) 2
(b) 7
(c) 13
(d) 15
Answer:
(b) 7

5. The last electron of transition element is called
(a) s-electron
(b) p-electron
(c) d-electron
(d) f-electron
Answer:
(c) d-electron

6. Which one of the following elements does NOT belong to first transition series?
(a) Fe
(b) V
(c) Ag
(d) Cu
Answer:
(c) Ag

7. The incomplete d-series is
(a) 3d
(b) 4d
(c) 5d
(d) 6d
Answer:
(d) 6d

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

8. The electronic configuration of Sc is
(a) [Ar] 3d2 4s2
(b) [Ar] 3d1 4s2
(c) [Kr] 3d1 4s2
(d) [Kr] 3d2 4s1
Answer:
(b) [Ar] 3d1 4s2

9. The observed electronic configuration of copper is
(a) [Ar]18 3d9 4s2
(b) [Kr] 3d10 451
(c) [Kr] 3d9 4s2
(d) [Ar] 3d10 451
Answer:
(d) [Ar] 3d10 451

10. Fe belongs to the
(a) 3d-transition series elements
(b) 4d-transition series elements
(c) 5d-transition series elements
(d) 6d-transition series elements
Answer:
(a) 3d-transition series elements

11. Which one of the following elements does not exhibit variable oxidation states?
(a) Iron
(b) Copper
(c) Zinc
(d) Manganese
Answer:
(c) Zinc

12. In KMnO4, oxidation number of Mn is
(a) 2+
(b) 4 +
(c) 6 +
(d) 7+
Answer:
(d) 7+

13. Which one of the following transition elements shows the highest oxidation state?
(a) Sc
(b) Ti
(c) Mn
(d) Zn
Answer:
(c) Mn

14. The colour of transition metal ions is due to
(a) s → s transition
(b) d → d transition
(c) p → p transition
(d) f → f transition
Answer:
(b) d → d transition

15. Which one of the following compounds is expected to be coloured?
(a) AgNO3
(b) CuSO4
(c) ZnCl2
(d) CuCl
Answer:
(b) CuSO4

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

16. The metal ion which is NOT coloured, is
(a) Fe3+
(b) V2+
(c) Zn2+
(d) Ti3+
Answer:
(c) Zn2+

17. A pair of coloured ion is
(a)Cu2+, Zn2+
(b)Cr3+ , Cu+
(c) Cd2+, Mn5+
(d) Fe2+, Fe3+
Answer:
(d) Fe2+, Fe3+

18. The highest oxidation state is shown by
(a) Fe
(b) Mn
(c) Os
(d) Cr
Answer:
(c) Os

19. Transition elements are good catalysts since
(a) they show variable oxidation states
(b) they have partially filled d-orbitals
(c) they have low I.P
(d) they have small atomic radii
Answer:
(a) they show variable oxidation states

20. Highest magnetic moment is shown by the ion
(a) V3+
(b) Co3+
(c) Fe3+
(d) Cr3+
Answer:
(c) Fe3+

21. The most common oxidation state of lanthanoids is
(a) +4
(b) +3
(c) +6
(d) +2
Answer:
(b) +3

22. Which one of the following elements belong to the actinoid series?
(a) Cerium
(b) Lutetium
(c) Thorium
(d) Lanthanum
Answer:
(c) Thorium

23. The total number of elements in each of f-series is
(a) 10
(b) 12
(c) 14
(d) 15
Answer:
(c) 14

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

24. The general electronic configuration of Lanthanoids is
(a) [Xe] 4f1 – 14 5d0 – 1 6s2
(b) [Xe] 4f2 – 14 5d0 – 1 6s2
(c) [Xe] 4f1 – 13 5d0 – 1 6s2
(d) [Xe] 4f0 – 14 5d0 – 1 6s1
Answer:
(a) [Xe] 4f1 – 14 5d0 – 1 6s2

25. f-block elements are called ………………….
(a) transition elements
(b) representative elements
(c) inner transition elements
(d) alkalin earth metals
Answer:
(c) inner transition elements

26. Actinoids form coloured salts due to the transition of electrons in
(a) d – d
(b) f – f
(c) f – d
(d) s – f
Answer:
(b) f – f

27. In the periodic table, Gadolinium belongs to
(a) 4th Group 6th period
(b) 4th group 4th period
(c) 3rd group 5th period
(d) 3rd group 7th period.
Answer:
(d) 3rd group 7th period.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Transition and Inner Transition Elements

28. The transuranic elements are prepared by
(a) addition reaction
(b) substitution reactions
(c) decomposition reaction
(d) nuclear reactions
Answer:
(d) nuclear reactions

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Question 1.
Define cell.
Answer:
Cell is defined as a structural and functional unit of life of all living organisms capable of independent existence and can perform all functions of life.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Question 2.
Write information about the instrument which is used for observing smaller organisms or cells.
Answer:

  1. To observe cells or organisms of smaller size we use a microscope.
  2. Larger cells can be seen through simple microscope but to observe smaller cells we require compound microscope.
  3. Simple microscope can magnify image 50 to 100 times but a compound microscope can do so 1000 times or more.
  4. In the microscope a beam of light is used to make things visible hence it is light microscope.
  5. To observe interior of cell we need electron microscope which can magnify image 500000 times.

Question 3.
Write the shapes of the cells that can be observed.
Answer:
There is no typical shape of a cell. Cells may be spherical, rectangular, flattened, polygonal, oval, triangular, conical, columnar, etc.

Question 4.
1. Smallest cell
2. Longest cell in animals
3. Largest cell
Answer:
1. Mycoplasma (0.3 µm)
2. Nerve cell
3. Ostrich egg

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Question 5.
Explain the term totipotency.
Answer:

  1. Totipotency (totus – entire, potential – power) is the capacity or the potential of living nucleated cell, to differentiate into any other type of cell and thus, can form a complete new organism.
  2. A cell is totipotent as it has the entire genetic information of the organism stored in its nucleus.
  3. Embryonic animal cells are totipotent and are termed as stem cells.
  4. Stem cells are used in curing many diseases. Therefore, they have great potential for medical applications.

Question 6.
Who proposed the cell theory?
Answer:
Schwann and Schleiden proposed the cell theory.

Question 7.
Give the postulates of modern cell theory.
Answer:
Postulates of modern cell theory:

  1. All living organisms are made up of cells.
  2. Cell is the basic structural and functional unit of life.
  3. All cells arise from pre-existing cells. (Rudolf Virchow 1858 – “Omnis cellula-e-cellula”).
  4. Total activities of cells are responsible for activity of an organism.
  5. Cells show transformation of energy.
  6. Cells contain nucleic acids; DNA and RNA in the nucleus and cytoplasm.

Question 8.
State the two general categories on which living organisms are grouped.
Answer:
Living organisms are grouped into two main categories the Prokaryotes and Eukaryotes.

Question 9.
State the general characteristics of prokaryotic cell.
Answer:
General characteristics of prokaryotic cell:
1. Prokaryotic cells are primitive type of cells.
2. It does not have membrane bound cell organelles (like endoplasmic reticulum, Golgi complex, mitochondria, etc.) and well-defined nucleus (nuclear membrane is absent).
3. Genetic material is in the form of nucleoid.

4. Cell envelope:
a. Prokaryotic cell has chemically complex protective cell envelope having glycocalyx, cell wall and plasma membrane.
b. In some bacteria, glycocalyx occurs in the form of a slime layer (loose sheath). Other bacteria may have a thick and tough covering called capsule. It helps in protection of bacterial cell.

5. Cell wall:
The Gram-positive bacteria show presence of peptidoglycan layer in the cell wall and Gram-negative bacteria show presence of murein in the cell wall. It gives mechanical strength to the cell.
[Note: In Gram-negative bacteria, cell wall is made up of two layers; inner layer of Murein or peptidoglycan and outer layer of Lipopolysaccharides.]

6. Cell membrane:
a. It is the innermost covering of the cell envelope, chemically composed of lipids and proteins.
b. It helps in intercellular communication.
c. Cell membrane shows infoldings called mesosomes which help in cell wall formation, cellular respiration and DNA replication.
d. The cyanobacteria show longer extensions called as chromatophores which carry photosynthetic pigments.

7. In motile bacteria either cilia or flagella are found. Both are driven by rotatory movement produced by basal body (which works as motor) of flagellum. Other parts of flagellum are filament and hook.

8. Some other surface projections are the tubular pili (which help in inter-cellular communication) and fimbriae (for clinging to support).

9. Ribosomes:
Bacterial cell cytoplasm contains dense particles called ribosomes which help in protein synthesis. Ribosomes are 70S type (composed of a larger sub-unit 50S and + smaller sub-unit 30S).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Question 10.
What is the difference between Gram-positive and Gram-negative bacterial cells? Name the technique used for differentiating such bacterial cells.
Answer:
The Gram-positive bacteria show presence of peptidoglycan layer in the cell wall and Gram-negative bacteria show presence of murein in the cell wall. The technique used for differentiating bacterial cells is Gram staining.
[Note: Murein is similar to peptidoglycan in structure and function. It is present in the cell walls of archaebacteria.

Question 11.
Write the constituents of prokaryotic cytoplasm.
Answer:
1. Cytoplasm of prokaryotes is a pool of all necessary materials like water, enzymes, elements, amino acids, etc.
2. Some inclusion bodies in form of organic (cyanophycean starch and glycogen) and inorganic granules (phosphate and sulphur) are also found.

Question 12.
Fill in the blanks.

  1. Genetic material in bacterium is a single chromosome made up of circular and coiled _______.
  2. The bacterial chromosome remains attached to _________.
  3. The _________ model of replication is observed in bacterial cells.
  4. _________ present in the bacterial cells are known as extrachromosomal self-replicating DNA.

Answer:

  1. DNA
  2. Mesosomes
  3. Theta
  4. Plasmids

Question 13.
What are eukaryotic cells?
Answer:
1. Eukaryotic cells are the cells possessing well-defined nucleus and membrane bound organelles (like mitochondria, endoplasmic reticulum, ribosomes, Golgi complex etc.).
2. Eukaryotes include protists, plants, animals and fungi.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Question 14.
Write a note on cell wall in Eukaryotic cells.
Answer:

  • The rigid, protective and supportive covering, outside the cell membrane is called cell wall. It is present in plant cells, fungi and some protists.
  • Algae show presence of cellulose, galactans, mannans and minerals like calcium carbonate in cell wall.
  • In other plants, it is made up of hemicelluloses, pectin, lipids and protein.
  • Microfibrils of plant cell wall show presence of cellulose which is responsible for rigidity.
  • Some of the depositions of cell wall are silica (grass stem), cutin (epidermal walls of land plants), suberin (endodermal cells of root), wax, lignin.
  • Function:
    • Provides support, rigidity and shape to the cell.
    • Protects the protoplasm against mechanical injury and infections.

Question 15.
Explain the structure of plant cell wall.
Answer:
In plants, cell wall shows middle lamella, primary wall and secondary wall
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization 1
1. Middle lamella:
It is thin and present between two adjacent r cells. It is the first structure formed from cell plate during cytokinesis. It is mainly made up of pectin, calcium and magnesium pectate. Softening of ripe fruit is due to solubilization of pectin.
2. Primary wall:
In young plant cell, it is capable of growth. It is laid inside to middle lamella.
It is the only wall seen in meristematic tissue, mesophyll, pith, etc.
3. Secondary wall:
It is present inner to primary wall. Once the growth of primary wall stops, secondary wall is laid. At some places thickening is absent which leads to formation of pits.

Question 16.
Draw a well labelled diagram of a plant cell.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization 2

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Question 17.
Give an account of eukaryotic plasma membrane.
Answer:
Eukaryotic plasma membrane/ Cell membrane/ Biomembrane:

  1. It is thin, quasi-fluid structure present both extracellularly and intracellularly.
  2. Extracellularly, it is present around protoplast and intracellularly, it is present around most of the cell organelles in eukaryotic cell. It separates cell organelles from cytosol.
  3. Thickness of bio-membrane is about 75A.
  4. Cell membrane appears trilaminar (made up of three layers) when observed under electron microscope. It shows presence of lipids (mostly phospholipids) arranged in bilayer.
  5. Lipids possess one hydrophilic polar head and two hydrophobic non-polar tails. Therefore, phospholipids are amphipathic.
  6. Lipid molecules are arranged in two layers (bilayer) in such a way that their tails are sandwiched in between heads. Due to this, tails never come in direct contact with aqueous surrounding.
  7. Cell membrane also shows presence of proteins and carbohydrates.
  8. Ratio of proteins and lipids varies in different cells. For example, in human beings, RBCs show approximately 52% protein and 40% lipids.

Question 18.
Explain the structure of plasma membrane on the basis of Fluid mosaic model.
Answer:
Fluid mosaic model:

  1. Fluid mosaic model was proposed by Singer and Nicholson (1972).
  2. This model states that plasma membrane is made up of phospholipid bilayer and proteins.
  3. Proteins are embedded in the lipid membrane like icebergs in the sea of lipids.
  4. Phospholipid bilayer is fluid in nature.
  5. Quasi-fluid nature of lipid enables lateral movement of proteins. This ability to move within the membrane is measured as fluidity.
  6. Based on organization of membrane proteins they are of two types, as:

a. The intrinsic proteins occur at different depths of bilayer i.e. they are tightly bound to the phospholipid bilayer and are embedded in it. They span the entire thickness of the membrane. Therefore, they are known as transmembrane proteins. They form channels for passage of water.
b. The extrinsic or peripheral proteins are found on two surfaces of the membrane i.e. are loosely held to the phospholipid layer and can be easily removed.

Question 19.
Draw neat and labelled diagram of structure of plasma membrane proposed by Singer and Nicolson.
Answer:
Fluid mosaic model:

  1. Fluid mosaic model was proposed by Singer and Nicholson (1972).
  2. This model states that plasma membrane is made up of phospholipid bilayer and proteins.
  3. Proteins are embedded in the lipid membrane like icebergs in the sea of lipids.
  4. Phospholipid bilayer is fluid in nature.
  5. Quasi-fluid nature of lipid enables lateral movement of proteins. This ability to move within the membrane is measured as fluidity.
  6. Based on organization of membrane proteins they are of two types, as:

a. The intrinsic proteins occur at different depths of bilayer i.e. they are tightly bound to the phospholipid bilayer and are embedded in it. They span the entire thickness of the membrane. Therefore, they are known as transmembrane proteins. They form channels for passage of water.
b. The extrinsic or peripheral proteins are found on two surfaces of the membrane i.e. are loosely held to the phospholipid layer and can be easily removed.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Question 20.
Give the functions of plasma membrane.
Answer:
1. The significant function of plasma membrane is transport of molecules across it. Plasma membrane is selectively permeable.

2. Passive transport:
a. Many molecules move across the membrane without spending energy.
b. Some molecules move by simple diffusion along the concentration gradient i.e. from higher to lower concentration.
c. Neutral molecules may move across the membrane by the process of simple diffusion.
d. Water may also move by osmosis.

3. Active transport:
a. Few ions or molecules are transported against concentration gradient i.e. from lower to higher concentration.
b. This requires energy, hence ATP is utilized. As such a transport is an energy dependent process in which ATP is utilized, it is called Active transport e.g. Na+ /K+ pump.
c. Polar molecules cannot pass through non-polar lipid bilayer. Therefore, they require carrier proteins to facilitate their transport across the membrane.

Question 21.
Write a note on cytoplasm in Eukaryotic cell.
Answer:
Cytoplasm in Eukaryotic cell:

  1. The cell contains ground substance called cytoplasmic matrix or cytosol.
  2. This colloidal jelly like material shows streaming movements called cyclosis.
  3. The cytoplasm contains water as major component along with organic and inorganic molecules like sugars, amino acids, vitamins, enzymes, nucleotides, minerals and waste products.
  4. It also contains various membrane-bound cell organelles like endoplasmic reticulum, Golgi complex, mitochondria, plastids, nucleus, microbodies and cytoskeletal elements like microtubules.
  5. Cytoplasm acts as a source of raw materials as well as seat for various metabolic activities taking place in the cell.
  6. It helps in distribution and exchange of materials between various cell organelles.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Question 22.
Explain the endomembrane system of the cell.
Answer:

  1. Cell organelles are compartments in the cell that carry out specific functions.
  2. Some of these organelles coordinate with each other and complete the specific function of the cell.
  3. Nuclear membrane, endoplasmic reticulum, Golgi complex, lysosomes and various types of vesicles and vacuoles form such a group and are together considered as endomembrane system of the cell.

Question 23.
Why mitochondria and chloroplasts are not considered as a part of endomembrane system?
Answer:
1. Organelles having distinct functions are not included in endomembrane system.
2. Mitochondria or chloroplast carry out specific type of energy conversions in the cell. Therefore, mitochondria and chloroplasts are not considered as a part of endomembrane system.

Question 24.
Describe the structure of Endoplasmic Reticulum.
Answer:

  1. Endoplasmic reticulum is a network present within the cytosol.
  2. It is present in all a cells except ova and mature red blood corpuscles.
  3. Under the electron microscope, it appears like network of membranous tubules and sacs called cisternae.
  4. This network of ER divides the cytoplasm in two parts viz. one within the lumen of ER called laminal cytoplasm and non-laminal cytoplasm that lies outside ER.
  5. Membrane of ER is continuous with nuclear envelope at one end and extends till cell membrane. It thus acts as intracellular supporting framework and helps in maintaining position of various cell organelles in the cytoplasm.
  6. Depending upon the presence or absence of ribosomes, endoplasmic reticulum is called rough endoplasmic reticulum (RER) or smooth endoplasmic reticulum (SER) respectively.

Question 25.
Label the diagram
Answer:

  1. Endoplasmic reticulum is a network present within the cytosol.
  2. It is present in all a cells except ova and mature red blood corpuscles.
  3. Under the electron microscope, it appears like network of membranous tubules and sacs called cisternae.
  4. This network of ER divides the cytoplasm in two parts viz. one within the lumen of ER called laminal cytoplasm and non-laminal cytoplasm that lies outside ER.
  5. embrane of ER is continuous with nuclear envelope at one end and extends till cell membrane. It thus acts as intracellular supporting framework and helps in maintaining position of various cell organelles in the cytoplasm.
  6. Depending upon the presence or absence of ribosomes, endoplasmic reticulum is called rough endoplasmic reticulum (RER) or smooth endoplasmic reticulum (SER) respectively.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Question 26.
Explain the structure, location and functions of Golgi complex.
Answer:
Golgi complex or Golgi apparatus or Golgi body act as a assembly, manufacturing cum packaging and transport unit of cell.
1. Structure of Golgi complex:
a. Golgi complex consists of stacks of membranous sacs called cistemae.
b. Diameter of cistemae varies from 0.5 to 1pm.
c. A Golgi complex may have few to several cistemae depending on its function.
d. The thickness and molecular composition of membranes at one end of the stack of a Golgi sac differ from those at the other end.
e. The Golgi sacs show specific orientation in the cell.
f. Each cistema has a forming or ‘cis’ face (cis: on the same side) and maturing or ‘trans’ face (trAnswer:the opposite side).
g. Transport vesicles that pinch off from transitional ER merge with cis face of Golgi cistema and add its contents into the lumen.

2. Location of Golgi complex:
Golgi bodies are usually located near endoplasmic reticulum.

3. Functions of Golgi complex:
a. Golgi body carries out two types of functions, modification of secretions of ER and production of its own secretions.
b. Cistemae contain specific enzymes for specific functions.
c. Refining (modification) of product takes place in a sequential manner.
d. For example, certain sugar component is added or removed from glycolipids and glycoproteins that are brought from ER, thus forming a variety of products.
e. Golgi bodies also manufacture their own products. Golgi bodies in many plant cells produce non-cellulose polysaccharides like pectin.
f. Manufactured or modified, all products of Golgi complex leave cistemae from trans face as transport vesicles.

Question 27.
How transport vesicles identify their target cell or cell membrane?
Answer:
While transport vesicles are leaving from the trans face of the Golgi, certain markers get impregnated on their membrane. These markers help them to identify their specific target cell or cell organelle.

Question 28.
Label the diagrams and write down the details of concept in your words.
Answer:
Golgi complex or Golgi apparatus or Golgi body act as a assembly, manufacturing cum packaging and transport unit of cell.
1. Structure of Golgi complex:
a. Golgi complex consists of stacks of membranous sacs called cistemae.
b. Diameter of cistemae varies from 0.5 to 1pm.
c. A Golgi complex may have few to several cistemae depending on its function.
d. The thickness and molecular composition of membranes at one end of the stack of a Golgi sac differ from those at the other end.
e. The Golgi sacs show specific orientation in the cell.
f. Each cistema has a forming or ‘cis’ face (cis: on the same side) and maturing or ‘trans’ face (trAnswer:the opposite side).
g. Transport vesicles that pinch off from transitional ER merge with cis face of Golgi cistema and add its contents into the lumen.

2. Location of Golgi complex:
Golgi bodies are usually located near endoplasmic reticulum.

3. Functions of Golgi complex:
a. Golgi body carries out two types of functions, modification of secretions of ER and production of its own secretions.
b. Cistemae contain specific enzymes for specific functions.
c. Refining (modification) of product takes place in a sequential manner.
d. For example, certain sugar component is added or removed from glycolipids and glycoproteins that are brought from ER, thus forming a variety of products.
e. Golgi bodies also manufacture their own products. Golgi bodies in many plant cells produce non-cellulose polysaccharides like pectin.
f. Manufactured or modified, all products of Golgi complex leave cistemae from trans face as transport vesicles.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Question 29.
Write a note on lysosomes and make a list of lysosomal enzymes.
Answer:
Lysosomes:

  1. Lysosomes are considered as dismantling and restructuring units of a cell.
  2. These are membrane bound vesicles containing hydrolytic enzymes. The enzymes in lysosomes are used by most eukaryotic cells to digest (hydrolyse) macromolecules.
  3. The lysosomal enzymes show optimal activity in acidic pH.
  4. Lysosomes arise from Golgi associated endoplasmic reticulum.
  5. Lysosomes are polymorphic in nature and are classified as primary lysosomes, secondary or hybrid lysosomes, residual body and autophagic vesicle.
  6. The list of lysosomal enzymes includes:
    All types of hydrolases viz, amylases, proteases and lipases.

Question 30.
“Lysosomes are polymorphic in nature.” Justify the statement.
Answer:

  1. Lysosomes are classified as, Primary lysosomes; which are nothing but membrane bound vesicles in which enzymes are in inactive state.
  2. Secondary lysosomes or hybrid lysosomes, which are formed by fusion of lysosome with endocytic vesicle containing materials to be digested, represented as heterophagic vesicle. This is larger in size than primary lysosome.
  3. When organic molecules or membrane bound old cell organelle to be recycled fuses with primary lysosome, autophagic vesicles are formed.
  4. Residual body is the vesicle containing undigested remains left over in the heterophagic vesicle after releasing the products of digestion in the cytosol. Hence, lysosomes are polymorphic in nature.

Question 31.
“Lysosomes are called suicide bags of the cells”. Why?
Answer:

  1. Lysosomes which bring about digestion of cell’s own organic material like a damaged cell organelle are called autophagic vesicle (suicide bags).
  2. An autophagic vesicle essentially consists of lysosome fused with membrane bound old cell organelle or organic molecules to be recycled.
  3. Thus, lysosomes are capable of destructing all kinds of material in the cell. Therefore, can digest its own cell organelles due to presence of lysosome. Hence, lysosomes are also called as suicide bags.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Question 32.
Write a note on vacuoles.
Answer:
The organelle which helps in maintaining turgidity of the cell and a proper internal balance of cellular contents is known as vacuole.

  1. The vacuoles are bound by semipermeable membrane, called tonoplast membrane. This membrane helps in maintaining the composition of vacuolar fluid (cell sap), different from that of the cytosol.
  2. Composition of cell sap differs in different types of cells.
  3. In vacuoles along with excretory products other compounds are stored that are harmful or unpalatable to herbivores, thereby protecting the plants.
  4. Attractive colours of the petals are due to storage of such pigments in vacuoles.
  5. Generally, there are two or three permanent vacuoles in a plant cell.
  6. In some large plant cells, a single large vacuole occupies the central part of the cell. It is called central vacuole. In such cells, vacuole can occupy about 90% of the total volume of the cell.
  7. The cell sap of central vacuole is a store house of various ions and thus is hypertonic to cytosol.
  8. Small vacuoles in seeds of certain plants store organic materials like proteins.
  9. In animal cells, they are few in number and smaller in size.
  10. Intake of food or foreign particle by phagocytosis involves formation of food vacuole.

Question 33.
What is the function of contractile vacuole in Paramoecium?
Answer:
Contractile vacuole performs excretion and osmoregulation in fresh water unicellular forms like Paramoecium.

Question 34.
What are microbodies? Mention their types and functions.
Answer:
Microbodies are minute membrane bound sacs found in both plant and animal cells. Microbodies contain various types of enzymes based on which they are classified into following types:
1. Sphaerosomes:
a. These are found mainly in cells involved in synthesis and storage of fats. For e. g. endosperm of oil seeds.
b. The membrane of sphaerosome is half unit membrane i.e. this membrane has only one phospholipid layer.

2. Peroxisomes:
a. Peroxisomes contain enzymes that remove hydrogen atoms from substrate and produce toxic hydrogen peroxide by utilisation of oxygen.
b. At the same time peroxisome also contains enzymes that convert toxic H202 to water. Conversion of toxic substances like alcohol takes place in liver cells by peroxisomes.

Question 35.
Draw a neat and labelled diagram and explain the functions of glyoxysomes.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization 3
Glyoxysomes are membrane bound organelles containing enzymes that convert fatty acids to sugar. They are observed in cells of germinating seeds where the cells utilize sugar (formed by conversion of stored fatty acids) till it starts photosynthesising on its own.

Question 36.
Describe the structure of mitochondria.
Answer:
Mitochondrion is known as the power house of the cell. It plays significant role in aerobic respiration. Mitochondria are absent in prokaryotic cells and red blood corpuscles (RBCs).

The structure of mitochondrion:

  1. Shape of the mitochondria may be oval or spherical or like spiral strip.
  2. It is a double membrane bound organelle.
  3. Outer membrane is permeable to various metabolites due to presence of a protein-Porin or Parson’s particles.
  4. Inner membrane is selectively permeable to few substances only.
  5. Both membranes are separated by intermembrane space.
  6. Inner membrane shows several finger like or plate like folds called as cristae which bears numerous particles oxysomes and cytochromes / electron carriers.
  7. Inner membrane encloses a cavity called inner chamber, containing a fluid-matrix.
  8. Matrix contains few coils of circular DNA, RNA, 70S types of ribosomes, lipids and various enzymes of Krebs’ cycle and other pathways.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Question 37.
Label the diagram and write down the details of concept in your words.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization 4
Answer:
Mitochondrion is known as the power house of the cell. It plays significant role in aerobic respiration. Mitochondria are absent in prokaryotic cells and red blood corpuscles (RBCs).

The structure of mitochondrion:

  1. Shape of the mitochondria may be oval or spherical or like spiral strip.
  2. It is a double membrane bound organelle.
  3. Outer membrane is permeable to various metabolites due to presence of a protein-Porin or Parson’s particles.
  4. Inner membrane is selectively permeable to few substances only.
  5. Both membranes are separated by intermembrane space.
  6. Inner membrane shows several finger like or plate like folds called as cristae which bears numerous particles oxysomes and cytochromes / electron carriers.
  7. Inner membrane encloses a cavity called inner chamber, containing a fluid-matrix.
  8. Matrix contains few coils of circular DNA, RNA, 70S types of ribosomes, lipids and various enzymes of Krebs’ cycle and other pathways.

Question 38.
Identify and label the following structure. Write a note on it.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization 5
Answer:
1. The given structure is of Oxysome/ F1 Particle.
2. A: Head (F1)
B: Pedicel
C: Foot (Base / F0)
3. Structure of Oxysome:
a. Inner membrane of mitochondria bears numerous particles called as Oxysomes (F1 – Fo / Fernandez – Moran Elementary particles / Mitochondrial particles).
b. Each particle consists of head, stalk (Pedicel) and base.
c. Head (F1) / lollipop head faces towards matrix and foot (F0) is embedded in inner membrane.
d. Head acts as an enzyme ATP synthase and foot (base) as proton channel. Oxysomes are involved in proton pumping and ATP synthesis.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Question 39.
What are plastids?
Answer:
Plastids are double membraned organelles containing DNA, RNA and 70S ribosomes.

Question 40.
Draw a labelled diagram of the organelle which plays a significant role in synthesis of starch in plants. Write a note on its structure.
Answer:
Chloroplast plays a significant role in synthesis of starch in plants.
Structure of chloroplast:

  1. In plants, chloroplast is found mainly in mesophyll of leaf.
  2. Chloroplast is lens shaped but it can also be oval, spherical, discoid or ribbon like.
  3. A cell may contain single large chloroplast as in Chlamydomonas or there can be 20 to 40 chloroplasts per cell as seen in mesophyll cells.
  4. Chloroplasts contain green pigment called chlorophyll along with other enzymes that help in production of sugar by photosynthesis.
  5. Inner membrane of double membraned chloroplast is comparatively less permeable.
  6. Inside the cavity of inner membrane, there is another set of membranous sacs called thylakoids.
  7. Thylakoids are arranged in the form of stacks called grana (singular: granum).
  8. The grana are connected to each other by means of membranous tubules called stroma lamellae.
  9. Space outside thylakoids is filled with stroma.
  10. The stroma and the space inside thylakoids contain various enzymes essential for photosynthesis.
  11. Stroma of chloroplast contains DNA and ribosomes (70S).

Question 41.
Insulin is the protein hormone synthesized by pancreatic cells. Name the component that performs the role of protein factory and draw their labelled structure as seen in prokaryotes and eukaryotes.
Answer:
Ribosomes are the protein factories that synthesize proteins using genetic information.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization 6

Question 42.
Give the detailed information on ribosomes found in eukaryotic cell.
Answer:

  1. Ribosomes are protein factories of cell and were first observed as dense particles in electron micrograph of a cell by scientist Palade in 1953.
  2. Ribosomes lack membranous covering around them and are made up of Ribosomal RNA and proteins.
  3. In a eukaryotic cell, ribosomes are present in mitochondria, plastids (in plant cells) and in cytosol.
  4. Ribosomes are either found attached to outer surface of Rough Endoplasmic Reticulum and nuclear membrane or freely suspended in cytoplasm.
  5. Both are of 80S type. Each ribosome is made up of two subunits- a large (60S) and a small (40S) subunit.
  6. Bound ribosomes generally produce proteins that are transported outside the cell after processing in ER and Golgi body. e.g. Bound ribosomes of acinar cells of pancreas produce pancreatic digestive enzymes.
  7. Free ribosomes come together and form chains called polyribosomes for protein synthesis.
  8. Free ribosomes generally produce enzymatic proteins that are used up in cytoplasm, like enzymes required for breakdown of sugar.
  9. Both types of ribosomes (bound and free) can interchange position and function.
  10. Number of ribosomes is high in cells actively engaged in protein synthesis.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Question 43.
What is Svedberg unit?
Answer:
The particle size of ribosomes is measured in terms of Svedberg unit (S). It is a measure of sedimentation rate of a particle in ultracentrifuge. It is thus a measure of density and size of a particle. 1S = 10-13 sec.

Question 44.
Describe the structure of nucleus.
Answer:
Nucleus is known as the master cell organelle as it regulates various metabolic activities through synthesis of various proteins and enzymes.
The nucleus in eukaryotic cell is made up of nuclear envelope, nucleoplasm, nucleolus and chromatin network.
1. Nuclear envelope:
a. Nuclear envelope is a double layered delimiting membrane of nucleus.
b. Two membranes are separated from each other by perinuclear space (10 to 50nm).
c. Outer membrane is connected with endoplasmic reticulum at places and harbours ribosomes on it.
d. The inner membrane is lined by nuclear lamina- a network of protein fibres that helps in maintaining shape of the nucleus.
e. The two membranes along with perinuclear space help in separating nucleoplasm from cytoplasm. However, nuclear membrane is not continuous.
f. There are small openings called nucleopores on the nuclear membrane.
g. The nucleopores are guarded by pore complexes which regulate flow of substances from nucleus to cytoplasm and in reverse direction.

2. Nucleoplasm or karyolymph:
a. The nucleoplasm or karyolymph contains various substances like nucleic acids, protein molecules, minerals and salts.
b. It contains chromatin network and nucleolus.

3. Nucleolus:
a. Nucleolus is made up of rRNA and ribosomal proteins and it is known as the site of ribosome biogenesis.
b. The rRNA and ribosomal proteins are transported to cytoplasm and are assembled together to form ribosomes.
c. Depending on synthetic activity of a cell, there are one or more nucleoli present in the nucleoplasm. For e.g. cells of oocyte contain large nucleolus whereas sperm cells contain small inconspicuous one.
d. Nucleolus appear as dense spherical body present near chromatin network.

Question 45.
Write the functions of the controlling unit of the cell.
Answer:
Nucleus is known as the controlling unit of the cell.
Functions of the nucleus:
1. The nucleus contains entire genetic information; hence play important role in heredity and variation.
2. It is the site for synthesis of DNA, RNA and ribosomes.
3. It plays important role in protein synthesis.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Question 46.
Write a note on chromatin material.
Answer:

  1. Nucleus contains genetic information in the form of chromosomes which are DNA molecules associated with proteins.
  2. In a non-dividing cell, the chromosomes appear as thread like network and cannot be identified individually. This network is called chromatin material.
  3. The chromatin material contains DNA, histone and non-histone proteins and RNA.
  4. In some regions of chromatin, DNA is more and is genetically active called euchromatin.
  5. Some regions that contain more of proteins and less DNA and are genetically inert, are called
    heterochromatin.

[Note: Heterochromatin is a region in chromatin that is highly compacted during interphase and is generally not accessible for transcription of genes.]

Question 47.
What is the significance of having constant chromosome number in a species?
Answer:
Constant chromosome number in a species is important in phylogenetic studies.

Question 48.
Explain the cytoskeletal system of a cell.
Answer:

  1. The cytoskeleton is a supportive structure built from microtubules, intermediate filaments, and
    microfilaments.
  2. Microtubules are made up of protein- tubulin.
  3. Microfilaments are made up of actin.
  4. Intermediate filaments are composed of fibrous proteins.

Question 49.
Compete the following concept map representing the functions of cytoskeleton.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization 7

Question 50.
Explain in detail the structures of components that help in locomotion of unicellular organisms.
Answer:

  1. Cilium or flagellum helps in locomotion of unicellular organisms.
  2. They consist of basal body, basal plate and shaft.
  3. Basal body is placed in outer part of cytoplasm. It is derived from centriole. It has nine peripheral triplets of fibrils.
  4. Shaft is exposed part of cilia or flagella. It consists of two parts- sheath and axoneme.
  5. Sheath is covering membrane of cilium or flagellum.
  6. Core called axoneme possesses 11 fibrils (microtubules) running parallel to long axis.
  7. It shows 9 peripheral doublet microtubules and two single central microtubules (9+2).
  8. The central tubules are enclosed by central sheath.
  9. This sheath is connected to one of the tubules of peripheral doublets by a radial spoke.
  10. Central tubules are connected to each other by bridges.
  11. The peripheral doublet microtubules are connected to each other through linkers or inter-doublet bridge.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Question 51.
Draw a labelled diagram of the structure of cilia.
Answer:
Cilia act as oars causing movement of cell.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization 8

Question 52.
Spindle apparatus is formed during cell division. Write the information on the components of cell which help in formation of this.
Answer:

  1. Centrioles and centrosomes play significant role in formation of spindle apparatus during cell division.
  2. Centrosome is usually found near the nucleus of an animal cell.
  3. It contains a pair of cylindrical structures called centrioles.
  4. The cylinder (centriole) are perpendicular to each other and are surrounded by amorphous substance called pericentriolar material.
  5. Each cylinder of centriole is made up of nine sets of triplet microtubules made up of tubulin.
  6. Evenly spaced triplets are connected to each other by means of non-tubulin proteins.
  7. At the proximal end of centriole, there is a set of tubules called hub.
  8. The peripheral triplets are connected to hub by means of radial spokes. Due to this proximal end of centriole looks like a cartwheel.
  9. Centriole forms basal body of cilia and flagella.

Question 53.
Draw a labelled diagram of the structure of centriole.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization 9

Question 54.
Match the column I with column II.

Column I Column II
1. Mitochondria (a) Synthesis of protein
2. Nucleus (b) Photosynthesis
3. Chloroplast (c) Respiration
4. Ribosomes (d) Nucleoplasm

Answer:

Column I Column II
1. Mitochondria (c) Respiration
2. Nucleus (d) Nucleoplasm
3. Chloroplast (b) Photosynthesis
4. Ribosomes (a) Synthesis of protein

Question 55.
Distinguish between Plant cell and Animal cell.
Answer:

Plant cell Animal cell
(a) Cell wall is present. Cell wall is absent.
(b) Plastids present. Plastids absent.
(c) Chloroplast present. Chloroplast absent.
(d) Centrioles are present only in lower plant forms. Centrioles are present in all animal cells.
(e) Lysosomes absent. Lysosomes present in all animal cells.
(f) Two or three large and permanent vacuoles. Small and temporary vacuoles are present.
(g) Carbohydrates stored as starch. Carbohydrates stored as glycogen.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Question 56.
Label the A, B, C, and D in above diagram and write the functions of organelles A and B.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization 10Answer:
1. A: Mitochondria B: Endoplasmic Reticulum
C: Golgi complex D: Amyloplast
2. Functions of Mitochondria: Mitochondrion is known as the power house of the cell. It plays significant role in aerobic respiration. Mitochondria are absent in prokaryotic cells and red blood corpuscles (RBCs).
3. Functions of Endoplasmic Reticulum: Refer Q.33.

Question 57.
Draw a labelled diagram of an animal cell.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization 11

Question 58.
Classify the following organelles / cellular components on the basis of presence or absence in prokaryotic and eukaryotic cells.
(Ribosomes, Nucleus, Plasma membrane, Mitochondria, mRNA, Endoplasmic Reticulum, Golgi complex, Centrioles, Nucleoid)
Answer:

Prokaryotic cell Ribosomes, Plasma membrane, mRNA, Nucleoid
Eukaryotic cell Ribosomes, Plasma membrane, mRNA, Nucleus, Mitochondria, Endoplasmic Reticulum, Golgi complex, Centrioles

Question 59.
Apply Your Knowledge

Question 1.
After learning organization of cell, to test one of the postulates of cell theory, Ananya requested her teacher to guide and allow her to perform a small experiment. The aim of the experiment Avas to form new cells in the laboratory using isolated cellular organelles from other cells. Though Ananya did not succeed to form new cells, teacher-guided and motivated her explaining why experiment performed by them failed.
1. Which postulate Ananya was willing to test and why new cells failed to form from the isolated organelles from other cells?
2. From the above mentioned data could you guess which type of cells they were trying to form whether eukaryote or prokaryote?
Answer:
1. The postulate Ananya was willing to test was, ‘all cells arise from pre-existing cells’. According to this postulate, to form new cells, pre-existing cells are must; therefore, cellular organelles did not form new cells.
2. The cells which Ananya and her teacher were trying to form were eukaryotic cells, as cellular organelles are present in eukaryotes.

Question 2.
A mix bacterial culture was given to different teams of students and was asked to write their observation regarding the shapes of bacterial cells they observed under microscope. Students discussed the characteristics among their respective teams and mentioned major types of shapes they observed.
1. Which types of bacterial shapes were observed by the students?
2. Mention why they were named in a specific manner with respect to their shapes?
Answer:
1. The bacterial shapes observed by the students are cocci, bacilli, vibrios, spirilla.
2. Under microscope, cocci appear spherical shape, bacilli appear rod shape, vibrios appear comma shape and spirilla appear twisted, therefore they are named accordingly.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Question 60.
Quick Review:

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization 12

Question 61.
Exercise

Question 1.
Define cell.
Answer:
The first microscope was made by two Dutch spectacle makers Hans and Zacharias Janssen.
[Note: The Dutch scientist Anton van Leeuwenhoek made microscopes capable of magnifying single-celled organisms in a drop of pond water.]

Question 2.
Write a note on microscope.
Answer:
Cell is defined as a structural and functional unit of life of all living organisms capable of independent existence and can perform all functions of life.

Question 3.
Write a short note on totipotency.
Answer:

  1. Totipotency (totus – entire, potential – power) is the capacity or the potential of living nucleated cell, to differentiate into any other type of cell and thus, can form a complete new organism.
  2. A cell is totipotent as it has the entire genetic information of the organism stored in its nucleus.
  3. Embryonic animal cells are totipotent and are termed as stem cells.
  4. Stem cells are used in curing many diseases. Therefore, they have great potential for medical applications.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Question 4.
What are the characteristics of cells in which genetic material is known as nucleoid?
Answer:
General characteristics of prokaryotic cell:
1. Prokaryotic cells are primitive type of cells.
2. It does not have membrane bound cell organelles (like endoplasmic reticulum, Golgi complex, mitochondria, etc.) and well-defined nucleus (nuclear membrane is absent).
3. Genetic material is in the form of nucleoid.

4. Cell envelope:
a. Prokaryotic cell has chemically complex protective cell envelope having glycocalyx, cell wall and plasma membrane.
b. In some bacteria, glycocalyx occurs in the form of a slime layer (loose sheath). Other bacteria may have a thick and tough covering called capsule. It helps in protection of bacterial cell.

5. Cell wall:
The Gram-positive bacteria show presence of peptidoglycan layer in the cell wall and Gram-negative bacteria show presence of murein in the cell wall. It gives mechanical strength to the cell.
[Note: In Gram-negative bacteria, cell wall is made up of two layers; inner layer of Murein or peptidoglycan and outer layer of Lipopolysaccharides.]

6. Cell membrane:
a. It is the innermost covering of the cell envelope, chemically composed of lipids and proteins.
b. It helps in intercellular communication.
c. Cell membrane shows infoldings called mesosomes which help in cell wall formation, cellular respiration and DNA replication.
d. The cyanobacteria show longer extensions called as chromatophores which carry photosynthetic pigments.

7. In motile bacteria either cilia or flagella are found. Both are driven by rotatory movement produced by basal body (which works as motor) of flagellum. Other parts of flagellum are filament and hook.

8. Some other surface projections are the tubular pili (which help in inter-cellular communication) and fimbriae (for clinging to support).

9. Ribosomes:
Bacterial cell cytoplasm contains dense particles called ribosomes which help in protein synthesis. Ribosomes are 70S type (composed of a larger sub-unit 50S and + smaller sub-unit 30S).

Question 5.
Which technique is used to differentiate between Gram positive and Gram negative bacteria?
Answer:
The Gram-positive bacteria show presence of peptidoglycan layer in the cell wall and Gram-negative bacteria show presence of murein in the cell wall. The technique used for differentiating bacterial cells is Gram staining.
[Note: Murein is similar to peptidoglycan in structure and function. It is present in the cell walls of archaebacteria.

Question 6.
What are mesosomes?
Answer:
Cytoplasm does not show streaming movement. Cytoplasm shows streaming movement.

Question 7.
What are the functions of pili and fimbriae?
Answer:
Respiratory enzymes are present on the infoldings of the plasma membrane called mesosomes. Respiratory enzymes are present within mitochondria.
e-g- Cyanobacteria (Blue green algae) and bacteria. Algae, fungi, plants and animals.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Question 8.
Enlist the organelles present in eukaryotic cells.
Answer:
It also contains various membrane bound cell organelles like endoplasmic reticulum, Golgi complex, mitochondria, plastids, nucleus, microbodies and cytoskeletal elements like microtubules.

Question 9.
Who proposed the fluid-mosaic model?
Answer:
Fluid mosaic model was proposed by Singer and Nicholson (1972).

Question 10.
What are nuclear membrane?
Answer:
Nucleus is known as the master cell organelle as it regulates various metabolic activities through synthesis of various proteins and enzymes.
The nucleus in eukaryotic cell is made up of nuclear envelope, nucleoplasm, nucleolus and chromatin network.
1. Nuclear envelope:
a. Nuclear envelope is a double layered delimiting membrane of nucleus.
b. Two membranes are separated from each other by perinuclear space (10 to 50nm).
c. Outer membrane is connected with endoplasmic reticulum at places and harbours ribosomes on it.
d. The inner membrane is lined by nuclear lamina- a network of protein fibres that helps in maintaining shape of the nucleus.
e. The two membranes along with perinuclear space help in separating nucleoplasm from cytoplasm. However, nuclear membrane is not continuous.
f. There are small openings called nucleopores on the nuclear membrane.
g. The nucleopores are guarded by pore complexes which regulate flow of substances from nucleus to cytoplasm and in reverse direction.

Question 11.
Name two types of chromatin.
Answer:
1. In some regions of chromatin, DNA is more and is genetically active called euchromatin.
2. Some regions that contain more of proteins and less DNA and are genetically inert, are called heterochromatin.

Question 12.
What are lysosomes commonly known as?
Answer:
1. Lysosomes which bring about digestion of cell’s own organic material like a damaged cell organelle are called autophagic vesicle (suicide bags).
2. An autophagic vesicle essentially consists of lysosome fused with membrane bound old cell organelle or organic molecules to be recycled.
3. Thus, lysosomes are capable of destructing all kinds of material in the cell. Therefore, can digest its own cell organelles due to presence of lysosome. Hence, lysosomes are also called as suicide bags.

Question 13.
What are ribosomes?
Answer:
Ribosomes are the protein factories that synthesize proteins using genetic information.

Question 14.
What are glyoxysomes? Where do they occur?
Answer:
Glyoxysomes are membrane bound organelles containing enzymes that convert fatty acids to sugar. They are observed in cells of germinating seeds where the cells utilize sugar (formed by conversion of stored fatty acids) till it starts photosynthesising on its own.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Question 15.
Sketch and label the fluid mosaic model of cell membrane.
Answer:
Fluid mosaic model:

  1. Fluid mosaic model was proposed by Singer and Nicholson (1972).
  2. This model states that plasma membrane is made up of phospholipid bilayer and proteins.
  3. Proteins are embedded in the lipid membrane like icebergs in the sea of lipids.
  4. Phospholipid bilayer is fluid in nature.
  5. Quasi-fluid nature of lipid enables lateral movement of proteins. This ability to move within the membrane is measured as fluidity.
  6. Based on organization of membrane proteins they are of two types, as:

a. The intrinsic proteins occur at different depths of bilayer i.e. they are tightly bound to the phospholipid bilayer and are embedded in it. They span the entire thickness of the membrane. Therefore, they are known as transmembrane proteins. They form channels for passage of water.
b. The extrinsic or peripheral proteins are found on two surfaces of the membrane i.e. are loosely held to the phospholipid layer and can be easily removed.

Question 16.
State the functions of Endoplasmic reticulum.
Answer:
Smooth endoplasmic reticulum (SER):
1. Depending on cell type, it helps in synthesis of lipids for e.g. Steroid secreting cells of cortical region of adrenal gland, testes and ovaries.
2. Smooth endoplasmic reticulum plays a role in detoxification in the liver and storage of calcium ions (muscle cells).

Rough Endoplasmic Reticulum (RER):

  1. Rough ER is primarily involved in protein synthesis. For e.g. Pancreatic cells synthesize the protein insulin in the ER.
  2. These proteins are secreted by ribosomes attached to rough ER and are called secretory proteins. These proteins get wrapped in membrane that buds off from transitional region of ER. Such membrane bound proteins depart from ER as transport vesicles.
  3. Rough ER is also involved in formation of membrane for the cell. The ER membrane grows in place by addition of membrane proteins and phospholipids to its own membrane. Portions of this expanded membrane are transferred to other components of endomembrane system.

Question 17.
Write short note on lysosomes.
Answer:
Lysosomes:

  1. Lysosomes are considered as dismantling and restructuring units of a cell.
  2. These are membrane bound vesicles containing hydrolytic enzymes. The enzymes in lysosomes are used by most eukaryotic cells to digest (hydrolyse) macromolecules.
  3. The lysosomal enzymes show optimal activity in acidic pH.
  4. Lysosomes arise from Golgi associated endoplasmic reticulum.
  5. Lysosomes are polymorphic in nature and are classified as primary lysosomes, secondary or hybrid lysosomes, residual body and autophagic vesicle.
  6. The list of lysosomal enzymes includes:
    All types of hydrolases viz, amylases, proteases and lipases.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Question 18.
Lysosomes are known as suicide bags of the cell. Give reason.
Answer:

  1. Lysosomes which bring about digestion of cell’s own organic material like a damaged cell organelle are called autophagic vesicle (suicide bags).
  2. An autophagic vesicle essentially consists of lysosome fused with membrane-bound old cell organelle or organic molecules to be recycled.
  3. Thus, lysosomes are capable of destructing all kinds of material in the cell. Therefore, can digest its own cell organelles due to presence of lysosome. Hence, lysosomes are also called as suicide bags.

Question 19.
Describe the structure of plant cell wall.
Answer:
In plants, cell wall shows middle lamella, primary wall and secondary wall

  1. Middle lamella:
    It is thin and present between two adjacent r cells. It is the first structure formed from cell plate during cytokinesis. It is mainly made up of pectin, calcium and magnesium pectate. Softening of ripe fruit is due to solubilization of pectin.
  2. Primary wall:
    In young plant cell, it is capable of growth. It is laid inside to middle lamella.
    It is the only wall seen in meristematic tissue, mesophyll, pith, etc.
  3. Secondary wall:
    It is present inner to primary wall. Once the growth of primary wall stops, secondary wall is laid. At some places thickening is absent which leads to formation of pits.

Question 20.
Describe the cell wall of eukaryotic cells and state their function.
Answer:

  1. The rigid, protective and supportive covering, outside the cell membrane is called cell wall. It is present in plant cells, fungi and some protists.
  2. Algae show presence of cellulose, galactans, mannans and minerals like calcium carbonate in cell wall.
  3. In other plants, it is made up of hemicelluloses, pectin, lipids and protein.
  4. Microfibrils of plant cell wall show presence of cellulose which is responsible for rigidity.
  5. Some of the depositions of cell wall are silica (grass stem), cutin (epidermal walls of land plants), suberin (endodermal cells of root), wax, lignin.
  6. Function:
    1. Provides support, rigidity and shape to the cell.
    2. Protects the protoplasm against mechanical injury and infections.

Question 21.
1. Draw neat and labelled diagram of ultrastructure of mitochondria,
2. Explain the structure of mitochondria.
Answer:
Mitochondrion is known as the power house of the cell. It plays significant role in aerobic respiration. Mitochondria are absent in prokaryotic cells and red blood corpuscles (RBCs).

The structure of mitochondrion:

  1. Shape of the mitochondria may be oval or spherical or like spiral strip.
  2. It is a double membrane bound organelle.
  3. Outer membrane is permeable to various metabolites due to presence of a protein-Porin or Parson’s particles.
  4. Inner membrane is selectively permeable to few substances only.
  5. Both membranes are separated by intermembrane space.
  6. Inner membrane shows several finger like or plate like folds called as cristae which bears numerous particles oxysomes and cytochromes / electron carriers.
  7. Inner membrane encloses a cavity called inner chamber, containing a fluid-matrix.
  8. Matrix contains few coils of circular DNA, RNA, 70S types of ribosomes, lipids and various enzymes of Krebs’ cycle and other pathways.

Question 22.
1. Draw neat and labelled diagram of structure of plasma membrane proposed by Singer and Nicholson,
2. Write any two functions of plasma membrane.
Answer:
1. Fluid mosaic model:

1. Fluid mosaic model was proposed by Singer and Nicholson (1972).
2. This model states that plasma membrane is made up of phospholipid bilayer and proteins.
3. Proteins are embedded in the lipid membrane like icebergs in the sea of lipids.
4. Phospholipid bilayer is fluid in nature.
5. Quasi-fluid nature of lipid enables lateral movement of proteins. This ability to move within the membrane is measured as fluidity.
vi. Based on organization of membrane proteins they are of two types, as:
a. The intrinsic proteins occur at different depths of bilayer i.e. they are tightly bound to the phospholipid bilayer and are embedded in it. They span the entire thickness of the membrane. Therefore, they are known as transmembrane proteins. They form channels for passage of water.
b. The extrinsic or peripheral proteins are found on two surfaces of the membrane i.e. are loosely held to the phospholipid layer and can be easily removed.

(ii)

1. The significant function of plasma membrane is transport of molecules across it. Plasma membrane is selectively permeable.

2. Passive transport:
a. Many molecules move across the membrane without spending energy.
b. Some molecules move by simple diffusion along the concentration gradient i.e. from higher to lower concentration.
c. Neutral molecules may move across the membrane by the process of simple diffusion.
d. Water may also move by osmosis.

3. Active transport:
a. Few ions or molecules are transported against concentration gradient i.e. from lower to higher concentration.
b. This requires energy, hence ATP is utilized. As such a transport is an energy dependent process in which ATP is utilized, it is called Active transport e.g. Na+ /K+ pump.
c. Polar molecules cannot pass through non-polar lipid bilayer. Therefore, they require carrier proteins to facilitate their transport across the membrane.

Question 23.
1. Draw neat and labelled diagram of nucleus,
2. Write a short note on nuclear envelope.
Answer:
Nucleus is known as the master cell organelle as it regulates various metabolic activities through synthesis of various proteins and enzymes.
The nucleus in eukaryotic cell is made up of nuclear envelope, nucleoplasm, nucleolus and chromatin network.
1. Nuclear envelope:
a. Nuclear envelope is a double layered delimiting membrane of nucleus.
b. Two membranes are separated from each other by perinuclear space (10 to 50nm).
c. Outer membrane is connected with endoplasmic reticulum at places and harbours ribosomes on it.
d. The inner membrane is lined by nuclear lamina- a network of protein fibres that helps in maintaining shape of the nucleus.
e. The two membranes along with perinuclear space help in separating nucleoplasm from cytoplasm. However, nuclear membrane is not continuous.
f. There are small openings called nucleopores on the nuclear membrane.
g. The nucleopores are guarded by pore complexes which regulate flow of substances from nucleus to cytoplasm and in reverse direction.

2. Nucleoplasm or karyolymph:
a. The nucleoplasm or karyolymph contains various substances like nucleic acids, protein molecules, minerals and salts.
b. It contains chromatin network and nucleolus.

3. Nucleolus:
a. Nucleolus is made up of rRNA and ribosomal proteins and it is known as the site of ribosome biogenesis.
b. The rRNA and ribosomal proteins are transported to cytoplasm and are assembled together to form ribosomes.
c. Depending on synthetic activity of a cell, there are one or more nucleoli present in the nucleoplasm. For e.g. cells of oocyte contain large nucleolus whereas sperm cells contain small inconspicuous one.
d. Nucleolus appear as dense spherical body present near chromatin network.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Question 24.
Which components of a cell help in formation of spindle apparatus formed during cell division?
Answer:
Centrioles and centrosomes play significant role in formation of spindle apparatus during cell division.

Question 25.
Write a note on control unit of a cell.
Answer:
a. Nucleus contains the genetic material of an organism.
b. This genetic material is present in the form of Deoxyribonucleic Acid (DNA) which is responsible for synthesis of various proteins and enzymes.
c. These proteins and enzymes in turn regulate metabolic activities of the cells.
Therefore, nucleus is considered as control unit of a cell.

Question 26.
What are the various types of plastids? ii. Describe the chemical composition and functions of eukaryotic cell wall.
Answer:
(i)

1. Plastids are classified according to the pigments present in it. Three main types of plastids are – leucoplasts, chromoplasts and chloroplasts.
2. Leucoplasts do not contain any photosynthetic pigments they are of various shapes and sizes. These are meant for storage of nutrients:
a. Amyloplasts store starch. b. Elaioplasts store oils. c. Aleuroplasts store proteins.
3. Chromoplasts contain pigments like carotene and xanthophyll etc.
a. They impart yellow, orange or red colour to flowers and fruits.
b. These plastids are found in the coloured parts of flowers and fruits.
iv. Chloroplasts are plastids containing green pigment chlorophyll along with other enzymes that help in production of sugar by photosynthesis. They are present in plants, algae and few protists like Euglena.

(ii)

  1. The rigid, protective and supportive covering, outside the cell membrane is called cell wall. It is present in plant cells, fungi and some protists.
  2. Algae show presence of cellulose, galactans, mannans and minerals like calcium carbonate in cell wall.
  3. In other plants, it is made up of hemicelluloses, pectin, lipids and protein.
  4. Microfibrils of plant cell wall show presence of cellulose which is responsible for rigidity.
  5. Some of the depositions of cell wall are silica (grass stem), cutin (epidermal walls of land plants), suberin (endodermal cells of root), wax, lignin.
  6. Function:
    Provides support, rigidity and shape to the cell.
    Protects the protoplasm against mechanical injury and infections.

Question 27.
1. Explain the structure of ribosomes in detail.
2. What are sphaerosomes?
3. What is totipotency?
Answer:
(i) Ribosomes are the protein factories that synthesize proteins using genetic information.

  1. Ribosomes are protein factories of cell and were first observed as dense particles in electron micrograph of a cell by scientist Palade in 1953.
  2. Ribosomes lack membranous covering around them and are made up of Ribosomal RNA and proteins.
  3. In a eukaryotic cell, ribosomes are present in mitochondria, plastids (in plant cells) and in cytosol.
  4. Ribosomes are either found attached to outer surface of Rough Endoplasmic Reticulum and nuclear membrane or freely suspended in cytoplasm.
  5. Both are of 80S type. Each ribosome is made up of two subunits- a large (60S) and a small (40S) subunit.
  6. Bound ribosomes generally produce proteins that are transported outside the cell after processing in ER and Golgi body. e.g. Bound ribosomes of acinar cells of pancreas produce pancreatic digestive enzymes.
  7. Free ribosomes come together and form chains called polyribosomes for protein synthesis.
  8. Free ribosomes generally produce enzymatic proteins that are used up in cytoplasm, like enzymes required for breakdown of sugar.
  9. Both types of ribosomes (bound and free) can interchange position and function.
  10. Number of ribosomes is high in cells actively engaged in protein synthesis.

(ii) Sphaerosomes:
a. These are found mainly in cells involved in synthesis and storage of fats. For e. g. endosperm of oil seeds.
b. The membrane of sphaerosome is half unit membrane i.e. this membrane has only one phospholipid layer.

(iii) 1. Totipotency (totus – entire, potential – power) is the capacity or the potential of living nucleated cell, to differentiate into any other type of cell and thus, can form a complete new organism.
2. A cell is totipotent as it has the entire genetic information of the organism stored in its nucleus.
3. Embryonic animal cells are totipotent and are termed as stem cells.
4. Stem cells are used in curing many diseases. Therefore, they have great potential for medical applications.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Question 28.
1. Give any two functions of each of the following:
a. Golgi complex
b. Lysosomes
2. What are the major differences between eukaryotic and prokaryotic cells? Write any two points.
3. Explain the structure of cilia and flagella.
Answer:
1. a. Functions of Golgi complex:
a. Golgi body carries out two types of functions, modification of secretions of ER and production of its own secretions.
b. Cistemae contain specific enzymes for specific functions.
c. Refining (modification) of product takes place in a sequential manner.
d. For example, certain sugar component is added or removed from glycolipids and glycoproteins that are brought from ER, thus forming a variety of products.
e. Golgi bodies also manufacture their own products. Golgi bodies in many plant cells produce non-cellulose polysaccharides like pectin.
f. Manufactured or modified, all products of Golgi complex leave cistemae from trans face as transport vesicles.
b. i. Lysosomes which bring about digestion of cell’s own organic material like a damaged cell organelle are called autophagic vesicle (suicide bags).
2. An autophagic vesicle essentially consists of lysosome fused with membrane bound old cell organelle or organic molecules to be recycled.
3. Thus, lysosomes are capable of destructing all kinds of material in the cell. Therefore, can digest its own cell organelles due to presence of lysosome. Hence, lysosomes are also called as suicide bags.

(ii)

  1. Cilium or flagellum helps in locomotion of unicellular organisms.
  2. They consist of basal body, basal plate and shaft.
  3. Basal body is placed in outer part of cytoplasm. It is derived from centriole. It has nine peripheral triplets of fibrils.
  4. Shaft is exposed part of cilia or flagella. It consists of two parts- sheath and axoneme.
  5. Sheath is covering membrane of cilium or flagellum.
  6. Core called axoneme possesses 11 fibrils (microtubules) running parallel to long axis.
  7. It shows 9 peripheral doublet microtubules and two single central microtubules (9+2).
  8. The central tubules are enclosed by central sheath.
  9. This sheath is connected to one of the tubules of peripheral doublets by a radial spoke.
  10. Central tubules are connected to each other by bridges.
  11. The peripheral doublet microtubules are connected to each other through linkers or inter-doublet bridge.
    Cilia act as oars causing movement of cell.

Question 29.
Write a note on glycoprotein molecules found on membranes of RBC.
Answer:
Glycoproteins are protein molecules modified within the Golgi complex by having a short sugar chain (polysaccharide) attached to them.
The polysaccharide part of glycoproteins located on the surfaces of red blood cells acts as the antigen responsible for determining the blood group of an individual.
Different polysaccharide part of glycoproteins act as different type of antigens that determine the blood groups.
Four types of blood groups A, B, AB, and O are recognized on the basis of presence or absence of these antigens.

Question 30.
Describe in detail the structure of nucleus.
Answer:
Nucleus is known as the master cell organelle as it regulates various metabolic activities through synthesis of various proteins and enzymes.
The nucleus in eukaryotic cell is made up of nuclear envelope, nucleoplasm, nucleolus and chromatin network.
1. Nuclear envelope:
a. Nuclear envelope is a double layered delimiting membrane of nucleus.
b. Two membranes are separated from each other by perinuclear space (10 to 50nm).
c. Outer membrane is connected with endoplasmic reticulum at places and harbours ribosomes on it.
d. The inner membrane is lined by nuclear lamina- a network of protein fibres that helps in maintaining shape of the nucleus.
e. The two membranes along with perinuclear space help in separating nucleoplasm from cytoplasm. However, nuclear membrane is not continuous.
f. There are small openings called nucleopores on the nuclear membrane.
g. The nucleopores are guarded by pore complexes which regulate flow of substances from nucleus to cytoplasm and in reverse direction.

2. Nucleoplasm or karyolymph:
a. The nucleoplasm or karyolymph contains various substances like nucleic acids, protein molecules, minerals and salts.
b. It contains chromatin network and nucleolus.

3. Nucleolus:
a. Nucleolus is made up of rRNA and ribosomal proteins and it is known as the site of ribosome biogenesis.
b. The rRNA and ribosomal proteins are transported to cytoplasm and are assembled together to form ribosomes.
c. Depending on synthetic activity of a cell, there are one or more nucleoli present in the nucleoplasm. For e.g. cells of oocyte contain large nucleolus whereas sperm cells contain small inconspicuous one.
d. Nucleolus appear as dense spherical body present near chromatin network.

Question 31.
Observe the diagram given below and answer the questions based on it.
1. Identify the structure labelled as ‘A’.
2. Mention the two types of the given cell organelle.
3. Which type of ribosomes would be seen on the membrane of the given structure.
Answer:
1. Smooth endoplasmic reticulum (SER):

1. Depending on cell type, it helps in synthesis of lipids for e.g. Steroid secreting cells of cortical region of adrenal gland, testes and ovaries.
2. Smooth endoplasmic reticulum plays a role in detoxification in the liver and storage of calcium ions (muscle cells).

Rough Endoplasmic Reticulum (RER):
1. Rough ER is primarily involved in protein synthesis. For e.g. Pancreatic cells synthesize the protein insulin in the ER.
2. These proteins are secreted by ribosomes attached to rough ER and are called secretory proteins. These proteins get wrapped in membrane that buds off from transitional region of ER. Such membrane bound proteins depart from ER as transport vesicles.
3. Rough ER is also involved in formation of membrane for the cell. The ER membrane grows in place by addition of membrane proteins and phospholipids to its own membrane. Portions of this expanded membrane are transferred to other components of endomembrane system.

3. Both are of 80S type. Each ribosome is made up of two subunits- a large (60S) and a small (40S) subunit.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Multiple Choice Questions:

Question 1.
Which of the following is the smallest cell?
(A) Red Blood Cell
(B) Plant cell
(C) Mycoplasma
(D) Euglena
Answer:
(C) Mycoplasma

Question 2.
From the following identify the CORRECT range of size of the bacteria.
(A) 0.3 pm to 1 mm
(B) 1 pm to 1mm
(C) 1 nm to 1 pm
(D) 3 pm to 5 pm
[Note: Prokaryotic cells generally range between 1 to 10 pm in size.]
Answer:
(D) 3 pm to 5 pm

Question 3.
Identify the CORRECT statements.
1. Nerve cells are the longest cells.
2. The concept ‘Omnis cellula-e-cellulla’ was explained by Rudolf Virchow.
3. The cell theory was proposed by Nicolson and Singer.
(A) Statements i and ii are correct.
(B) Statements ii and iii are correct.
(C) Statements i and iii are correct.
(D) Statements i, ii and iii are correct.
Answer:
(A) Statements i and ii are correct.

Question 4.
New cells generate from
(A) bacterial fermentation
(B) regeneration of old cells
(C) pre-existing cells
(D) abiotic materials
Answer:
(C) pre-existing cells

Question 5.
Mesosonle is produced by the infoldings of
(A) mitochondria
(B) chloroplast
(C) golgi complex
(D) plasma membrane
Answer:
(D) plasma membrane

Question 6.
The ribosomes present in prokaryotic cells is of type.
(A) 30S
(B) 80S
(C) 70S
(D) 50S
Answer:
(C) 70S

Question 7.
Complete the analogy.
F-plasmid: Reproduction :: R-plasmid: ________
(A) Respiration
(B) Resistance against antibiotics
(C) Packaging and transportation
(D) Apposition
Answer:
(B) Resistance against antibiotics

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Question 8.
A rigid, supportive and protective outer covering of plasma membrane of fungi is called
(A) cell wall
(B) lamella
(C) plasmodesmata
(D) cell membrane
Answer:
(A) cell wall

Question 9.
The cytoplasmic connections from cell to cell are known as
(A) middle lamella
(B) plasmodesmata
(C) cell membrane system
(D) endoplasmic reticulum
Answer:
(B) plasmodesmata

Question 10.
Due to presence of ________, endoplasmic reticulum is termed as rough endoplasmic reticulum.
(A) cistemae
(B) RNA
(C) ribosomes
(D) tubules
Answer:
(C) ribosomes

Question 11.
Golgi body is absent in
(A) Prokaryotes
(B) Mature mammalian RBC
(C) Akaryotes
(D) All of the above
Answer:
(D) All of the above

Question 12.
Lysosomes are not helpful in
(A) Osteogenesis
(B) Cellular digestion
(C) Metamorphosis
(D) Lipogenesis
Answer:
(D) Lipogenesis

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Question 13.
Identify the INCORRECT statements from the following.
1. Lysosomal enzymes do not digest their own membrane proteins.
2. Accidental release of lysosomal enzymes in limited amount does not harm the cell because pH of cytosol is near neutral.
3. Any insufficiency in secretion of lysosomal enzymes leads to disorders e.g. in genetic disorder- Klinefelter syndrome.
iv. Due to insufficiency of protease brain gets impaired resulting from accumulation of fats.
(A) Statements i and ii are incorrect.
(B) Statements i, ii and iii are incorrect.
(C) Statements iii and iv are incorrect.
(D) Statements i, ii and iv are incorrect.
Answer:
(C) Statements iii and iv are incorrect.

Question 14.
Tonoplast is a differentially permeable membrane surrounding the
(A) cytoplasm
(B) vacuole
(C) nucleus
(D) mitochondria
Answer:
(B) vacuole

Question 15.
Which organelle is surrounded by two membranes?
(A) Ribosomes
(B) Peroxisomes
(C) Vacuoles
(D) Mitochondria
Answer:
(D) Mitochondria

Question 16.
F1 particles are present in
(A) plasmids
(B) mitochondria
(C) chloroplast
(D) ribosomes
Answer:
(B) mitochondria

Question 17.
_______ are green plastids containing green pigment chlorophyll.
(A) Chloroplasts
(B) Leucoplast
(C) Chromoplasts
(D) Xanthophyll
Answer:
(A) Chloroplasts

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Question 18.
Select the INCORRECT statement about ribosome.
(A) Each ribosome consists of two sub- units-large and small subunit.
(B) Ribosomes are double membrane bound cell organelles.
(C) Ribosomes are made up of ribosomal RNA and protein.
(D) Ribosomes are involved in protein synthesis.
Answer:
(B) Ribosomes are double membrane bound cell organelles.

Question 19.
The space between the two nuclear membranes is known as
(A) peritonial space
(B) periplasmic space
(C) perinuclear space
(D) none of the above
Answer:
(C) perinuclear space

Question 20.
In eukaryotic cells, the chromosomes are located in
(A) nucleus
(B) nucleolus
(C) golgi complex
(D) lysosomes
Answer:
(A) nucleus

Question 21.
What is the normal chromosome number in humans?
(A) 23
(B) 46
(C) 48
(D) 16
Answer:
(B) 46

Question 22.
During which stage of cell division chromosomes become distinct and can be clearly identified?
(A) Interphase
(B) Prophase
(C) Pachytene
(D) Metaphase
Answer:
(D) Metaphase

Question 23.
Microtubules are made up of protein.
(A) tubulin
(B) fibrion
(C) collagen
(D) myosin
Answer:
(A) tubulin

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Competitive Corner:

Question 1.
Match the column I with column II.

Column I Column II
(a) Golgi apparatus (i) Synthesis of protein
(b) Lysosomes (ii) Trap waste and excretory products
(c) Vacuoles (iii) Formation of glycoproteins and glycolipids
(d) Ribosomes (iv) Digesting  biomolecules

Choose the right match from options given below:
(A) a-i, b-ii, c-iv, d-iii
(B) a-iii, b-iv, c-ii, d-i
(C) a-iv, b-iii, c-i, d-ii
(D) a-iii, b-ii, c-iv, d-i
Answer:
(B) a-iii, b-iv, c-ii, d-i

Question 2.
The concept of “Omnis cellula – e- cellula” regarding cell division was first proposed by:
(A) Schleiden
(B) Aristotle
(C) Rudolf Virchow
(D) Theodore Schwann
Answer:
(C) Rudolf Virchow

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Question 3.
The Golgi complex participates in
(A) respiration in bacteria
(B) formation of secretory vesicles
(C) fatty acid breakdown
(D) activation of amino acid
Answer:
(B) formation of secretory vesicles

Question 4.
Which of the following is true for nucleolus?
(A) It takes part in spindle formation.
(B) It is a membrane-bound structure.
(C) Larger nucleoli are present in dividing cells.
(D) It is a site for active ribosomal RNA synthesis.
Hint: Large nucleoli are found in cells that are actively engaged in protein synthesis. Nucleolus is non-membranous structure.
Answer:
(D) It is a site for active ribosomal RNA synthesis.

Question 5.
Given below are cell organelles and their functions. Select the INCORRECT match.
(A) Lysosome – Phagocytosis
(B) Centriole – Spindle formation
(C) Sphaerosomes – Storage and synthesis of fats
(D) Leucoplast – Photosynthesis
Hint: Leucoplasts store food material.
Answer:
(D) Leucoplast – Photosynthesis

Question 6.
Which of the following cell organelles is responsible for extracting energy from carbohydrates to form ATP?
(A) Lysosome
(B) Ribosome
(C) Chloroplast
(D) Mitochondria
Hint: Glucose (carbohydrate) on complete oxidation from ATP during respiration. The ATP synthesis during carbohydrate oxidation takes place in the Mitochondria (site of aerobic respiration). Mitochondria produce cellular energy in the form of ATP.
Answer:
(D) Mitochondria

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 5 Cell Structure and Organization

Question 7.
Which of the following components provides sticky character to the bacterial cell?
(A) Cell wall
(B) Nuclear membrane
(C) Plasma membrane
(D) Glycocalyx
Hint: In some bacteria, glycocalyx is rich in glycoproteins and could be a loose sheath called as slime layer. This slime layer or glycocalyx imparts sticky character to bacterial cell wall or bacteria.
Answer:
(D) Glycocalyx

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 5 Reconstitution of Partnership (Death of Partner)

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Commerce Book Keeping & Accountancy Important Questions Chapter 5 Reconstitution of Partnership (Death of Partner) Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Commerce BK Important Questions Chapter 5 Reconstitution of Partnership (Death of Partner)

1. Objective questions:

A. Select the most appropriate answer from the alternative given below and rewrite the sentences.

Question 1.
Share of loss of a deceased partner till the date of death is _____________
(a) debited to Profit and Loss-Adjustment A/c
(b) credited to Profit and Loss-Adjustment A/c
(c) debited to Profit and Loss Suspense A/c
(d) credited to Profit and Loss Suspense A/c
Answer:
(d) credited to Profit and Loss Suspense A/c

Question 2.
Gain ratio is calculated on _____________
(a) admission of a partner
(b) retirement of a partner
(c) death of a partner
(d) retirement or death of a partner
Answer:
(d) retirement or death of a partner

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 5 Reconstitution of Partnership (Death of Partner)

Question 3.
Share of profit of a deceased partner till the date of death is _____________
(a) debited to Profit and Loss-Adjustment A/c
(b) credited to Profit and Loss-Adjustment A/c
(c) debited to Profit and Loss Suspense A/c
(d) credited to Profit and Loss Suspense A/c
Answer:
(c) debited to Profit and Loss Suspense A/c

Question 4.
An amount received from the Insurance Company against the joint-life policy is _____________
(a) debited to the deceased partner
(b) credited to the deceased partner
(c) credited to Continuing Partners Capital A/c
(d) credited to All Partners’ Capital A/c’s in their profit sharing ratio
Answer:
(d) credited to All Partners’ Capital A/c’s in their profit sharing ratio

Question 5.
M, N, and S are partners in a firm having joint life policy of ₹ 10,00,000 on which premium has been paid by the firm. M dies and his legal representatives want the whole amount of the policy whereas N and S want to distribute the amount among all the partners.
(a) M’s representatives are correct
(b) N and S are correct
(c) All are wrong
(d) Insurance company will decide
Answer:
(b) N and S are correct

Question 6.
X, Y, and Z share profit as 1/2, 3/10, and 1/5 and Z have expired, the new profit ratio of X and Y will be _____________ respectively.
(a) 5 : 8
(b) 5 : 3
(c) 2 : 1
(d) 5 : 2
Answer:
(b) 5 : 3

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 5 Reconstitution of Partnership (Death of Partner)

Question 7.
The interest on drawings of a deceased partner is credited to _____________
(a) Profit and Loss-Adjustment A/c
(b) Revaluation A/c
(c) Capital A/c
(d) Profit and Loss Suspense A/c
Answer:
(d) Profit and Loss Suspense A/c

Question 8.
In the case of death of a partner, a _____________ is opened for revaluation of the assets and liabilities.
(a) Profit and Loss-Adjustment A/c
(b) Profit and Loss A/c
(c) Profit and Loss Suspense A/c
(d) Executor’s Loan A/c
Answer:
(a) Profit and Loss-Adjustment A/c

Question 9.
A balance on the Deceased Partner’s Executor’s Loan Account is shown in the new Balance Sheet on _____________ side.
(a) assets
(b) credit
(c) liabilities
(d) none of these
Answer:
(c) liabilities

B. Write a word, term, phrase, which can substitute each of the following statements.

Question 1.
The account shows the revaluation of assets and liabilities.
Answer:
Revaluation A/c or Profit and Loss Adjustment A/c

Question 2.
Excess of proportionate capital over actual capital.
Answer:
Deficit

Question 3.
The account to which deceased partners’ capital balance is transferred.
Answer:
Deceased Partner’s Executor’s Loan Account

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 5 Reconstitution of Partnership (Death of Partner)

Question 4.
A person is entitled to receive the amount due to a deceased partner.
Answer:
Legal Heir/Executor/Legal Representative of a deceased partner

Question 5.
The account where the deceased partner’s share in the accrued profit from the date of the last Balance Sheet to the date of his death is adjusted.
Answer:
Profit and Loss Suspense A/c

C. State whether the following statements are True or False with reasons.

Question 1.
The death of a partner is like a compulsory retirement.
Answer:
This statement is True.
After the death of a partner, the business is not able to get any kind of services from the deceased partner and he ceases to be a partner of a firm on natural ground. Hence, we can say that the death of a partner is like a compulsory retirement.

Question 2.
The total amount due to the deceased partner is paid in cash to the executor immediately after his death.
Answer:
This statement is False.
Depending on the availability of sufficient cash or bank balance the total amount due to the deceased partner is paid. However, it is not at all necessary to make immediate payment to the legal heir or representative of the deceased partner.

Question 3.
On the death of a partner, his share in the goodwill is divided equally among continuing partners.
Answer:
This statement is False.
On the death of a partner, his share in the goodwill is divided into the old profit ratio of continuing partners.

Question 4.
The deceased partner’s share in profit up to the date of his death will be debited to his Capital A/c.
Answer:
This statement is False.
The deceased partner’s share in profit up to the date of his death will be credited to his Capital A/c as he is entitled to receive it.

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 5 Reconstitution of Partnership (Death of Partner)

Question 5.
For a decrease in the value of assets, Revolution Account is debited.
Answer:
This statement is True.
A decrease in the value of assets means a loss to the business and in that case, Asset Account will be credited and Revaluation Account will be debited.

Question 6.
An amount due to the deceased partner appears in the Balance Sheet.
Answer:
This statement is False.
An amount due to the deceased partner is transferred to his Executor’s Account and the balance if remains in Executor’s Loan Account then appears in the Balance Sheet.

D. Fill in the blanks and rewrite the following sentence.

Question 1.
An amount due to a deceased partner is transferred to _____________ A/c.
Answer:
Executor’s Loan

Question 2.
Death of a partner is like a _____________ retirement.
Answer:
compulsory

Question 3.
Usually assets and liabilities of the firm are revalued on the _____________ of a partner.
Answer:
death

Question 4.
For increase in the value of assets, Revaluation Account is _____________
Answer:
credited

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 5 Reconstitution of Partnership (Death of Partner)

Question 5.
A partner who died is known as _____________
Answer:
deceased partner

Question 6.
A person who represent a deceased partner is known as _____________
Answer:
Legal Heir or Executor.

E. Answer in one sentence only.

Question 1.
How is the gain ratio calculated?
Answer:
The gain ratio is calculated by using the formula:
Gain Ratio = New Ratio – Old Ratio.

Question 2.
When is the gain ratio required to be calculated?
Answer:
The gain ratio is usually calculated at the time of retirement or death of a partner.

Question 3.
How would you treat general reserve on the death of a partner?
Answer:
On the death of a partner, balance in general reserve is transferred to all Partners’ Capital Accounts or Current Accounts in their old profit sharing ratio.

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 5 Reconstitution of Partnership (Death of Partner)

Question 4.
How is the amount due to a deceased partner calculated?
Answer:
The amount due to a deceased partner is calculated by adding his share in general reserve, past accumulated profit, goodwill, profit on revaluation of assets and liabilities, interest on capital, salary payable, etc. in the opening balance of capital and by deducting the share in the past accumulated loss, revaluation loss, drawings and interest on drawings from his capital balance.

Question 5.
How is an amount due to the deceased partner settled?
Answer:
The amount finally due to the deceased partner is settled by transferring the same amount to his Legal Heir or Representative’s Loan Account and the same is paid to the legal heir or representative or executor after completing all legal formalities.

Question 6.
How is the share of the deceased partner in accrued profit calculated?
Answer:
The share of the deceased partner in accrued profit is calculated on the assumed basis of average profit of the past few years and credited to the Deceased Partner’s Capital Account.

Question 7.
How is a debit balance of Profit and Loss Account dealt with on the death of a partner?
Answer:
On the death of a partner, a debit balance of the Profit and Loss Account is adjusted and transferred to all Partners’ Capital/Current Accounts in their old profit sharing ratio.

Solved Problem

Question 1.
The following is the Balance Sheet of Shikha, Divit, and Naman, who were partners sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 2 : 2 : 1.
Balance Sheet as of 31st March 2020
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 5 Reconstitution of Partnership (Death of Partner) Q1
Naman died on 1st July 2020 and the following adjustments were made in the books of the firm:
1. All debtors were considered as good and the Reserve for Doubtful Debts was no longer necessary.
2. A contingent liability for compensation of ₹ 1,800 was to be provided.
3. Investments worth ₹ 40,000 were taken over by the executor of Naman and the remaining investments were sold for ₹ 30,000.
4. Stock was revalued at ₹ 30,000.
5. The goodwill of the firm was valued at ₹ 20,000 and was to be shown in the books.
6. The deceased partner’s share in profit up to the date of his death was to be calculated on the basis of the preceding year’s profit which was ₹ 16,000.
Prepare the Profit and Loss Adjustment Account, Capital Accounts of Partners, and the Balance Sheet of the new firm after the death of Naman.
Solution:
In the books of Partnership Firm
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 5 Reconstitution of Partnership (Death of Partner) Q1.1
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 5 Reconstitution of Partnership (Death of Partner) Q1.2
Balance Sheet as of 1st July 2020
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 5 Reconstitution of Partnership (Death of Partner) Q1.3
Working Notes:
1. Goodwill valued at ₹ 20,000 is debited to Goodwill A/c and credited to all Partners’ Capital A/cs in their profit sharing ratio. Show balance in the Goodwill A/c then transfers to the Assets side of the Balance Sheet.

2. The deceased partner’s (Naman) share in profit up to the date of his death = (Preceding year’s profit) × (Proportionate profit) × Naman’s share in profit
= 16,000 × \(\frac{3}{12} \times \frac{1}{5}\)
= ₹ 800.

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 5 Reconstitution of Partnership (Death of Partner)

3. A provision for contingent liability for compensation ₹ 1,800 is debited to Profit and Loss-Adjustment A/c and then shown at the Liabilities side of the Balance Sheet.

4. The following ledger accounts are prepared to ascertain their closing balances:
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 5 Reconstitution of Partnership (Death of Partner) Q1.4
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 5 Reconstitution of Partnership (Death of Partner) Q1.5

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Reconstitution of Partnership (Retirement of Partner)

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Commerce Book Keeping & Accountancy Important Questions Chapter 4 Reconstitution of Partnership (Retirement of Partner) Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Commerce BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Reconstitution of Partnership (Retirement of Partner)

A. Select the most appropriate alternatives from those given below and rewrite the sentence.

Question 1.
A, B and C are partners sharing profits in the ratio of 5 : 3 : 2. If B retires then new ratio will be _____________
(a) 5 : 2
(b) 5 : 3
(c) 3 : 2
(d) 1 : 1
Answer:
(a) 5 : 2

Question 2.
When goodwill is raised at its full value and it is written off _____________ Account is to be credited.
(a) Cash
(b) Goodwill
(c) All Partners’ Capital
(d) Loan
Answer:
(b) Goodwill

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Reconstitution of Partnership (Retirement of Partner)

Question 3.
Increase in the value of assets should be _____________ to Profit and Loss Adjsutment Account.
(a) debited
(b) credited
(c) added
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) credited

Question 4.
If the goodwill is raised to the extent of retiring partner’s share _____________ account is to be debited.
(a) cash
(b) goodwill
(c) partner’s Capital
(d) retiring Partners Capital
Answer:
(b) goodwill

Question 5.
A, B and C are partners, sharing profits and losses in the ratio of \(\frac{1}{2}\), \(\frac{1}{3}\) and \(\frac{1}{6}\) respectively, if B retires, the new ratio will be _____________
(a) 4 : 1
(b) 3 : 1
(c) 3 : 2
(d) 2 : 1
Answer:
(b) 3 : 1

Question 6.
On retirement of a partner the balance on his Current Account is transferred to his _____________ Account.
(a) Drawings
(b) Capital
(c) Wife’s Loan
(d) Son’s
Answer:
(b) Capital

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Reconstitution of Partnership (Retirement of Partner)

Question 7.
_____________ Ratio is a ratio which continuing partners are benefited on retirement of a partner
(a) New
(b) Sacrifice
(c) Gain
(d) Old
Answer:
(c) Gain

Question 8.
If Goodwill Account is raised only to the extent of retiring partner’s share, _____________ A/c is credited.
(a) Cash
(b) Goodwill
(c) All Partners’ Capital
(d) Retiring Partner’s Capital
Answer:
(d) Retiring Partner’s Capital

Question 9.
In the case of retirement of a partner, _____________ Account is opened for revaluation of the assets and liabilities.
(a) Revaluation
(b) Profit and Loss
(c) Current
(d) Trading
Answer:
(a) Revaluation

Question 10.
In the case of retirement of a partner, balance on Revaluation Account is transferred to _____________ Accounts.
(a) Retiring Partner’s Capital
(b) All Partners’ Capital
(c) New Partner’s Capital
(d) Continuing Partners’ Capital
Answer:
(b) All Partners’ Capital

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Reconstitution of Partnership (Retirement of Partner)

Question 11.
Debit balance on Profit and Loss Suspense Account is shown in the new Balance Sheet on _____________ side.
(a) Assets
(b) Liabilities
(c) Debit
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Assets

B. Write the word, term, phrase, which can substitute each of the following statements.

Question 1.
The account shows the revaluation of assets and liabilities.
Answer:
Revaluation Account or Profit and Loss Adjustment Account

Question 2.
Excess of actual capital over proportionate capital.
Answer:
Surplus Capital

Question 3.
Process in which a partner leaves the firm permanently on account of old age continued sickness or loss of interest in the firm.
Answer:
Retirement of a Partner

Question 4.
The ratio in which the continuing partners share the profit ratio given up by the retiring partner.
OR
The ratio in which goodwill is credited to the retiring partners is adjusted by the continuing partners.
Answer:
Gain Ratio
OR
Benefit Ratio

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Reconstitution of Partnership (Retirement of Partner)

Question 5.
An account to which the amount due to a partner on his retirement is transferred.
Answer:
Retiring Partner’s Loan A/c

C. State whether the following statements are true or false with reasons.

Question 1.
Amount due to a retiring partner if not paid, appears as his loan in the books of the firm.
Answer:
This statement is True.
If in Cash/Bank account, the firm has sufficient balance then the amount due to a retiring partner is paid by firm immediately. If due to insufficient fund amount due to a retiring partner is not paid and it appears as his loan in the books of the firm.

Question 2.
A revaluation Account is also called Realisation Account.
Answer:
This statement is False.
The changes in the values of assets or liabilities on revaluation are recorded in the Revaluation Account. At the time of dissolution of the firm, when Assets or liabilities are disposed off and whatever amounts are paid or received by the firm are recorded in the Realisation Account. So Revaluation Account and Realisation Account are not the same.

Question 3.
Profit on Revaluation Account is transferred to Continuing Partner’s Capital Account only.
Answer:
This statement is False.
Profit on revaluation of assets and liabilities is to be shared by all the partners, including retiring partners. This is because changes in the value of assets and liabilities take place due to the hard work of all the partners, including retiring partners.

Question 4.
On the retirement of a partner, the partnership deed is not changed.
Answer:
This statement is False.
On the retirement of a partner, profit and loss ratio, capital ratio, etc. may get changed. So the partnership deed is supposed to be changed.

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Reconstitution of Partnership (Retirement of Partner)

Question 5.
A retiring partner is not entitled to share in the goodwill of the firm.
Answer:
This statement is False.
A retiring partner is entitled to get a share in the goodwill of the firm up to the date of retirement as it is his legal right.

Question 6.
If goodwill is written off, Goodwill A/c is credited in the books of the firm.
Answer:
This statement is True.
When goodwill of the firm is written off then there is no question of any balance in the Goodwill Account therefore Goodwill A/c is credited in the books of the firm.

Question 7.
Balance of Retiring Partner’s Capital Account is transferred to his Legal Heir’s Account.
Answer:
This statement is False.
If the financial position of the firm allows, the balance of the Retiring Partner’s Capital Account is given immediately to the retiring partner, otherwise, it will be transferred to Retiring Partner’s Loan Account.

Question 8.
The Capital A/c of the retiring partner always shows a debit balance.
Answer:
This statement is False.
The Capital A/c of the retiring partner may show debit or credit balance depends upon the amount withdrawn by a retiring partner.

Question 9.
Retirement of a partner leads to the dissolution of the firm unless otherwise agreed upon.
Answer:
This statement is True.
At the time of retirement of a partner, continuing partners don’t want to continue the business activities of the firm, then only it leads to the dissolution of the firm.

D. Fill in the blanks and rewrite the following sentences:

Question 1.
On retirement of a partner, partnership deed is _____________ changed.
Answer:
not

Question 2.
A retiring partner is _____________ to get his share in general reserve/accumulated profit.
Answer:
entitled

Question 3.
A _____________ balance of Revaluation Account means loss on revaluation.
Answer:
debit

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Reconstitution of Partnership (Retirement of Partner)

Question 4.
Goodwill A/c is _____________ in the books of the firm when goodwill is written off.
Answer:
credited

Question 5.
Revaluation of Assets and Liabilities is recorded in _____________ Account.
Answer:
Revaluation

Question 6.
The amount due to a partner on his retirement is transferred to _____________ Account.
Answer:
Partner’s Capital

Question 7.
An amount payable to the retiring partner is paid off at a time is known as _____________ Method.
Answer:
Lumpsum

Question 8.
Excess of actual capital over proportional capital is known as _____________
Answer:
Surplus

Question 9.
Credit balance of Revaluation Account means _____________ on revaluation.
Answer:
Profit

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Reconstitution of Partnership (Retirement of Partner)

Question 10.
The credit balance on the Profit and Loss Suspense Account is shown in the Balance Sheet on _____________ side.
Answer:
Liabilities

E. Answer in one sentence.

Question 1.
Who is a retiring partner?
Answer:
A partner who leaves the firm or severs his connection or relationship with other partners on account of old age or continued ill health or loss of interest in the firm or similar other reasons is called a retiring partner.

Question 2.
How would you treat general reserve on the retirement of a partner?
Answer:
General reserve appearing on the liabilities side of the Balance Sheet may be credited to all the partners’ Capital Accounts in their old profit sharing ratio or only the share of retiring partner is credited to his Capital Account, depending on the provisions made in the partnership deed.

Question 3.
When is the gain ratio calculated?
Answer:
The gain ratio is calculated when a firm raises goodwill to the extent of retiring partner’s share and then intends to write off the goodwill so raised.

Question 4.
To which account, increase in the value of assets credited at the time of retirement of a partner?
Answer:
An increase in the values of assets is credited to Profit and Loss-Adjustment A/c or Revaluation A/c at the time of retirement of a partner.

Question 5.
How would you adjust the retiring partner’s share of goodwill without opening Goodwill A/c?
Answer:
Adjustment of retiring partner’s share of goodwill without opening Goodwill Account is done by debiting continuing Partners’ Capital/Current Accounts in their gain ratio and crediting Retiring Partners’ Capital/Current Account with that amount.

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Reconstitution of Partnership (Retirement of Partner)

Question 6.
To which account is the outstanding amount due to the retiring partner transferred?
Answer:
The outstanding amount due to the retiring partner is transferred to the retiring partner’s Loan Account.

Solved Problems

Question 1.
A, B, and C are partners of a firm sharing profit and loss in the 3 : 3 : 2 ratio. Their firm’s Balance Sheet as of 31st March, 2020 is as under:
Balance Sheet as of 31st March 2020
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Reconstitution of Partnership (Retirement of Partner) Q1
On 1st April 2020, C retired from the firm on the following terms:
1. Outstanding amount of retiring partner C be transferred to his loan account.
2. Write off ₹ 2,500 as bad debts.
3. ₹ 500 is now not payable to creditors.
4. Assets are revalued as under:
Furniture ₹ 30,000, Machinery ₹ 40,000, Equipments ₹ 21,000.
Pass necessary journal entries in the books of a firm.
Solution:
Journal Entries in the books of Partnership firm
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Reconstitution of Partnership (Retirement of Partner) Q1.1
Working Note:
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Reconstitution of Partnership (Retirement of Partner) Q1.2
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Reconstitution of Partnership (Retirement of Partner) Q1.3

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Reconstitution of Partnership (Retirement of Partner)

Question 2.
Mukta, Yukta and Sukta were partners sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 5 : 2 : 3. Their Balance Sheet was as follows:
Balance Sheet as of 31st March 2020
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Reconstitution of Partnership (Retirement of Partner) Q2
Yukta retired on that date on the following terms:
1. Machinery is to be depreciated by 10% and Furniture by 20%.
2. Stock is to be appreciated by 10% and Building by 20%.
3. R.D.D. is no longer necessary.
4. Provision is to be made for ₹ 4,000 being compensation to workers.
5. The goodwill of the firm is to be valued at ₹ 20,000 and Yukta’s share in it should be raised.
6. Both the remaining partners decided to write off the goodwill.
7. Amount payable to Yukta is to be kept as her Loan.
Prepare:
1. Profit and Loss Adjustment Account
2. Partners’ Capital Accounts
3. New Balance Sheet.
Solution:
In the books of partnership firm
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Reconstitution of Partnership (Retirement of Partner) Q2.1
Balance Sheet as of 1st April 2020
Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Reconstitution of Partnership (Retirement of Partner) Q2.2
Working Notes:
1. Yukta’s share in firm’s Goodwill = \(\frac {2}{10}\) × 20,000 = ₹ 4,000.
Goodwill to the extent of ₹ 4,000 is credited to Yukta’s A/c and then debited to Mukta’s Capital A/c andSukta’s Capital A/c in their gain ratio which is equal to the new ratio i.e. 5 : 3.
Hence, Goodwill debited to Mukta’s Capital A/c = \(\frac {5}{8}\) × 4,000 = ₹ 2,500 and Sukta’s A/c = \(\frac {3}{8}\) × 4,000 = ₹ 1,500.

2. Provision for compensation to workers ₹ 4,000 is first debited to Profit and Loss-Adjustment A/c (as new liability is created) and then it is shown on the Liabilities side of the new Balance Sheet.

Maharashtra Board 12th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Reconstitution of Partnership (Retirement of Partner)

3. The cancelled R.D.D. ₹ 1,000 is credited to Profit and Loss-Adjustment A/c and Debtors to the extent of ₹ 18,000 are shown on the Assets side of the Balance Sheet.